[Illustration: SULPHUR ISLAND. _Published Jany. 1. 1818. By John Murray, Albemarle Street, London. _] ACCOUNT OF A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY TO THE WEST COAST OF COREA, AND THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND; WITH AN APPENDIX, CONTAINING CHARTS, AND VARIOUS HYDROGRAPHICAL AND SCIENTIFIC NOTICES. BY CAPTAIN BASIL HALL, ROYAL NAVY, F. R. S. LOND. & EDIN. MEMBER OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF CALCUTTA, OF THE LITERARY SOCIETY OFBOMBAY, AND OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES AT BATAVIA. AND A VOCABULARY OF THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE, BY H. J. CLIFFORD, ESQ. LIEUTENANT ROYAL NAVY. LONDONJOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE-STREET. 1818. TOCAPTAIN MURRAY MAXWELL, Knight Companion to the Bath, TO WHOSEABILITY IN CONDUCTING THIS VOYAGE, ZEAL IN GIVING ENCOURAGEMENT TO EVERY INQUIRY, SAGACITY IN DISCOVERING THE DISPOSITION OF THE NATIVES, AND ADDRESS IN GAINING THEIR CONFIDENCE AND GOOD WILL, IS TO BE ATTRIBUTEDWHATEVER MAY BE FOUND INTERESTING OR USEFULIN THE FOLLOWING PAGES, THIS WORKIS MOST RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED, BYTHE AUTHORS. PREFACE. The following work contains a Narrative of the Voyage to the West Coastof Corea, and the Great Loo-choo Island; an Appendix, containingNautical details; and a Vocabulary of the Language spoken at Loo-choo. In drawing up the Narrative from journals written at the time, I havederived great assistance from notes made by Lieutenant H. J. Clifford, ofthe Navy. This officer obtained permission from the Admiralty toaccompany me, though on half pay, and having no specific duty toperform, he was enabled to devote himself entirely to the acquisition ofknowledge; and had it in his power to record many interestingoccurrences of the voyage, which the numerous duties of my station leftme but little leisure to observe or describe. All the Charts, Tables, and Nautical Notices have been placed in anAppendix, in order to avoid the interruption which such details are aptto occasion when inserted in a journal; and the Nautical reader willperhaps consider it advantageous, to have this part of the subject setapart, and condensed, instead of being scattered over the pages of thenarrative. I am indebted to Mr. Clifford for very important assistance incollecting and arranging the materials which form this Appendix. The northern part of the Chart of the Yellow Sea, given in the Appendix, was taken from a Chart by Captain Daniel Ross, of the Bombay marine, thescientific and able surveyor commanding the squadron which theHonourable East India Company, in the spirit of a liberal and enlargedpolicy, have employed for upwards of nine years, in surveying the ChinaSeas. The Vocabulary is exclusively compiled by Mr. Clifford, who took thegreatest pains to collect words and sentences in common use; and though, from the shortness of our stay, this part of the work is necessarilyincomplete, it is hoped that a future voyager will derive considerableassistance from it, in his intercourse with the natives. The drawings of scenery and costume were made by Mr. William Havell, theeminent artist who accompanied the Embassy, from sketches taken on thespot, by Mr. C. W. Browne, midshipman of the Alceste, and myself. Nothing respecting the west side of Corea has hitherto been accuratelyknown to Europeans. The coast laid down in most Charts has been takenfrom the celebrated map of the Jesuits, which is very correct in whatrelates to China, but erroneous with respect to Corea. The Jesuits, indeed, did not survey this country, but have inserted it in their map, I believe, from Japanese authorities. Captain Broughton in his voyage to the North Pacific Ocean visited theSouth Coast of Corea, and his account of the inhabitants agrees withours in most particulars. The same distinguished voyager visited the Great Loo-choo Island in1797, after having been shipwrecked near Typinsan, one of its dependantislands. He was at Napakiang for a few days, and his account of thenatives is highly interesting. There is an article by Pere Gaubil, a missionary, on the subject of theLoo-choo Islands, in the 23d vol. Of the "Lettres Edifiantes etCurieuses. " It is a translation from the official report of a Chineseembassador sent to Loo-choo by the Emperor Kang Hi; our opportunities, however, were not sufficient to enable us to judge of the accuracy ofthis curious memoir. CONTENTS NARRATIVE. CHAPTER I. H. M. S. Alceste and Lyra leave the Yellow Sea on a Voyage of Discovery--Sir James Hall's Group on the Coast of Corea--Unsociable Character of the Natives--Hutton's Island--Interesting geological Structure--Anchor near the Main Land--Corean Chief's Visit--Objections made to Strangers landing--Distress of the Chief--His Character--Departure from Basil's Bay--Clusters of Islands--Murray's Sound--Deserted Corean Village--View from the Summit of a high Peak--Interview with the Coreans--Peculiarities of their Character--Language--Erroneous geographical Position of this Coast--Leave Corea Page 1 CHAPTER II. Enter the Japan Sea--Sulphur Island--Volcano--See the Great Loo-choo Island--Lyra nearly wrecked--First Interview with the Natives--Anchor at Napakiang--Natives crowd on Board--Their interesting Appearance and Manners--Several Chiefs visit the Alceste--Land to make Observations--Astonishment of the Natives--Six Chiefs visit the Ships--Alceste and Lyra proceed farther in Shore--A Chief of high Rank waits upon Captain Maxwell--Return his Visit--Feast--Projected Survey of the Anchorage--Visit Reef Island--The Lyra sent to look for another Harbour--Arrangements for landing the Alceste's Stores--Description of the Temple and Garden--First Acquaintance with Mádera--Study of the Language 58 CHAPTER III. The Lyra sent to survey the Island of Loo-choo--Discovery of Port Melville--Description of that Harbour, and the Villages on its Banks--Lyra nearly wrecked--Interview with Natives at the South Point--Return to Napakiang--Behaviour of the Natives at a Seaman's Funeral--Mádera's Character and Conduct--Sociable Habits of the Natives--Dinner given to the Chiefs of the Island by Captain Maxwell--Mádera's Behaviour on this Occasion--Two Women seen--A Lady of Rank visits the Boatswain's Wife--Captain Maxwell fractures his Finger--Loo-choo Surgeon--Concern of the Natives--Visit of the Prince--Discussion about the King of Loo-choo's Letter--Mádera appears in a new Character--Feast given by the Prince--List of Supplies given to the Ships--Behaviour of the Prince on taking Leave--Preparations for Departure--Mádera's Distress--Last Interview with the Chiefs--Brief Memorandums upon the Religion, Manners, and Customs of Loo-choo--Advice to a Stranger visiting this Island 135 APPENDIX. Notice explanatory of a Chart of the Gulf of Pe-chee-lee v Notice to accompany the Chart of the West Coast of Corea x Notice to accompany the general Chart of the Great Loo-choo Island in the Japan Sea, and the Charts of Napakiang Roads and Port Melville xvii Observations made at the Observatory at Napakiang xxix Table of Observations made with Dr. Wollaston's Dip Sector: with an Engraving, and a Description of this Instrument, and Directions for its Use xxxi Meteorological Journal, from July to November 1816, while the Ships were in the Yellow and Japan Seas li Abstract of the Lyra's Voyage, from leaving England till her Return; shewing the Distance between the different Places at which she touched, and the Time taken in performing each Passage cix Geological Memorandum; being a Description of the Specimens of Rocks collected at Macao and the Ladrone Islands, on the Shores of the Yellow Sea, the West Coast of Corea, and the Great Loo-choo Island cxix VOCABULARY. PART I. --English and Loo-choo words. PART II. --Sentences in English and Loo-choo, with a literal Translation. Loo-choo and Japanese Numerals--Names of Persons at Napakiang--Names of Places--Days of the Moon--Orders of Rank--Tattoo Marks--Hours of the Day. Comparison between the Japanese and Loo-choo Languages. Comparison between the Loo-choo and Insu Languages. Comparison between the Loo-choo, Japanese, and Insu Languages. Corean Words. DIRECTIONS FOR PLACING THE PLATES. Sulphur Island, to face the Title Page. Corean Chief and Secretary To face Page 16 Napakiang 77 Loo-choo Chief and his two Sons 97 Priest and Gentleman of Loo-choo 132 The Prince of Loo-choo 176 Scene after the Prince's Feast 196 Gentleman of Loo-choo in his Cloak 215 Bridge of Napakiang 222 APPENDIX. Chart of the Gulf of Pe-chee-lee v Coast of Corea x Chart of the Great Loo-choo Island xix Napakiang Roads xxi Port Melville xxiv Wollaston's Dip Sector xxxiii * * * * * [Transcriber's note: The following errors have been corrected in the text. ] ERRATA. Page 1, line 2 from bottom, for _11th August_, read _9th August_. Page 60, top line, for _was_, read _saw_. APPENDIX. Meteorological Journal. --Longitude on the 1st Sept. For 124. 20, read 124. 48. The longitudes in the Met. Journ. From the 3d to the 7th of Sept. Inclusiveare too small by 15'. VOCABULARY. For _Tatesee_, read _Tatsee_. For _Teetesee_, read _Teetsee_. For _Meetesee_, read _Meetsee_. For _Eeotesee_, read _Eeotsee_. For _Eeyatesee_, read _Eeyatsee_. For _opposite_, read _under_, in the note on the word Hour. [Transcriber's Note: a letter with a macron above it is denoted by [=x]. ] VOYAGE TO THE WEST COAST OF COREA AND THE LOO-CHOO ISLANDS. * * * * * CHAPTER I. H. M. S. Alceste and Lyra leave the Yellow Sea on a Voyage of Discovery--Sir James Hall's Group on the Coast of Corea--Unsociable Character of the Natives--Hutton's Island--Interesting geological Structure--Anchor near the Main Land--Corean Chiefs Visit--Objections made to Strangers landing--Distress of the Chief--His Character--Departure from Basil's Bay--Clusters of Islands--Murray's Sound--Deserted Corean Village--View from the Summit of a high Peak--Interview with the Coreans--Peculiarities of their Character--Language--Erroneous geographical Position of this Coast--Leave Corea. The embassy to China, under the Right Honourable Lord Amherst, leftEngland in his Majesty's frigate Alceste, Captain Murray Maxwell, C. B. , on the 9th of February, 1816, and landed near the mouth of the Pei-horiver, in the Yellow Sea, on the 9th of August. Shortly afterwards theAlceste and Lyra sloop of war, which had accompanied the embassy, proceeded to the coast of Corea, the eastern boundary of the Yellow Sea;for as these ships were not required in China before the return of theEmbassador by land to Canton, it was determined to devote the intervalto an examination of some places in those seas, of which little or noprecise information then existed. The following pages give the detailsof this voyage. 1st of September. --This morning at daylight the land of Corea was seenin the eastern quarter. Having stood towards it, we were at nine o'clocknear three high islands, differing in appearance from the country we hadleft, being wooded to the top, and cultivated in the lower parts, butnot in horizontal terraces as at the places we had last visited inChina. We proceeded to the southward of the group, and anchored in afine bay at the distance of two or three miles from the southern island. Shortly after anchoring, a boat came from the shore with five or sixnatives, who stopped, when within fifty yards of the brig, and lookingat us with an air of curiosity and distrust, paid no attention to thesigns which were made to induce them to come alongside. They expressedno alarm when we went to them in our boat; and on our rowing towards theshore, followed us till we landed near a village. The inhabitants camein a body to meet us, forming an odd assemblage, different in manyrespects from any thing we had seen; their colour was a deep copper, andtheir appearance forbidding, and somewhat savage. Some men, who appearedto be superior to the rest, were distinguished by a hat, the brim ofwhich was nearly three feet in diameter, and the crown, which was aboutnine inches high, and scarcely large enough to admit the top of thehead, was shaped like a sugar-loaf with the end cut off. The texture ofthis strange hat is of a fine open work like the dragon-fly's wing; itappears to be made of horse-hair varnished over, and is fastened underthe chin by a band strung with large beads, mostly black and white, butoccasionally red or yellow. Some of the elderly men wore stiff gauzecaps over their hair, which was formed into a high conical knot on thetop of the head. Their dress consisted of loose wide trowsers, and asort of frock reaching nearly to the knee, made of a coarse open grasscloth, and on their feet neat straw sandals. They were of the middlesize, remarkably well made, and robust looking. At first they expressedsome surprise on examining our clothes, but afterwards took very littleinterest in any thing belonging to us. Their chief anxiety was to getrid of us as soon as possible. This they expressed in a manner tooobvious to be mistaken; for, on our wishing to enter the village, theyfirst made motions for us to go the other way; and when we persevered, they took us rudely by the arms and pushed us off. Being very desirousto conciliate them, we shewed no impatience at this treatment; but ourforbearance had no effect; and after a number of vain attempts to makeourselves understood, we went away not much pleased at their behaviour. A Chinese[1], who accompanied us, was of no use, for he could not readwhat the Coreans wrote for him, though in the Chinese character; and oftheir spoken language he did not understand a word. On leaving these unsociable villagers, we went to the top of the highestpeak on the island, the ascent being easy by a winding foot-path. Fromthis elevation we saw a number of islands to the eastward, and the mainland at a great distance beyond them. The top of the hill being coveredwith soft grass and sweet-smelling shrubs, and the air, which had beenof a suffocating heat below, being here cool and refreshing, we weretempted to sit down to our pic-nic dinner. We returned by the other sideof the hill; but there being no path, and the surface rocky and steep, and covered with a thick brushwood, we were not a little scratched andbruised before we reached a road which runs along the north face of thehill about midway. By following this, we came to a spot from whence wewere enabled to look down upon the village, without being ourselvesperceived by the natives. The women, who had deserted the village onour landing, had now returned; most of them were beating rice in woodenmortars, and they had all children tied on their backs. On a sudden theyquitted their work and ran off to their huts, like rabbits in a warren;and in a few minutes we saw one of the ship's boats row round the pointof land adjacent to the village, which explained the cause of theiralarm. After remaining for some time in expectation of seeing the womenagain, we came down to the village, which the natives now permitted usto pass through. On this occasion one of the gentlemen of our party saw, for an instant, a woman at no great distance, whose feet he declaredwere of the natural size, and not cramped as in China. The villageconsists of forty houses rudely constructed of reeds plaistered withmud, the roofs are of all shapes, and badly thatched with reeds andstraw, tied down by straw ropes. These huts are not disposed in streets, but are scattered about without order, and without any neatness, orcleanliness, and the spaces between them are occupied by piles of dirtand pools of muddy water. The valley in which this comfortless villageis situated is, however, pretty enough, though not wooded; the hillsforming it are of an irregular shape, and covered at top with grass andsweet-scented flowers; the lower parts are cultivated with millet, buckwheat, a kind of French bean, and tobacco, which last grows in greatquantity; and here and there is a young oak-tree. We saw bullocks and poultry, but the natives would not exchange themfor our money, or for any thing we had to offer. They refused dollarswhen offered as a present, and, indeed, appeared to set no value uponany thing we shewed them, except wine glasses; but even these they wereunwilling to receive. One of the head men appeared particularly pleasedwith a glass, which, after a good deal of persuasion, he accepted, but, in about five minutes after, he, and another man to whom a tumbler hadbeen given, came back and insisted upon returning the presents; andthen, without waiting for further persuasion, returned to the village, leaving with us only one man, who, as soon as all the rest were out ofsight, accepted one of the glasses with much eagerness. These people have a proud sort of carriage, with an air of composure andindifference about them, and an absence of curiosity which struck us asbeing very remarkable. Sometimes when we succeeded, by dint of signs anddrawings, in expressing the nature of a question, they treated it withderision and insolence. On one occasion, being anxious to buy a clumsysort of rake made of reeds, which appeared to me curious, I succeeded inexplaining my wish to the owner, one of the lowest class of villagers;he laughed at first good humouredly, but immediately afterwards seizedthe rake which was in my hand, and gave it a rude push towards me with adisdainful fling of the arm, accompanying this gesticulation by words, which seemed to imply a desire to give any thing upon condition of ourgoing away. One man expressed the general wish for our departure, byholding up a piece of paper like a sail, and then blowing upon it in thedirection of the wind, at the same time pointing to the ships, therebydenoting that the wind was fair, and that we had only to set sail andleave the island. Several of the people were marked with the small-pox. The children kept out of our reach at first, but before we went away, their fears had, in some degree, subsided, for the boys, who, from theirfeminine appearance, were mistaken at first for girls, accompanied us tosome distance from the village. Captain Maxwell named these islands Sir James Hall's group, incompliment to the President of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. They liein longitude 124º 46' E. And latitude 37º 50' N. At eight o'clock in the evening we weighed and stood to the southward, but as the coast was quite unknown, we kept rather off shore during thenight, and in the morning no land was in sight. On the 2d we stood tothe eastward, but not having daylight enough to get in with the coast, it became necessary to anchor for the night, though in deep water. 3d of September. --Having reached nearly lat. 36-1/3 N. And long. 126 E. We sailed this morning amongst a range of islands extending as far asthe eye could reach, both to the southward and northward, at thedistance of six or seven leagues from the main land. By two o'clock wewere close to the outer cluster of the islands, and the passagesappearing clear between them, we sailed through and anchored inside. While passing one of these islands in the ships, at no great distance, it looked so curiously formed, that, on anchoring, we went in the boatsto examine its structure more minutely[2]. While we were thus engaged, the natives had assembled in a crowd on the edge of the cliff above us;they did not seem pleased with our occupation of breaking their rocks, for, from the moment we landed, they never ceased to indicate by shouts, screams, and all kinds of gesticulations, that the sooner we quitted theisland the better; the cliff being 200 feet high, and nearlyperpendicular, it was fortunate for us that they confined themselves tosigns and clamour, and did not think of enforcing their wishes by ashower of stones. As soon as we had completed our investigation of this spot, we wentround in the boats to a small bay where there was good landing. Here wewere met by the natives, who addressed several long speeches to us in avery loud tone of voice; to which we replied in English, that our wishwas merely to look at the island, without interfering with any body; atthe same time we proceeded up a foot-path to the brow of a hill. Thisthe natives did not seem at all to relish, and they made use of a signwhich was sufficiently expressive of their anxiety, though we could notdetermine exactly to whom it referred. They drew their fans across theirown throats, and sometimes across ours, as if to signify that our goingon would lead to heads being cut off; but whether they or we were to bethe sufferers was not apparent. It was suggested by one of our partythat they dreaded being called to account by their own chiefs forpermitting us to land. All these signs, however, did not prevent ouradvancing till we had reached the brow of the hill to which the pathled; from this place we had a view of a village at the distance of halfa mile, of a much better appearance than that above described. Treeswere interspersed among the houses, which were pleasantly situated atthe bottom of a little cove, with fishing-boats at anchor near it. Weexplained readily enough that our wish was to go to the village, but itwas all in vain, for their anxiety increased every moment, and wedesisted from any further attempts to advance. The dress of these people is a loose white robe, cloth shoes, and a fewwear the broad hats before described; by most the hair is tied in a highconical knot on the top of the head, but by others it is allowed to flyloose, so as to give them a wild appearance. Some confine the short hairby a small gauze band with a star on one side, forming, along with thetop knot, rather a becoming head-dress. Their beards and whiskers which, apparently, had never been cut, and their fans and long tobacco-pipes, and their strange language and manners, gave a grotesque air to thewhole group, which it is impossible to describe. They crowded about us, and, by repeated shouts, manifested their surprise at the form andtexture of our clothes; but on a watch being shewn, they disregardedevery thing else, and entreated to be allowed to examine it closely. Itwas evidently the first they had seen, and some of them while watchingthe second-hand, looked as if they thought it alive. From the watch theyproceeded to examine the seals and keys; with the former they shewedthemselves acquainted by pressing them on their hands, so as to cause animpression. Their attention was drawn away from the watch by our firinga musket, which made the whole party fall back several paces. After amusing ourselves in this manner for some time, we walked back tothe boats, to the great joy of the natives, who encouraged us by allmeans to hasten our departure. They took our hands and helped us overthe slippery stones on the beach; and, on perceiving one of the boatsaground, several of them stript and jumped into the water to push heroff. This gave us an opportunity of observing their remarkable symmetryand firmness of limb; yet, as their long hair was allowed to flow abouttheir neck and shoulders, their appearance was truly savage. During thisvisit we saw no women; but the children came round us without shewingany symptoms of fear. The people, upon the whole, are more free, and notso surly as our acquaintance on Sir James Hall's group. They have asingular custom of speaking with a loud tone, amounting almost to ashout. Captain Maxwell named this island after Dr. Hutton the geologist. 4th of September. --During all last night it remained perfectly calm. Atnine o'clock in the morning we got under weigh with a fine sea breeze, and stood in for the land, leaving on either hand many well cultivatedislands. The main land seems to be populous, from the number of largevillages which we passed, and the cultivation which extends aconsiderable way up the mountains. Our object this morning was todiscover some safe anchoring place in the main land, but we were obligedto coast along for a considerable distance before any opening appeared. About three o'clock we sailed round a point of land and discovered abay, which, at first sight, promised shelter, but the water proved tooshallow even for the Lyra, and we anchored far out in five fathoms. Thenatives who had assembled in crowds on the point shouted to us as wepassed, in seeming anger at our approaching so near. This bay is aboutfour miles in diameter, and is skirted by large villages built amongsttrees, and surrounded by cultivated districts, forming altogether ascene of considerable beauty. As soon as the Alceste had anchored, Captain Maxwell, Mr. Clifford, andI, went towards the nearest village in the bay. On approaching the shorewe observed a great bustle among the inhabitants on the shore, as wellas in the boats at anchor off the village. The people on the beachhastily jumped into canoes, whilst those in the large boats weighed theanchors, and pulled out with such expedition, as to meet us in a bodybefore we were near the landing-place. Every boat was crowded withpeople, and ornamented with numerous flags and streamers; but one ofthem being distinguished by a large blue umbrella, we steered towardsit, on the supposition that this was an emblem of rank; in which opinionwe were soon confirmed by the sound of music, which played only on boardthis boat. On coming closer, we saw a fine patriarchal figure seatedunder the umbrella; his full white beard covered his breast, and reachedbelow his middle; his robe or mantle, which was of blue silk, and of animmense size, flowed about him in a magnificent style. His sword wassuspended from his waist by a small belt, but the insignia of his officeappeared to be a slender black rod tipped with silver, about a foot anda half long, with a small leather thong at one end, and a piece of blackcrape tied to the other: this he held in his hand. His hat exceeded inbreadth of brim any thing we had yet met with, being, as we supposed, nearly three feet across. As this was evidently the chief of the party, we pulled alongside andgot into his boat, where he received us with much politeness; but as helooked dissatisfied at this proceeding, we returned to our own boat, andthere carried on the conference. While we were endeavouring to makeourselves understood, the other boats gradually separated, and began toform a circle round us. Apprehending treachery, we prepared our arms, and pushed off to a little distance. The old gentleman, perceiving this, looked about very innocently to discover the cause of our alarm; and atlength being made aware by our signs of what was the matter, hecommanded all the boats to go to the other side. We now remained aconsiderable time without being able to make ourselves understood; forthe Chinese whom we had with us was quite ignorant of their language. Weendeavoured, by pointing to the shore, to signify our desire to land, while the old Chief, by similar signs, expressed his wish to go to theships. We accordingly rowed to the Lyra, which lay nearer to the shorethan the Alceste. When the Chief's boat was within ten yards of thebrig, they let go their anchor, and threw a rope on board her, by whichthey drew the boat alongside in a very seaman-like style. The old mandid not find it an easy matter to get up the ship's side, encumbered ashe was with his splendid robes; he was no sooner on board, however, thanwe were crowded with the natives, who boarded us on all sides. Someclimbed up the rigging, so as to overlook the quarter-deck; others goton the poop, and a line was formed along the hammock netting from oneend of the brig to the other. As the evening was fine, it was thoughtbest to entertain the venerable Chief upon deck, rather than give himthe trouble of going down to the cabin, which, indeed, we had reason tofear would prove too small for the party. Chairs were accordingly placedupon the deck; but the Chief made signs that he could not sit on achair, nor would he consent for a time to use his mat, which was broughton board by one of his attendants. He seemed embarrassed and displeased, which we could not at the moment account for, though it has sinceoccurred to us that he objected to the publicity of the conference. Atlength, however, he sat down on his mat, and began talking with greatgravity and composure, without appearing in the smallest degree sensiblethat we did not understand a single word that he said. We of coursecould not think of interrupting him, and allowed him to talk on at hisleisure; but when his discourse was concluded, he paused for our reply, which we made with equal gravity in English; upon this he betrayed greatimpatience at his harangue having been lost upon us, and supposing thatwe could, at all events, read, he called to his secretary, and began todictate a letter. The secretary sat down before him with all dueformality, and having rubbed his cake of ink upon a stone, drawn forthhis pen, and arranged a long roll of paper upon his knee, began thewriting, which was at length completed, partly from the directions ofthe Chief, and partly from his own ideas, as well as the occasionalsuggestions of the bystanders. The written part was then torn off fromthe scroll and handed to the Chief, who delivered it to me with theutmost confidence of its being understood: but his mortification anddisappointment were extreme on perceiving that he had overrated ouracquirements[3]. [Illustration: _Drawn by Wm. Havell, Calcutta. _ _Engraved byRobt Havell & Son. _ COREAN CHIEF and his SECRETARY. _Published Jany, 1, 1818, by John Murray, Albemarle Street, London. _] A debate now appeared to take place between the Chief and his followers, as to the mode of communicating with us; meanwhile, as we ourselves wereequally at a loss, we became anxious to relieve the old man'sembarrassment, by shewing him all the attention in our power, andcompletely succeeded in putting him into a good humour, by giving himsome cherry brandy, and distributing rum to his people. While these attempts at explanation were going on, the crowd of nativesincreased, and their curiosity became so great, that they pressed roundus in a way nowise agreeable. Some of them roved about the ship, andappeared highly entertained with every thing they saw. The Chiefhimself, however, did not appear at ease, but continued givingdirections to his officers and people about him with an air ofimpatience. He more than once ordered them all into their boats, butthey always returned after a few minutes. One man persevered in climbingover the hammocks, close to the Chief, to see what was going on. Thenoise made to keep him back attracted the Chief's attention, whoimmediately gave orders to one of the attendants for his being takenaway; it will be seen by and by what was his fate. The persons forming the suite of the Chief were dressed nearly in thesame manner as himself, excepting that their robes were white, and didnot contain such a profusion of cloth. They wore the large hats and widetrowsers tied above the ancle, with cotton shoes turned up a little atthe toe. The immediate attendants, who seemed also to be soldiers, weredifferently clothed: over a loose pink frock with wide sleeves, theyhave another which fits closer, and is without sleeves, the cornersbeing tucked up, like the skirts of some military uniforms. Their hat isa broad flat cone made of thick grass, the under part being embossedwith different coloured silks, and from a gilt ornament on the peakthere hangs a tassel made of peacock's feathers, and another of hairdyed red: some are armed with bows and arrows, others with only astraight sword, having no guard for the hand. A coarse frock withoutsleeves, and trowsers, or rather drawers, covering the thigh, are wornby the lower orders. It was nearly dark when the Chief gave directions for preparing theboats, at the same time calling to two of his attendants to assist himto get on his legs. Each took an arm, and in this way succeeded inraising him up, which was no sooner observed by the people, than theyjumped into their boats with the utmost alacrity, and the Chief, aftermany bows and salams, walked into his boat. This did not give him somuch trouble as he had experienced on coming on board, for a platform ofgratings and planks had been prepared for his accommodation during hisvisit, an attention with which he seemed much pleased. So far all seemedwell; but there was still something amiss, for the old man, seated instate under his umbrella, remained alongside with his attendants rangedon the deck about him, he and his people preserving the most perfectsilence, and making no signs to explain his wishes. We were greatlypuzzled to discover what the old gentleman wanted, till at length it wassuggested, that having paid us a visit, he expected a similar complimentin return. This idea was no sooner started, than we proceeded to pay ourrespects to him in his boat. He made signs for us to sit down, honouringus at the same with a corner of his own mat. When we were seated, helooked about as if in distress at having nothing to entertain us with, upon which a bottle of wine was sent for and given to him. He ordered anattendant to pour it into several bowls, and putting the bottle away, made signs for us to drink, but would not taste it himself till all ofus had been served. He was nowise discomposed at being obliged toentertain his company at their own expense; on the contrary, he carriedoff the whole affair with so much cheerfulness and ease, as to make ussuspect sometimes that he saw and enjoyed the oddity of the scene andcircumstances, as fully as we did ourselves. After sitting about ten minutes, we left the Chief in great good humour, and returned on board, thinking, of course, that he would go straight tothe shore; but in this we were much mistaken, for we had no sooner lefthim, than he pushed off to the distance of ten or twelve yards, andcalling the other boats round him, gave orders for inflicting thediscipline of the bamboo upon the unfortunate culprit, who had beenordered into confinement during the conference. This exhibition, whichit was evidently intended we should witness, had a very ludicrouseffect, for it followed so much in train with the rest of the ceremony, and was carried on with so much gravity and order, that it looked likean essential part of the etiquette. During the infliction of thispunishment, a profound silence was observed by all the party, except byfive or six persons immediately about the delinquent, whose cries theyaccompanied by a sort of song or yell at each blow of the bamboo. Thisspeedy execution of justice was, no doubt, intended to impress us withhigh notions of Corean discipline. As it was now quite dark, we did not expect the Chief to pay any morevisits this evening; but we underrated his politeness, for the momentthe above scene was concluded, he steered for the Alceste. CaptainMaxwell, who during all the time had been on board the Lyra, hurriedinto his boat to be prepared to give him a proper reception in his ship, and had just time to change his jacket for a coat and epaulettes beforethe Chief arrived. After climbing up the ship's side with somedifficulty, and being received in due form on the quarter-deck, whichwas lighted up, he was handed into the foremost cabin, where he was metby Captain Maxwell, and conducted to a seat in the after cabin. As hedeclined sitting on a chair, he was obliged to wait for his mat, and, inthe meantime, looked round him in amaze at the magnificence of theapartments. The change of dress made him behave towards Captain Maxwellas to a perfect stranger; but the moment he recognised him, he appearedmuch amused with his mistake, and his manners became less reserved. Henow turned about to see what was become of his mat, and was astonishedto find himself alone with us in the cabin. It was then discovered thatthe sentry at the door, in repressing the crowd of his followers, hadfound it impossible to distinguish his more immediate attendants, andhad therefore allowed nobody to pass. The door being opened, the mat-bearer and four of the principal peoplewere called in by the Chief; and when we were all fairly seated on thedeck, the secretary was directed to prepare a writing, which wasdictated and delivered much in the same manner as before. Whether thepresentation of a written paper was considered by the Chief as anecessary piece of etiquette, or whether he really had more hopes ofbeing understood on this occasion than before, was quite uncertain; butthe mode adopted by Captain Maxwell to undeceive him was conclusive. Heimmediately called for paper, and wrote upon it in English, "I do notunderstand one word that you say, " and presented this paper in return, with all the forms and ceremonies that had been adopted towards himself. The Chief, on receiving it, examined the characters with greatattention, and then made signs that it was wholly unintelligible, alternately looking at the paper and at Captain Maxwell with aninquiring air, and was only made sensible of the awkward dilemma inwhich we were placed, by observing Captain Maxwell repeat all his looksand gestures as equally applicable to the Corean writing which he heldin his hand[4]. The Chief had now recourse to signs, which he used ever afterwards. Hewas in great spirits, and seemed entertained with the efforts which weremade to please him. He asked to look at a mirror which had caught hisattention; when it was put into his hands, he seemed very well satisfiedwith the figure which it presented, and continued for some time pullinghis beard from side to side with an air of perfect complacency. One ofthe attendants thought there could be no harm in looking at the mirrorlikewise, but the Chief was of a different opinion, and no soonerobserved what he was doing, than he very angrily made him put down theglass and leave the cabin. The secretary too fell under his displeasure, and was reprimanded with much acrimony for overlooking our paper when wewere writing. Scarcely five minutes elapsed, in short, during his stay, without his finding some cause of complaint against his people; but wecould not determine whether this arose from mere captiousness, or wasdone to give us a higher notion of his consequence, because, in theintervals, he was all cheerfulness and good humour. He was offered teaand cherry brandy, which he took along with us, and appeared at his easein every respect. We thought that he made signs, implying a wish for usto visit him on shore; to this we cheerfully assented, and anarrangement for landing in the morning was made accordingly by means ofsimilar signs, with which the Chief appeared much pleased, and rose togo away. He had not got much beyond the cabin-door, however, before the serenityof his temper was once more overturned. On passing the gun-roomsky-light, he heard the voices of some of his people whom the officershad taken below, and who were enjoying themselves very merrily amongsttheir new acquaintance. The old Chief looked down, and observing themdrinking and making a noise, he called to them in a loud passionatevoice, which made them leave their glasses, and run up the ladder ingreat terror. From thence the alarm spread along the lower deck, to themidshipmen's berth, where another party was carousing. The grog and winewith which they had been entertained was too potent for this party, asthey did not seem to care much for the old Chief, who, posting himselfat the hatchway, ascertained, by personal examination, who the offenderswere. On this occasion, his little rod of office was of much use; hepushed the people about with it to make them speak, and used it to turnthem round, in order to discover their faces. One man watching hisopportunity when the Chief was punching away at somebody who had justcome up, slipped past and ran off; but the quick eye of the old man wasnot so easily deceived, and he set off in chase of him round thequarter deck. The man had an apron full of biscuit, which had beengiven to him by the midshipmen; this impeded his running, so that theChief, notwithstanding his robes, at last came up with him; but while hewas stirring him up with his rod, the fellow slipped his cargo of breadinto a coil of rope, and then went along with the Chief quietly enough. The old man came back afterwards, and found the biscuit, which hepointed out to us, to shew that it had not been taken away. He continued for some time at the hatchway, expecting more people; butfinding none come up, he went below himself, to the main deck, andrummaged under the guns and round the main-mast, to discover whether anyone was concealed; but finding no person there, he came again upon deck, and shortly after went into his boat. On returning to the Lyra, we found a number of boats anchored round her, which looked as if they meant to keep strict watch over us. We went inour boat to one of them, where we found the crew asleep. They seemed tohave had orders not to follow the Chief to the frigate, and were herewaiting his return. On our pointing to the shore, and making signs thatthe old man with the long beard and large hat had landed, they beganimmediately to get their anchor up, and called to the other boats to dothe same. In a few minutes they were all at work, and every person inthe boats joined in repeating the two words "ho ya, ho ya, " the effectof which, from a great many voices, was not unpleasing. The cable in these boats is wound round a large reel or barrel; to theends of which two wheels with handles are fitted, which enables aconsiderable number to apply their strength at the same moment. Theanchor is made of a dark coloured, heavy wood, with a long shank andflukes, and a short stock crossing the former, near the crown of theanchor, and not at the end of the shank, as with us in Europe. The matsails are divided into horizontal divisions by slender pieces of bamboo. When not under sail, the boats are moved by oars having a circular pieceof wood tied to the end, and are steered by a large scull over thestern. The bow is square above, but rises from the water in a slope, making a small angle with the water, like the end of a coal barge, butoverhanging more. The planks are fastened together by means of squaretree-nails, which pass in a slanting direction through the plank, andnot straight, as with us. 5th of September. --A considerable bustle was observed on shore atdaybreak this morning; and shortly afterwards, we saw the old Chief andhis suite embark, and pull towards us, accompanied by a numerous fleetof smaller boats, all ornamented with showy flags, and crowded withpeople in gay and bright coloured garments, forming, upon the whole, asplendid and imposing scene. As the procession moved slowly along, theband in the Chief's boat struck up a lively, martial sort of air, oninstruments similar to those we had heard last night; the tone of whichis not unlike the drawling sound of the bagpipe, the bass or drone beingproduced by a long horn, and the squeaking sounds by four trumpets, twoof which have stops in the middle, by which the notes are distinctlymarked. The Chief's visit was so unexpectedly early, that we had not put thingsin order for his reception, before he was alongside: he came on board, however, and seemed happy at being allowed to walk about the decks, andexamine every thing at his leisure. When the cabin was ready, and theChief seemed to have satisfied himself with looking round the upperdeck, he was asked to walk down; which he complied with as soon as heunderstood what was meant. But he found it no easy matter to get downthe narrow hatchway, in which there was barely room for his hat; butthis he would by no means take off. As he entered the cabin, his robesand hat completely filled the door-way; and when seated at the table, (for he now made no objection to a chair) he occupied no inconsiderableportion of the whole apartment. He sat here for some time, and examinedevery thing in the cabin with great attention, pointing with the littlestick whenever he saw any thing which he wanted to look at more closely. In this way, the books, globes, glasses, &c. Were put into his hands;and it was not a little amusing to see the old gentleman wheeling theglobes round, and hunting over the books for pictures, like a child. Aperson of rank who accompanied the Chief this morning, was asked to thecabin along with him; and was no sooner seated, than we observed that hehad a very sickly look; which circumstance was the cause of a curiousmistake. It had been supposed that the Chief, during last night'sconference, made allusions to some friend of his who was unwell; andaccordingly, in our arrangements for the morning, it was proposed totake the doctors of both ships on shore, to visit him. As the Chief hadhimself come on board, our plans for landing were interrupted, and weascribed this early visit to his anxiety on account of his friend'shealth. It was therefore taken for granted, that this sickly looking companionof the Chief, who, some how or other, got the title of the "Courtier, "amongst us, was the patient alluded to last night; and no sooner werethe first compliments over in the cabin, than the doctor was sent for toprescribe. On his being introduced, the Courtier was made to hold outhis tongue, have his pulse felt, and submit to various interrogatories, the object of which the unfortunate man could not divine, particularlyas there was nothing at all the matter with him. He submitted with somuch patience to all these forms, and the Chief looked on with suchgrave propriety during all the examination, that they evidentlyconsidered the whole scene as a part of our ceremonial etiquette. Whenthis gentleman was released from the doctor's hands, he began to examinethe books with the air of a person who understands what he is about. Heappeared desirous of passing for a literary character; and observing ushand the books about in a careless manner, ventured to ask for one, bydrawing it towards himself with a begging look. As he happened to selecta volume of the Encyclopædia Britannica, I was under the necessity ofrefusing; but offered in its stead a less valuable, though more showybook, which he accepted with much gratitude. No return, of course, hadbeen looked for, and I was for a moment at a loss to understand what myfriend meant, by slipping his fan into my hand, under the table. He didthis in so mysterious a way, when the Chief was looking in anotherdirection, that I saw it was his wish to conceal what he had done, andthe fan was sent privately away. But unfortunately, my precaution wasfruitless, for a few minutes afterwards, on finding the crowded cabinvery hot, I called for a fan, and the servant, unconscious of themischief he was doing, brought the Courtier's present; which no soonermet the old man's eye, than he rose half off his chair, and gave hisunhappy companion such a look of furious anger, as made him tremble fromtop to toe: but he was soon pacified when he saw that we took aninterest in the question, and the Courtier was allowed to keep his book. After sitting half an hour, and drinking a glass of Constantia, the oldman proposed to go upon deck. I accordingly led the way, and had gonesome steps up the ladder, in advance, before I perceived that he hadstopped at the door of the gun-room, where the officers mess, and waslooking in, with his usual curiosity. I begged him to go in, which heaccordingly did, and entertained himself for some time, with lookingover the different cabins of the officers. From having observed thepleasure which he took in the sight of any thing new, I was induced topropose his going round the lower deck, and he looked quite pleased whenI pointed along the passage. The state hat, which had been resolutelykept on during all this time, notwithstanding its perpetualinconvenience to himself and every one around him, was here destined tocome off; for after making two or three attempts, he found it impossibleto get along and wear the hat too; and being of a very inquisitivedisposition, he chose the degrading alternative of being uncovered, andhis researches proceeded without interruption. Nothing escaped the oldman's observation; whatever was shut or tied up, he requested to haveopened; and in this way he rummaged the midshipmen's chests, and thesailors' bags, all along the lower deck. He looked into the holds, tookthe lid off the boilers, and turned every thing topsy-turvy. Seeing acutlass tied to the deck, overhead, he took it down, and on drawing itfrom the scabbard, its lustre, and the keenness of its edge, surprisedand delighted him so much, that I asked him to accept it. At first heseemed willing enough, but after holding a consultation with theCourtier for five minutes, he reluctantly put it back again. As he wentalong, he took samples of every thing that he could easily put into hissleeve, which served him instead of a sack; so that when he came upondeck, he was pretty well loaded, and looked about with the satisfactionof a school-boy, on having visited a show for the first time in hislife. Whilst we were below, one of the natives had been busily employed intaking the dimensions of the ship with a string, and another person wasengaged under him, taking an account of the guns, shot, and rigging, allwhich details he wrote down; but not being able to ascertain, himself, the exact number of people on board, he had recourse to me for theinformation; this I communicated by opening eight times the fingers ofboth hands. The only part of the ship to which he had not free accesswas the cabin under the poop, and from which he felt much annoyed atbeing excluded: but when told that a gentleman was shaving there, heshewed himself quite satisfied with the explanation, and waitedpatiently until the door was opened to him. The old gentleman and his followers appearing anxious to see a shotfired, an eighteen pound carronade was loaded before them, anddischarged with the muzzle so much depressed, that the shot struck thewater close to us, and then rose and fell eight or ten times, to thegreat entertainment and surprise of the whole party. In the mean time, Captain Maxwell had come on board, and breakfast being ready, weprevailed upon the Chief to sit down with us. He ate heartily of ourhashes, and of every thing else that was put before him, using a knife, fork, and spoon, which he now saw, probably, for the first time in hislife, not only without awkwardness, but to such good purpose, that hedeclined exchanging them for Chinese chopsticks, which were provided forhim. In fact, he was so determined to adopt our customs in everyrespect, that when the tea was offered to him in the Chinese way, helooked to the right and left, and seeing ours differently prepared, heldup his cup to the servant, for milk and sugar, which being given to him, the old gentleman remained perfectly satisfied. The politeness and ease with which he accommodated himself to the habitsof people so different from himself, were truly admirable; and when itis considered, that hitherto, in all probability, he was ignorant evenof our existence, his propriety of manners should seem to point, notonly to high rank in society, but to imply also a degree of civilizationin that society, not confirmed by other circumstances. Be this as itmay, the incident is curious, as shewing, that however different thestate of society may be in different countries, the forms of politenessare much alike in all. This polished character was very well sustainedby the old Chief; as he was pleased with our attempts to oblige him, andwhatever we seemed to care about, he immediately took an interest in. Hewas very inquisitive, and was always highly gratified when he discoveredthe use of any thing which had puzzled him at first. But there was noidle surprise, no extravagant bursts of admiration, and he certainlywould be considered a man of good breeding, and keen observation, in anypart of the world. Towards his own people, indeed, he was harsh andimpatient at all times; but this may have arisen from his anxiety thatno offence should be given to us by the other natives, whom he mightknow were less delicate and considerate than himself, and thereforerequired constant control. When breakfast was over, and the old man once more upon deck, weendeavoured to signify to him that we meant to land, according to ourengagement yesterday evening; but this he either did not, or would notcomprehend; for whenever we pointed towards the shore, he directed ourattention to the frigate. At length he got into his boat, pushed off, and was making for the Alceste, when Captain Maxwell followed in hisboat, and drawing up alongside of him, tried to prevail upon him toaccompany us to the village: the Chief shook his head by way ofdisapprobation, and turning towards his attendants, entered into adiscussion with them, which terminated by the Courtier and himselfstepping into Captain Maxwell's boat. We ascribed this measure to a desire on the Chief's part to showpublicly that he had not himself invited us on shore, and had onlyacceded to our request to land. We had not proceeded far before theChief repented of his ready compliance, and tried to persuade us toreturn; but finding the ordinary signs of no avail, he held his headdown and drew his hand across his throat, as if his head was to be cutoff. It was now our turn not to comprehend signs, and thinking it wouldbe idle to lose so favourable an opportunity, spared no pains toreconcile the old man to our landing. In this, however, we did notsucceed, for, as we approached the shore, his anxiety increased, and hefrequently drew his hand across his neck, as if to shew that he wouldlose his head if we persisted. We again tried to re-assure him, byexplaining that we had no intention of going near the village, butmerely desired to walk about for a short time, and then to go to thefrigate to dine. He was of course included in this invitation; but hisonly answer consisted in pointing to us and making signs of eating, andthen drawing his hand across his throat; by which he was understood tomean, that it might be very well for us to talk of eating, but, for hispart, he was taken up with the danger of losing his head. We could notbut laugh at this, as we had no notion of any such apprehension beingwell grounded; and, in a short time, landed at the distance of half amile from the village. The old man was lifted out of the boat by several of his people, and wewere amazed to find, when they set him down, that he was in tears, andlooking altogether very unhappy. In a few minutes a crowd, consisting ofmore than a hundred people, assembled round us, and we began to thinkwe should pay dearly for our curiosity. But the poor old man had nothoughts of vengeance, and was no better pleased with the crowd than wewere; for turning to his soldiers, he desired them to disperse the mob, which they did in a moment by pelting them with great stones. The Chiefnow began crying violently, and turning towards the village walked away, leaning his head on the shoulder of one of his people. As he went along, he not only sobbed and wept, but every now and then bellowed aloud. Wehad been nowise prepared for such a scene, and were extremely sorry forhaving pushed matters to this extremity. It had never occurred to usthat the old Chief's head was really in danger; and even now we couldnot satisfy ourselves whether he was sincere, or merely acting in orderto prevail on us to retire. The perfect tranquillity, nay evencheerfulness of the Courtier, who staid with us all this time, puzzledus extremely: nor could we account for the indifference of the otherattendants, who looked on with as much composure as if such scenes wereevery day occurrences. But at all events, it was necessary beforeproceeding any further, that the old man should be pacified; and inorder to effect this, we sat down on the beach, upon which he turnedabout and came crying back again. He seated himself by us, and waitedvery patiently whilst we remonstrated on the unreasonableness of hisconduct, and contrasted the reception he had met with from us, with hispresent unaccountable behaviour. This was expressed by a dumb showacting of all that had taken place since we came to anchor in the bay;and these signs we thought might be intelligible to the Chief, becausethey were so to all of us, although no words were used. The signs usedby different nations, however, are often dissimilar when the same thingis to be expressed: and it happened frequently with us that all attemptsat explanation failed, on both sides, though the signs used appeared tobe understood by all the people of the same nation with the personmaking the signs. The old man made a long speech in reply; in the course which thebeheading sign was frequently repeated. It is curious that he invariablyheld his hands towards his throat after he had gone through this motion, and appeared to wash his hands in his blood: probably he did this inimitation of some ceremony used at executions. Upon one occasion the Chief endeavoured to explain something to us whichhad a reference to a period of two days; this he did by pointing to thesun, making a motion twice from east to west, and, at the end of eachtime, closing his eyes as if asleep. This sign was variouslyinterpreted: some believed it to mean that in two days his head would betaken off: others imagined that in two days a communication might bemade to his government, and that orders for our reception would betransmitted. Whatever might have been meant by this particular sign, itseems very probable that some general instructions were in force alongthe whole of this coast by which the treatment of strangers isregulated. The promptitude with which we were met at this place, where, perhaps, no ship ever was before, and the pertinacity with which ourlanding was opposed, seem to imply an extraordinary degree of vigilanceand jealousy on the part of the government. We expressed a desire to eat and drink, in the hopes of working on theold man's hospitality, and, perhaps, inducing him to entertain us in hishouse; but he made no motion towards the village, and merely sent off aservant for some water and a few small cockles. When this sorry fare waslaid on the beach, the old gentleman made signs for us to begin; but wedid not choose to be pleased either with the entertainment itself, orwith the place and manner in which it had been served. We explained tohim that the proper place to eat was in a house, and not on a wet dirtybeach; he made no offer, however, of any other; but leaning his headpensively on his hands, seemed entirely resigned to his fate. The case was now utterly hopeless; and after an ineffectual attempt tocheer him up, we went on board, as the last, and indeed only favour wecould grant him. Thus we quitted this inhospitable shore, after a stayof not quite an hour, in which time we had never been twenty yards fromour own boats. We saw the village, however, to some advantage; it isneatly built, and very pleasantly situated under fine trees, in a valleycultivated like a garden, in small square patches. It was now determined to prosecute the voyage to the southward, and theLyra was accordingly ordered to proceed as usual to sound the passagesa-head of the frigate, but had not gone far before the Alceste, still atanchor, was observed to be surrounded with boats. In about an hour sheweighed and stood to sea. Captain Maxwell had received another visitfrom the old Chief, whose appearance was described as being quitealtered; his sprightliness and curiosity all gone, and his easyunceremonious manner exchanged for cold and stately civility: he lookedembarrassed and unhappy, as it appeared, from an apprehension of havingoffended Captain Maxwell. When this was discovered, no pains were sparedto convince him that, in this respect, there was not the slightest causefor uneasiness. He would not accept any presents, but appeared muchrelieved by the unexpected kindness with which he was received, andbefore he went away, was restored, in some degree, to his wontedspirits. When looking over the books in the cabin, he was a good dealtaken with the appearance of a Bible, but when offered to him hedeclined it, though with such evident reluctance, that it was againshewn to him just as he was pushing off in his boat, and he now receivedit with every appearance of gratitude, and took his leave in a mannerquite friendly. We quitted this bay without much regret. The old Chief, indeed, with hisflowing beard, and pompous array, and engaging manners, had made astrong impression upon us all; but his pitiable and childish distress, whatever might have been the cause, took away from the respect withwhich we were otherwise disposed to regard him: yet this circumstance, though it makes the picture less finished, serves to give it additionalinterest; whilst every thing ridiculous in the old man's character islost in the painful uncertainty which hangs over his fate. From this bay we steered amongst the islands, during all the 6th and7th, to the S. W. Before the natives were met with again; we saw themindeed, but never got near enough to converse with them. They werefrequently observed seated in groups watching us on the islands which wepassed. We saw several fishing-boats, with a crew of about a dozen men, crowded on a sort of poop. At a little distance these boats appeared tobe formed of two vessels lashed together. This appearance we believe tobe caused by their having an outrigger on one side, on which their oars, sails, and masts are piled, in order probably to keep the boat clearwhen they are at anchor fishing. Their mast is lowered down and hoistedup by means of a strong tackle from the mast-head to the stern, as inthe barges on the Thames. We threaded our way for upwards of a hundred miles amongst islands whichlie in immense clusters in every direction. At first we thought ofcounting them, and even attempted to note their places on the chartswhich we were making of this coast, but their great number completelybaffled these endeavours. They vary in size, from a few hundred yards inlength to five or six miles, and are of all shapes. From the mast-headother groups were perceived lying one behind the other to the east andsouth as far as the eye could reach. Frequently above a hundred islandswere in sight from deck at one moment. The sea being quite smooth, theweather fine, and many of the islands wooded and cultivated in thevalleys, the scene was at all times lively, and was rendered still moreinteresting by our rapid passage along the coast, by which theappearances about us were perpetually changing. Of this coast we had nocharts possessing the slightest pretensions to accuracy, none of theplaces at which we touched being laid down within sixty miles of theirproper places. Only a few islands are noticed in any map; whereas thecoast, for near two hundred miles, is completely studded with them, tothe distance of fifteen or twenty leagues from the main land. Theseinaccuracies in the charts naturally gave a very high degree of interestto this part of the voyage; yet the navigation being at all timesuncertain, and often dangerous, considerable anxiety necessarily mingleditself with the satisfaction produced by so new and splendid a scene. Wealways anchored during the night, or when the tides, which were veryrapid, prevented our proceeding in the deliberate manner absolutelyrequired by the nature of the circumstances. An instance of thenecessity of these precautions occurred on the 7th of September, at fouro'clock in the afternoon, when, it being quite calm, we were driftingalong with the tide, which suddenly shifted and carried us rapidlytowards a reef of rocks, which was invisible till the strong rippling ofthe water shewed us our danger: we let go the anchor immediately, butthe jerk was so great, as to break the Lyra's cable. A second anchor, however, brought her up at a sufficient distance from the reef. As soon as the tide slacked, a boat was dispatched to examine theanchorage on the other side of an island near us. The officer landedabout sunset, and from the top of the island could discover a village onthe other side, on the shores of a fine large bay. He afterwards soundedthe anchorage, and found it of a convenient depth. On his way back helanded near the village, but though it was bright moonlight he saw noneof the inhabitants. 8th of September. --About noon we weighed and sailed round the north endof the island, which had been visited last night. The Alceste anchorednearly in the middle between the two islands which form the anchorage;but as the Lyra draws less water, she was placed as close off thevillage as was safe, being then about a quarter of a mile from thebeach. At this distance, by means of a telescope fixed on a table on thepoop, we were enabled to see what was going on in the village, while thepeople were unconscious of being observed. Mr. Clifford, who was toounwell to land with Captain Maxwell and myself, placed himself at theglass, and made many observations which must otherwise have escapednotice. At first the only inhabitants visible were seated on the top of the hillwatching us, the village itself being quite deserted; but shortly afterour anchoring, the inhabitants began to assemble from different parts ofthe island. Of these several were women, some of whom had children ontheir backs, and others carried them in their arms. They looked stout, were fairer in complexion than the men, and were dressed in a long whiterobe, loose and open in front, with a petticoat of the same colourreaching a little below the knees; their hair was tied in a large knotbehind; a small piece of white cloth was thrown loosely over the head toprotect them from the rays of the sun. Some women were engaged inhusking rice in a mortar with a wooden beater; these had no dress abovethe waist. The men and boys were seen carrying loads on a wooden framehooked to the shoulders. In a square flat place near the village a number of women and childrenwere employed winnowing corn by pouring it from a height, so that thehusks blew away. Fishing-nets were spread to dry on most of the houses. We landed about five o'clock, and found in the village only two men, whoobstinately remained at one place without speaking, and looking anxiousthat we should go away; they refused the buttons which we offered them, and resisted our persuasions to accompany us to the upper part of thevillage, which we were anxious they should do, to shew that we had nointention of hurting any thing, but merely to look about us. We went onalone, and on reaching a deserted house thought it a good opportunity toexamine it. Before the door, on a neat clean level space, enclosed by ahedge covered with a sweet-scented white flower, we found several heapsof corn and straw, and several of the wooden mortars in which the riceis pounded, also a number of vessels, some filled with water and otherswith rice. Cooking utensils were lying about, and a number of fishinglines coiled neatly in baskets, and split fish spread out to dry on thetop of little corn ricks on one side of the court. The inside was darkand uncomfortable; the mud floor was full of hollow places; the wallswere black with soot, and every thing looked dirty. On the left of theentrance two large metal boilers, twenty inches deep, were sunk in thebrickwork, the upper part being about a foot above the floor. Thefire-place was between the boilers, and on the hot embers lay threesplit fish. On the wall opposite to the fire were shelves, having anumber of cups, basons, and cooking utensils, principally of coarsestone ware, and some few of a sort of bell-metal. The number ofinhabitants in one house must be considerable, if we can form anestimate from the quantity of their dishes and vessels. There were threeneat small pieces of furniture on one of the shelves, the use of whichwe could not discover; they were made of wood, elegantly carved andvarnished, with a round top about a foot in diameter, and four legs afoot and a half long. The roof was well constructed, the rafters beingmortised into the ends of the horizontal beams, and tied to the middleby a perpendicular beam or King-Post. Over the rafters is laid anet-work of rods, to which the thatch is tied. There was no chimney tothis house, and only one window made of slender bars of wood, formingsquare spaces three inches by two, covered by a thin semi-transparentpaper defended by the roof, which extends so far beyond the wall as toshelter it not only from the rain but from the sun. Most of the houseshad a sort of raised verandah under the eaves, about a foot or moreabove the ground, extending from the door on either hand to the end ofthe house; these places were neatly levelled, and must afford a coolseat. The walls of the houses are from six to eight feet high, and fromfourteen to twenty feet long; the top of the roof being about fourteen. The walls are of stone and mud, the door moves on the bar, which formsone of its sides; this bar is prolonged, and works in holes in the beamabove, and a stone below. There was a back door to the house which weexamined. On opening this we found a bare bank of earth as high as thehouse, at the distance of three feet from the walls, and a hedge risingstill higher on the top; this effectually excluded all light. This minute survey of the house being completed, we returned to ourfriends, who seemed in some measure re-assured. We tried to prevail uponthem to accompany us in our walk, in hopes that the rest of thecottagers might be induced to return when they saw how peaceably we weredisposed. Captain Maxwell used every sign he could think of to nopurpose, and tired at length of these attempts, took hold of the oldestman's hand, drew it through his arm, and walked off with him. I followedhis example with the other; and this familiarity amused the natives, whonow accompanied us in perfect good humour. The ease and apparentindifference with which they walked along with us was curious, and hadso little of awkwardness in it, that one might have supposed it to bethe fashion of Corea to walk arm in arm. Having reached the house whichwe had before examined, we sat down in the verandah, and made signs thatwe wished to smoke a pipe with them. In the meantime a boat was observedto come to the landing-place; the crew quitted her and came towards usat a rapid pace. The quick manner of these people, so different from theordinary behaviour of the Coreans we had seen, made us apprehend thatsome violence was meditated; but in this we were mistaken, for they satdown with us, gave us their pipes to smoke, and laughed immoderately atsome of our words: we took the hint from them, and laughed heartilywhenever we observed that any thing good had been said amongst them;this was well received, and proved afterwards a good mode ofintroduction. Their curiosity was strongly excited by our clothing, which theyexamined minutely; they wished to see some parts of our dress taken off, and in order to gratify them they were allowed to have our coats, shoes, stockings, hats, &c. They were more struck with the stockings than withany thing else, frequently shouting "Hota! Hota!" This word, which ispronounced with a strong aspiration, was noted down in our list as theCorean word for stockings; but it was found afterwards to be anexpression of approbation, applied indiscriminately to whatever theyconsider remarkably good. After sitting some time with these people, andsmoking several pipes with them, we gave up all hopes of seeing thevillagers return while we were there, and as the night was falling weproposed taking a short walk with our friends, and then going on board. But as soon as they saw us go up the hill instead of returning to theboat, they became very uneasy, and wanted us to turn back. As we hadreason, however, to conjecture that the women and children were on theother side of the hill, we went on in the expectation of getting a sightof them before dark. This the Coreans prevented by following us withshouts wherever we went, so as to give warning of our approach. Thewomen and children probably retreated before us to a ravine on the northside of the island, for when we approached it the Coreans became moreanxious than ever for our return; and one man seeing us still advance, took hold of my arm and gave it a sharp pinch. I turned round andexclaimed, "Patience, Sir!" He drew back on observing my displeasure, and a moment after called out himself, "Patience, Sir!" The othershearing this caught the words too, and nothing was heard for some timeamongst them but "Patience, Sir, " pronounced in every instance withperfect propriety. They seemed surprised themselves on discoveringpowers of imitation hitherto in all probability unexercised. Thisincident brought us better acquainted, and we remained on the top of thehill teaching them English words till it was dark. They were certainlyentertained with our instructions, but nevertheless shewed much moresatisfaction in attending us down hill again to our boats. Before goingon board we invited them to come to the ship next day, which one of theparty was supposed to comprehend: he first made preparations for goingto bed, then closed his eyes, hung his head on his hand, and snored veryproperly; after a time he opened his eyes, started and looked about him, then laid his hands on Captain Maxwell's shoulders with an air ofwelcome. This was interpreted by some into a wish for our departuretill the morning, and by others that he himself would visit us atdaylight. As he never came on board, and received us on landing next daywith any thing but welcome, probably both guesses were wrong: of onething there was no doubt, his anxiety to get rid of us; and his signsmay have meant that it was time for all honest people to be in bed. 9th of September. --At sunrise we landed at the same village, and foundit deserted as before. We left it and made for the highest peak on theisland, accompanied by a few of the Coreans, who did not interfere withus till about halfway up, when on our entering a grove of fir trees, with the appearance of which we had been struck, one of the Coreansobjected; we went on, however, and upon reaching the stump of an oldtree the Corean fell on his knees, bowed his head to the ground, and ashe raised it again held his hands closed and pressed together towardsthe stump. This had very much the air of a stratagem to dissuade us fromgoing further in that direction, where the women probably wereconcealed. Admitting this to have been the motive, it is curious that heshould have supposed such a shew of religious form calculated torestrain us. It is further remarkable as being the only circumstancewhich we have seen on this coast implying a knowledge of religion orreligious ceremony. There are here no temples, idols, nor tombs, whereasin China, villages much smaller than these of Corea have them in everycorner. The other Coreans took no notice of the stump, and the man whowas prostrating himself before it finding that his behaviour producednothing but a number of questions from us concerning the nature of thetree, got on his legs and walked sulkily away. In the course of our walkwe saw six bullocks of a small breed and very fat, but which the Coreanswere not to be tempted to sell by any thing which we had to give them. Dogs were the only quadrupeds besides that we saw. There were pigeons, hawks, and eagles, but few small birds. Crows were as numerous here asin every other part of the world. We returned on board to breakfast, andafterwards set out on an excursion to the top of a high island lyingsome leagues to the south-east of us. On our way we landed, and observedthe sun's meridian altitude with an artificial horizon, by which weascertained the latitude to be 34º 22' 39" north, the longitude by themean of two chronometers is 126º 2' 45" east. We passed, for the distance of five miles, amongst islands, all, exceptthe very smallest, inhabited. The villages are built in the valleys, where the houses are nearly hid by trees and hedges. The sides of thehills are cultivated with millet and a species of bean; and in thenumerous small gardens near the villages, we saw a great variety ofplants. As the peaked island which we had undertaken to climb was steep, andcovered with a long coarse grass, it cost us a tiresome scramble to gainthe top, which is about six hundred feet above the level of the sea. Themain land of Corea is just discernible in the north-east and east, fromthis elevation; but it commands a splendid view of the islands, lying inthick clusters, as far as the eye can reach, from north-west quite roundby east to south. We endeavoured to count them. One person, by reckoningonly such as were obviously separate islands, made their number onehundred and twenty. Two other gentlemen, by estimating the numbers ineach connected cluster, made severally, one hundred and thirty-six, andone hundred and seventy; a difference, which at once shews thedifficulty of speaking with precision on this subject. But when it isconsidered, that from one spot, which though considerably elevated, wasnot centrical, one hundred and twenty islands could be counted, and thatour course for upwards of one hundred miles had been amongst islands noless crowded than these, some idea may be formed of this greatArchipelago. After enjoying this scene for some time, we went down on the other sideof the peak, which is much less steep. We found the boat's crewpreparing dinner for us, under some trees, close to a well of coolwater. The village to which the well belonged not being many yards off, we proceeded to explore it, and found it deserted by all except an oldwoman and a man. The woman, seated on a pile of stones, in the middle ofthe village, took no notice of us as we passed; and indeed, she washerself so very homely, as to occupy but little of our attention. Theman was seated at the door of a cottage, making a straw sandal: on ourentering his inclosure, he looked up for an instant, and immediatelyresumed his work, with as much composure as if we had been a party ofthe villagers. A button was offered to him, which he accepted withoutscruple: he agreed, with equal readiness, to exchange his unfinishedsandal for another button, which having carelessly put away, in a baglying near him, he took some straw and re-commenced his business, without seeming to notice that we were rummaging his house. He is theonly Corean we have met with, who has not shewn some slight symptoms ofcuriosity: indeed, he seemed totally indifferent about our staying orgoing, or about what we were doing in his house; and we left him withoutknowing whether to ascribe his apathy to fear, or to absolutestupidity. On returning from the village, we saw a party of the natives assembledon a rising ground near us; they were invited, by signs, to join us atdinner, but they kept their places unmoved. While we were at dinner, thesailors, who had been rambling about, joined the natives, and in a fewminutes became very good friends with them; the natives giving up theirpipes, and the sailors in return supplying them with tobacco. We havefrequently remarked during this voyage, that the sailors makeacquaintance with the natives much sooner than the officers. This seemsthe natural effect of the difference in our manners. On meeting withnatives, we feel so anxious to conciliate, and to avoid giving offence, that our behaviour, thus guarded and circumspect, has an air ofrestraint about it, which may produce distrust and apprehension on theirpart; whilst, on the other hand, Jack, who is not only unreflecting andinoffensive himself, but never suspects that others can possiblymisconstrue his perfect good-will and unaffected frankness, has an easy, disengaged manner, which at once invites confidence and familiarity. In about an hour after we had sat down, one of the natives hastily rose, and without appearing to deliberate, but as if actuated by a suddenimpulse, strode rapidly down to us, and in the most unceremonious waypossible, presented his lighted pipe for us to smoke. We received himas kindly as we could, and prevailed upon him to take a glass of wine;which he had no sooner drank off, than he roared out, "Hota! Hota!" This exclamation brought the rest down, who seating themselves by us, drank freely, and became very cheerful and communicative, telling us theCorean names of every thing we pointed to, and asking, in return, theEnglish names for our clothes. [5] But though the wine made these peoplefar more sociable than any we had yet seen, they never forgot theprincipal object of their thoughts, and suggested, every now and then, by pointing to our boats, the propriety of our going away. After sunset, they became very impatient and uneasy at our stay; but when at length weyielded to their entreaties, the whole party accompanied us to thewater's side, and took leave with the most lively marks of satisfactionat our departure. 10th of September. --This morning, about ten o'clock, we got under weigh, and stood to the southward. By sunset we were clear of all the islands, and could just distinguish the island of Quelpaert in the south-eastquarter. The shortness of our stay on this coast, and the difficulty weexperienced in communicating with the inhabitants, will account for thescanty and disjointed nature of the information obtained. A futurevoyager would do well to be accompanied by a person who can write theChinese character, and should have full leisure to overcome, by patientmanagement, the distrust of strangers evinced by this unsociable people. A chart of our track along this coast is subjoined to this work, in thehope that it may prove useful to a future voyager. As it was constructedunder circumstances of great haste, it is necessarily incomplete; yet itwill probably be found more accurate than any maps or charts hithertopublished. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 1: A servant of the embassy, left behind by accident at thePei-ho river. ] [Footnote 2: We found the north-east end composed of a fine-grainedgranite; the middle of the island of a brittle micaceous schistus of adeep blue colour; the strata are nearly horizontal, but dip a little tothe S. W. This body of strata is cut across by a granite dyke, at someplaces forty feet wide, at others not above ten; the strata in thevicinity of the dyke are broken and bent in a remarkable manner; thisdislocation and contortion does not extend far from the walls of thedyke, but veins of granite branch out from it to a great distance, varying in width from three feet to the hundredth part of an inch: thedyke is visible from the top of the cliff to the water's edge, but doesnot re-appear on the corresponding cliff of an island opposite to it, though distant only thirty yards. This island is composed of the sameschistus, and is cut in a vertical direction by a whin dyke, four feetwide, the planes of whose sides lie N. E. And S. W. , being at right anglesto those of the great granite dyke in the neighbourhood, which run S. E. And N. W. The strata contiguous to the whin dyke are a good deal twistedand broken, but not in the same degree as at their contact with thegranite dyke. The whin dyke is formed of five layers or sets of prisms laid across inthe usual way. Beyond the small island cut by the whin dyke, at thedistance of only forty or fifty feet, we came to an island risingabruptly out of the sea, and presenting a high rugged cliff of breccia, fronting that on which the granite dyke is so conspicuous: the junctionof this rock with the schistus cut by the granite and the whin wouldhave been interesting; but although we must have been at times within afew yards of it, the actual contact was every where hid by the sea. The whole of the S. W. End of this island is formed of breccia, being anassemblage of angular and water-worn pieces of schistus, quartz, andsome other rocks, the whole having the appearance of a great shinglebeach. The fragments of the schistus in this rock are similar to thatwhich forms the cliff first spoken of. The theory which presented itself to us on the spot was, that the greatmass of strata which forms the centre of the island was formerly at thebottom of the ocean; and that the western part, which is now a firmbreccia, had been a beach shingle produced by the action of the waves onthe strata: the granite which forms the eastern end of the island hadbeen forced into its present situation from beneath the strata, withsufficient violence to dislocate and contort the beds nearest to it, andto inject the liquid granite into the rents formed by the heaving actionof the strata as they were raised up. It is natural to suppose that theragged edges of the strata forming the sides of these cracks would besubjected to a grinding action, from which the strata more remote mightbe exempted; and in this way we may account for the extraordinarytwisting, and separation of masses along the whole course of the granitedyke. In the dyke, as well as in the veins which branch from it, thereare numerous islands of schistus. That this last was softened, seems tofollow from the frequent instances which occur of its being bent backupon itself without producing cracks. The same heat, propagated by themelted granite in the neighbourhood, may also be supposed to havereduced the shingle beach to a state of semifusion by the aid of someflux contained in the sand scattered amongst it. We could not discoverany circumstance by which the relative antiquity of the two dykesmentioned above, could be ascertained. ] [Footnote 3: _Note on the peculiar character of the written language inthat quarter of the globe. _ In China, Japan, Corea, and the islands in the adjacent seas, the spokenlanguages are different from one another; the written language, on thecontrary, is the same in all. Thus a native of China is unintelligibleto a Corean or Japanese, while he is speaking, but they mutuallyunderstand one another when their thoughts are expressed in writing. Thecause of this may be thus explained. We in Europe form an idea in themind, and this we express by certain sounds, which differ in differentcountries; these sounds are committed to writing by means of the lettersof the alphabet, which are only symbols of sounds, and, consequently, awriting in Europe is unintelligible to every one who is ignorant of thespoken language in which it happens to be written. The Chinese and theother natives in these seas have, on the contrary, no alphabet; nosymbols of sounds; their ideas are committed to writing at once withoutthe intervention of sound, and their characters may therefore be calledsymbols of ideas. Now, as the same characters are adopted in all thesecountries to express the same ideas, it is clear that their writingswill be perfectly intelligible to each other, although their spokenlanguages may be quite incomprehensible. The case of the Roman numerals in Europe furnishes a ready illustrationof this symbolical language. There is nothing in the symbols 1, 2, 3, &c. By which their pronunciation can be ascertained when presented tothe eye, yet they communicate meaning independent of sound, and arerespectively intelligible to the inhabitants of the different countriesof Europe; while, at the same time, the sounds by which a native of onecountry distinguishes the written symbols 1, 2, 3, &c. Areunintelligible to all the rest. The knowledge of writing is supposed to be very generally diffused overthe countries using what is called the Chinese character, and, asprobably none but the lowest vulgar are ignorant of it, the surprise ofthese people on discovering our inability to read their papers is verynatural. The case, we may imagine, had never occurred to them before, and it was highly interesting to watch the effect which so novel anincident produced. At first they appeared to doubt the fact of ourignorance, and shewed some symptoms of impatience; but this opinion didnot last long, and they remained completely puzzled, looking at eachother with an odd expression of surprise. ] [Footnote 4: This paper, presented by the Corean Chief, has beentranslated by Mr. Morrison at Canton, and is as follows: "Persons, ofwhat land--of what nation (are you)? On account of what business do youcome hither? In the ship are there any literary men who thoroughlyunderstand, and can explain what is written?"] [Footnote 5: See note at the end of the Loo-choo vocabulary. ] CHAPTER II. Enter the Japan Sea--Sulphur Island--Volcano--See the Great Loo-Choo Island--Lyra nearly wrecked--First Interview with the Natives--Anchor at Napakiang--Natives crowd on Board--Their interesting Appearance and Manners--Several Chiefs visit the Alceste--Land to make Observations--Astonishment of the Natives--Six Chiefs visit the Ships--Alceste and Lyra proceed farther in Shore--A Chief of high Rank waits upon Captain Maxwell--Return his Visit--Feast--Projected Survey of the Anchorage--Visit Reef Island--The Lyra sent to look for another Harbour--Arrangements for landing the Alceste's Stores--Description of the Temple and Garden--First Acquaintance with Mádera--Study of the Language. After leaving Corea, we stood to the southward and eastward, with astrong breeze from the north, and a mountainous swell from thenorth-east. Shortly after daybreak on the 13th of September, we sawSulphur Island, in the south-west quarter, and by eleven in the forenoonwere close up to it. We intended to land, but were prevented by the highwind, which caused so great a surf all round the island, as to renderthis impracticable. The sulphuric volcano from which the island takesits name is on the north-west side; it emits white smoke, and the smellof sulphur is very strong on the lee side of the crater. The cliffsnear the volcano are of a pale yellow colour, interspersed with brownstreaks: the ground at this place is very rugged, as the strata lie inall directions, and are much broken; on the top is a thin coat of browngrass. The south end of the island is of considerable height, of a deepblood red colour, with here and there a spot of bright green: thestrata, which are here nearly horizontal, are cut by a whin dyke runningfrom the top to the bottom of the cliff, projecting from its face like awall. As the weather still looked threatening, we gave up the intentionof examining this spot, and proceeded to the southward till fouro'clock, at which time land was seen in the south-west quarter; but asthere was not sufficient daylight to close with it, we hauled off to thewestward for the night. Shortly after sunset the sky became overcast, the wind veered about from one point to another, the air became suddenlyquite chill, the sea rose high, and every thing, in short, seemed toindicate an approaching tyfoong or hurricane. All our preparations weremade to encounter a violent tempest; but we were much pleased at findingit turn out nothing more than an ordinary gale of wind. 14th of September. --The weather was still stormy, but being anxious toclose with the land, we bore up, and steered in the supposed directionof the Great Lieou Kieou, or Loo-choo Island. At eight o'clock we sawthe Sugar Loaf of Captain Broughton, which is a small green island, having a high remarkable cone in the middle. We left this to theeastward, and continued steering to the south south-west, hoping to getto leeward of the great island before night, where we might remain insmooth water till the weather became fine. While going along at a quickrate, we suddenly saw breakers close to us; we instantly hauled to thewind, and made all the sail we could carry. Our situation was now verycritical, for the swell caused by the recent gale checked our wayconsiderably, and a lee current drifted us gradually towards the reef. From the mast head we could look down upon the reef, which was of acircular form, with a low island on its southern side; the surf brokeall round, but in the inside the water was quite smooth, and being onlya few feet deep, the coral, which was of a bright green, appeareddistinctly through it. At the distance of one-third of a mile from wherewe were, no bottom was to be found with our lead lines, so thatanchoring was out of the question. After being in this unpleasantpredicament for some time, we succeeded in weathering the western end ofthe reef, which we had no sooner done, than we saw a passage four orfive miles wide, by which we proceeded to leeward of the reef island, where we found the water perfectly smooth. The Alceste rounded the reefwithout difficulty, being half a league farther off than the Lyra, which, as usual, had been stationed a-head to look out, but had notperceived the danger sooner, owing to the extreme haziness of theweather. 15th of September. --In the morning, it was arranged that the Lyra shouldproceed in shore in search of a harbour, while the frigate remained indeep water. At ten o'clock I thought we had discovered a place ofsecurity, and having anchored the Lyra, sent three boats to examine it. A sort of harbour was found, formed by coral reefs; but the passagesbeing all intricate for large ships, and the water shallow inside, it isby no means safe. We fell in with several people in canoes; one man, whoseemed to know what we were searching for, directed us to a point ofland to the northward, and waved for us to go round it. While the boatswere away, several natives came off to the Lyra. No people that we haveyet met with have been so friendly; for the moment they came alongside, one handed a jar of water up to us, and another a basket of boiled sweetpotatoes, without asking or seeming to wish for any recompense. Theirmanners were gentle and respectful; they uncovered their heads when inour presence, bowed whenever they spoke to us; and when we gave themsome rum, they did not drink it till they had bowed to every personround. Another canoe went near the Alceste, and a rope being thrown tothem, they tied a fish to it, and then paddled away. All this seemed topromise well, and was particularly grateful after the cold repulsivemanners of the Coreans. The day was spent in trying to beat round the point to windward, but thetide was too strong against us, and when it became dark, we foundourselves awkwardly situated. To the east and west of us there wereislands at the distance of a few miles. To leeward was a circular coralreef, just appearing above the surface at low water; and to windwardwere seen the reefs upon which we were so nearly wrecked on Saturday. Asthe exact position of these numerous dangers was unknown to us, we weredetermined to anchor for the night, though in eighty fathoms water. 16th of September. --At daylight we weighed, and beat to windward all themorning; but owing to the tide being contrary, it was two o'clock beforewe passed the point mentioned above; which we had no sooner done, thanwe came in sight of an extensive town, having a harbour filled withvessels at anchor. On steering towards the town, we had to sound our waycautiously amongst coral reefs, which were tolerably well defined by thesurf breaking upon them[6]. The Alceste followed as soon as we hadascertained that the passage was clear, and both ships anchored at thedistance of half a mile from the town. In a short time we were surrounded by canoes, full of the natives, who, with their children, flocked on board. They wear a loose dress, tiedwith a belt round their waist; their hair is brought tight up from allsides, and formed into a knot on the top of the head, with two metalpins stuck in it. In the course of an hour, a native came on board whoappeared to be somewhat higher in rank than the rest; and we nowdiscovered, to our great satisfaction, that this man understood ourChinese servant, who had been of no use to us at Corea. As it was foundthat there were other chiefs on shore superior in rank to this man, Captain Maxwell declined receiving his visit; as well with the view ofinducing the principal people to come on board, as of maintaining anappearance of dignity, a point of great importance in all transactionswith the Chinese and their dependents, who invariably repaycondescension with presumption. As we had heard of these people beingtributary to China, it was natural to conclude that there might be somesimilarity in manners. At all events, it was evidently much easier atany future time to be free and cordial with them, after having assumed adistance and reserve in the first instance, than it would be to repressinsolence, if at first encouraged by too hasty familiarity. Before this man went on shore, he requested to know the reason of ourcoming into this port; the interpreter was instructed to acquaint himthat the ships had experienced very bad weather, and had been a longtime at sea; that the large ship had sprung a leak, and required repairswhich could only be done in a secure harbour: further explanations, itwas observed, would be given to the superior chiefs when they came onboard. We had been prepared for these inquiries, not only from thereception we had met with at Corea, but from the well-known character ofthe nations in this quarter of the globe; and it was so far fortunate, that the Alceste was actually in want of repairs; because to haveassigned curiosity, and a desire of gaining information as our object, to people wholly unconscious of such feelings, would naturally have ledthem to ascribe our actions to some more interested, and consequentlymore dangerous motive. The canoes which we have seen to-day are mostly made of one piece ofwood; they have two sails, and are moved with considerable velocity, bytwo or more paddles, assisted by an oar over the stern, which acts bothas a scull and a rudder. There is a neat low seat, made of rattans, foreach person in the canoe. As the day closed, the fishing canoes came ingreat numbers from sea, and all came on board the ships on their way;some of the fishermen pulled up our lines and baited the hooks. Thewhole shore abreast of the ships was covered with people, but the crowdwas greatest on two pier-heads, forming the entrance to the harbour; andthe variety of colour in their dresses made this a very livelyexhibition. In the evening, Captain Maxwell and I rowed round to examinethe anchorage, which we found tolerably clear of rocks. An officer wasat the same time sent to examine the inner harbour, but he did not gofar within the entrance, which was much too shallow for the frigate. On returning to the Lyra, I found that Mr. Clifford had beenentertaining several respectable looking natives who had paid him avisit. As they readily comprehended his desire to know their words forvarious things, he has succeeded in collecting a considerable number, among which we are surprised to find their name for tobacco the same asours; all the others are quite new to us. 17th of September. --I carried the interpreter to the Alceste, afterbreakfast, where I found two chiefs, who had been on board some time, and had been taken care of by the officers, as Captain Maxwell was notprepared to receive them. A message was then sent to intimate that theTa-yin (a Chinese title, used also by these people to persons of rank)was desirous of seeing the chiefs, and they were introduced into theafter-cabin, where they were received in form. They objected to sittingdown, making at the same time many low obeisances, which they did bystooping the body, and raising the hands, closed one over the other, totheir face. Their scruples about being seated were at length overcome, and the first chief took his place on Captain Maxwell's left hand, thenext on my left, and a third, who was evidently of a lower rank, satbeyond the second. The chiefs sat respectfully silent, and CaptainMaxwell finding that he was expected to speak first, communicated tothem that the ships under his command belonged to the King of England;that they had gone to China with an Embassador, carrying presents to theEmperor, at Pekin; that on their way back to Canton, they hadexperienced very bad weather, and had been obliged to put in here torefit, and to procure supplies. In reply, they expressed their willingness to assist us as much as layin their power, but said that the harbour was too shallow for so large aship, and recommended our proceeding to another harbour calledKinching, which they described as being secure and commodious, and onlya few hours sail from this anchorage: they offered to furnish pilots anda boat to conduct us. Captain Maxwell, however, was unwilling to quitthis anchorage unless certain of finding a better; he therefore proposedto send the Lyra to examine and report upon the harbour alluded to. Thechiefs paused upon this, and said they could not take upon them to sendpilots to the Brig without consulting the Great Man on shore. We werevery curious to know who this great personage might be, but they evadedall our inquiries. Captain Maxwell asked where the king resided, andintimated his intention of waiting upon him; to this they stronglyobjected, declaring moreover, that it was impossible, as his majestylived a thousand miles off. They did not seem aware of theirinconsistency, when they undertook, immediately afterwards, to get ananswer from court about pilots for the Lyra, in a few hours. We had been led to hope, from the frankness and kindness of thesepeople, that no restraint would be imposed on us; and we were the moredisappointed at observing, that whenever we spoke of landing, or askedany questions about the king, the chiefs became uneasy, and replied in amysterious manner. We consoled ourselves, however, with thesupposition, that upon further acquaintance their apprehension wouldwear off. Business being over, the chiefs were asked to walk round the cabin, aninvitation which they accepted with manifest satisfaction. During theconference they had preserved a gravity suited to an important ceremony, and, though surrounded by new and curious objects, had never expressedthe least curiosity. They were now no longer formal, and looked over thevarious articles with attention, taking particular notice of the globes, books, and mirrors. Their manners are remarkably gentle and unassuming. They are observant, and not without curiosity, but they requireencouragement to induce them to come forward, being restrained, it wouldseem, by a genteel self-denial, from gratifying curiosity, lest it mightbe thought obtrusive. Their dress is singularly graceful; it consists ofa loose flowing robe, with very wide sleeves, tied round the middle by abroad rich belt or girdle of wrought silk, a yellow cylindrical cap, anda neat straw sandal, over a short cotton boot or stocking. Two of thechiefs wore light yellow robes, the other dark blue streaked with white, all of cotton. The cap is flat at top, and appears to be formed bywinding a broad band diagonally round a frame, in such a manner, that ateach turn a small portion of the last fold shall be visible above infront, and below at the hinder part. The sandal is kept on by a stiffstraw band passing over the instep, and joining the sandal near theheel; this band is tied to the forepart by a slight string, drawnbetween the great toe and the next, the stocking having a division likethe finger of a glove for the great toe. They all carry fans, which theystick in their girdles when not in use, and each person has a shorttobacco pipe in a small bag, hanging, along with the pouch, at thegirdle. When they had satisfied themselves with looking over the cabin, they went away, with a promise of returning in the evening as soon asthe answer from the Great Man should arrive. During all this morning, the whole space between the ships and the shorehas been covered with canoes, each containing about ten persons. Thescene was very lively, for few of the parties which came to visit theships remained long on board, so that the canoes were continuallypassing backwards and forwards, and the number which came in this waymust have been immense. They all seemed highly gratified at beingallowed to go wherever they liked over the ships, nor was this libertyever abused. The manners even of the lowest classes are genteel andbecoming; their curiosity is great, but it never makes them rudelyinquisitive: their language is musical, and in most cases easy ofpronunciation. We heard a boat song to-day, the air of which was sweetand plaintive; we tried in vain to catch the words, and unfortunately, none of us had skill enough to note down the air. We observed severalpeople in canoes, making drawings of the ships, but they hid their workwhen they were observed. In consequence of what had been said last nightof our wanting repairs, a party of shipwrights and caulkers was sent onboard the Alceste this morning, but their tools were of a Lilliputianorder, and quite unsuited to the rough work required. The variety of colour and pattern in the dresses of the people to-day, is remarkable. Many wear printed cottons, others have cotton dresseswith the pattern drawn on it by hand, instead of being stamped; butblue, in all its shades, is the prevalent colour, though there were manydresses resembling in every respect Highland tartans. The children, ingeneral, wear more shewy dresses than the men, and of the dress of thewomen we can say nothing, as none have yet been seen. Every person hasone of the girdles before described, which is always of a differentcolour from the dress, and is, in general, richly ornamented withflowers in embossed silk, and sometimes with gold and silver threads. This dress is naturally so graceful, that even the lowest boatmen havea picturesque appearance. Their hair, which is of a glossy black, isshaved off the crown, but the bare place is concealed by their mode ofdressing the hair in a close knot over it. Their beards and mustachiosare allowed to grow, and are kept neat and smooth. They are rather lowin stature, but are well formed, and have an easy graceful carriage, which suits well with their flowing dress. Their colour is not good, some being very dark and others nearly white, but in most instances theyare of a deep copper. This is fully compensated for by the sweetness andintelligence of their countenance. Their eyes, which are black, have aplacid expression, and their teeth are regular and beautifully white. Indeportment they are modest, polite, timid, and respectful, and in short, appear to be a most interesting and amiable people. Two of our friends who had visited us in the morning, and whose names wehave discovered to be Ookooma and Jeema, came on board again about halfpast five, and staid an hour; they had not received any answer, theysaid, from the Great Man, and therefore could not send pilots to the"hoonee gua, " or little ship. They were accompanied by a chief whom wetook to be a Chinese from his looks, and his appearing to understand theinterpreter better than the others. His formal and suspicious manner didnot promise so well as that of the others. They came to say that apresent of stock and vegetables had been sent to the ships. It wasintimated to them that we intended to land the next day, and upon theirobjecting to this, we said that our wish was to wait upon the Great Man;to which they replied, that no person answering to this descriptionresided here. We then said, that it was right we should return theirvisit. This argument they combated by saying that they were men ofunequal rank to us, and therefore nowise entitled to such an honour; andthat we, at the same time, would be degrading ourselves by such unduecondescension. This having failed, Captain Maxwell told them of hisillness; upon which, our new acquaintance, who seemed more earnestlybent against our landing than the others, offered to send a physician onboard to see him. Captain Maxwell replied, that his own doctor hadrecommended a ride on shore; upon which they laughed, and turned thediscourse to something else. In this way every proposal to land, or even allusion to the shore, wasindustriously put aside; and as it was our wish to gain their good will, the matter was dropped for the present. Before they went away, CaptainMaxwell, pointing to their pipes, begged them to smoke if they wishedit; they were grateful for this considerate attention, but would not onany account begin till we shewed them the example, by smoking withpipes which they prepared for us. They appeared more at their ease afterthis incident, and after sitting for some time, took leave for the nighton the most friendly terms. 18th of September. --Captain Maxwell sent to me to say that he meant toland on a point at some distance from the town, in order to observe thesun's meridian altitude with an artificial horizon. Just as I wassetting out to accompany him, I was taken by surprise by twowell-dressed natives, who were halfway down the cabin ladder before Iknew of their approach. One came to superintend the measurement of theLyra, and the other, who seemed of inferior rank, to explain why somepoultry, only then sent, had not come on the preceding night, along withthe other presents. I forgot to mention, that a bullock, two hogs, twogoats, a dozen and a half of fowls, some candles, wood, and water, weresent to each of the ships. I asked them to sit down, and they were sowell satisfied with the Constantia which I gave them, that they remainedfor some time; owing to which delay, I did not reach the shore till thetime for observing the sun had gone by. I found Captain Maxwell withOokooma and several of the chiefs, and an immense crowd of the natives, all of whom had left the town on seeing the boat put off, and hadhastened to this spot, either out of curiosity or respect, or moreprobably to watch our proceedings. At our request, Ookooma, who appearsto possess considerable authority, made the whole crowd, chiefs and all, sit down on the grass in a circle round us. Their astonishment at ouroperations was strongly expressed in their countenances, and, indeed, our apparatus and behaviour must have looked, to perfect strangers, somewhat magical. In the first place the quicksilver, which to them would appear likemelted metal, was poured into a trough, in a fine stream from a woodenbottle; while it was running out the people repeated in an under tone"yi, yi, yi, yi!" but were silent when the glass roof was placed overthe trough. The circular instrument and sextant, fixed on stands, nextattracted their notice, and they looked on in profound silence while wewere taking the sun's altitude. As we were too late for the desiredobservation, we amused the natives by letting them look at the tworeflected images of the sun through the telescope of the instruments. Ookooma was the first who looked, and being quite unprepared for what hesaw, started back in astonishment, as if he had unconsciously beheldsomething supernatural and forbidden. The other chiefs, in their turn, placed themselves at the instrument, as well as several old men whostepped forward from the crowd. Some testified their surprise by asudden exclamation; others were perfectly calm, so that we could notguess what they thought; and some held up their hands, and looked as ifthe whole matter was totally beyond the reach of their comprehension. When this was over, and there was no longer any necessity for the crowdbeing seated, they closed round and watched us while we were putting theinstruments up. Some of the boys held out their hands for quicksilver, with which they ran off, quite happy. During this time we were about fifty yards from the foot of a cliff, onthe brow of which was posted a group of women with baskets on theirheads; we were unfortunately not near enough to discern their features, nor to make out their dress distinctly; it appeared, however, to be likethat of the men, though somewhat shorter, and without any girdle roundthe waist. The rock here rises in perpendicular rugged cliffs of coral, with anumber of rude square excavations on its face, which, at first sight, appear to have been worn by the elements, but on examination shewevident traces of art. Most of these caves are closed up by a wall ofloose stones, but in one, of which the mouth was open, several humanbones were found lying amongst the sand. On removing a stone from aclosed cave, a vase was observed in the inside, of an elegant shape; thepeople signified to us that these were the remains of the dead, but wedid not make out distinctly whether the bones or the ashes only werethus preserved. They made no objections to our examining these caves, though they certainly were not pleased with it. No notice was taken ofwhat Captain Maxwell and I did; but Mr. Clifford, who had remained belowcollecting words from some intelligent natives, was strongly recommendedby Ookooma to go back to the boat; he walked up, however, withoutopposition, to the cave which we had been examining, and they ceased toimportune him. A number of little boys who had observed us occasionallypulling flowers and plants, ran about collecting for us, and afterpresenting what they had gathered, with much politeness, ran awaylaughing with an arch expression of ridicule at our curiosity. On our way back, instead of going directly off to the ships, we coastedalong shore in our boats, which gave us a new view of a stone bridge, ofone arch, connecting two parts of the town. On the south side of thebridge we passed a space of considerable extent, probably set apart as aburying ground. We saw here a number of large horse-shoe tombs likethose used in China, whitewashed, and apparently kept in good repair. Most of the tombs, however, are in the form of small square houses, withlow pyramidal roofs; some of these were tiled, others thatched. It isevident that, in what relates to the dead, they follow, in somerespects, the Chinese customs. [Illustration: NAPAKIANG. ] The whole coast at this place is of coral cliffs, the base of whichappears to have been scooped out by the action of the sea. As thisexcavation is at some places higher than the waves of the sea can besupposed to have ever reached, there is difficulty in assigning the seaas the cause; yet the roof of the excavation is horizontal for a greatextent, and its appearance, in every other respect, suggests that it hasbeen formed by the dashing of the waves. There is, moreover, somedifficulty in accounting for coral cliffs being so much above the levelof the sea, in which, according to every supposition, they must havebeen formed. The scenery here, as in most countries in these climates, does not admitof a satisfactory description. It may be said, however, that it is morepleasing to the eye than that of islands near the equator, where thevegetation is so profusely luxuriant, as to overload the picture withfoliage to the exclusion of every thing else. Here there is muchvariety; the numerous groves of pine-trees give some parts of it anEnglish air, but the style of landscape is what is called tropical. Thegeneral character of the scenery at this spot is faithfully preserved inthe drawing of Napakiang. 19th of September. --No answer having yet come from the Great Man, webegin to apprehend that they are going to treat us in Chinese style, andexclude us from their country altogether. We have tried in vain todiscover whether the King is at this place, or a hundred, or as somemaintain, a thousand miles off; in the mean time, as we know the islandto be not more than sixty miles long, it is fair to suppose that theywish to deceive us. We conjecture that a large building on a rising ground, three or fourmiles from us in an eastern direction, with two flag-staffs near it, isthe palace mentioned in the account quoted by Pere Gaubil, LettresEdifiantes et Curieuses, Tom. XXIII. The natives always refuse to giveany information when asked about this building. Whenever the natives come on board, if at all well dressed, they areasked into the cabin, where we treat them with cherry brandy andConstantia. In the course of conversation they contribute a number ofnew words, and, in general, when they see what the object is, are verywilling to lend their assistance, and take much pains to teach us thetrue pronunciation of their words. One man, however, who was not soquick as they generally are, was in the cabin to-day for some time; Mr. Clifford was getting from him the Loo-choo words for sour, sweet, salt, &c. ; and in order to make him comprehend the questions, made him tastedifferent things that were sour, sweet, and so on: the poor fellow stoodthis very well, till some quassia was given to him to get the word"bitter;" he had no sooner tasted it, than he ran off quite astonishedat the manner in which he had been entertained. It blew hard this morning, so that there was little intercourse with theshore; but towards sunset it moderated, and Ookooma, Jeema, and fourother Chiefs, came on board, bringing with them a present of a bullock, two hogs, goats, and vegetables. The Chief whose name is Shayoon is themost clever of them all; he is next in rank to Ookooma, but he generallytakes the lead in discussion; he has a quick intelligent look, with moredetermination in his manner than any of the others. They were veryparticular on all these state occasions to observe the order ofprecedence, and no one sat down till his superior was seated. When anysubject was discussed, one at a time rose to speak, but not in order ofrank, and they never attempted to interrupt one another. The weather at this moment looked so stormy, that I went on board theLyra to prepare for a gale; by which I lost a very interestingconference with the chiefs. I learnt from Captain Maxwell afterwards, that he had remonstrated with them on their inconsistency and thepretended difficulty of getting answers from court; he gave them tounderstand, that he did not conceive it was treating the King of Englandwith due respect to deny his officers permission to walk on shore. Again, that they had promised to send pilots, but that none had come;and that many other promises had not been performed. He desired theinterpreter to say, that he was not pleased with their telling him somany different stories, all of which could not be true; first they saidthat the bullocks, hogs, &c. Were gifts from themselves; then, that theywere sent by the Great Man; then, that there was no Great Man here: infine, he urged them strongly to tell him the truth on all points. Theymade the interpreter repeat six times over what Captain Maxwell haddesired him to say; they then consulted amongst themselves a long time, and at last assured Captain Maxwell, that a reply to the communicationsmade by them to government would reach this place next day. As the stock and vegetables received by the ships had, by this time, amounted to a considerable quantity, a bag of dollars was offered tothem, and they were urged to take payment for what had been sent onboard; this offer, which had been made more than once before, was stilldeclined; upon which they were informed, that we considered it improper, as servants of government, to receive presents to such an extent fromindividuals. Upon this they gave their assurance, that the stock hadbeen sent on board by order of the Loo-choo government, on their beinginformed that the King of another country's ships had arrived. Nopayment they said could therefore be taken. With this Captain Maxwellwas satisfied. Their wish seems to be, to prevent our opening anycommunication with their government, and they appear so decided uponthese matters, that they will probably succeed, notwithstanding all ourefforts. The chiefs have dresses adapted to the state of the weather; yesterdaybeing cold and threatening, they all came on board with a sort of cloakor great coat made of a thick blue stuff like woollen cloth, buttoned infront. It is tighter than the ordinary dress, and is worn over it. It isonly in fine weather, and on state occasions, that they wear the bandturban, called by them "hatchee matchee;" at all other times they gouncovered, having their hair dressed like the rest of the people. 20th of September. --The mercury in the barometer fell last night from29. 72, to 29. 51, and the sky assumed a yellow appearance. We expecteda heavy gale, more particularly as it was so near the equinox, but wewere so sheltered by the land, that though it appeared to blow hard atsea, we felt nothing of it where we lay. Three or four canoes came round the south-west point of land thisforenoon; the people in them were supposed to have come from the otherside of the island, for they did not appear to have seen the shipsbefore. One of these people was much delighted with a looking-glasswhich was shewn to him; he took it in his hands, and calling hiscompanions about him, shewed them in turn its effect. Having done soseveral times, he held it opposite to his own face for four or fiveminutes without altering his countenance in the least; at last hesmiled, and immediately and involuntarily nodded assent to the image inthe glass, which had so exactly expressed what he felt himself; heseemed, however, aware, that it was a reflection of his own countenance, as he pointed to himself, yet he could not restrain his curiosity fromlooking behind, but instantly turned it round again. While the glass wasin his hands, he made us several long speeches, in which he frequentlyrepeated the word "Kagung, " the Loo-choo name for mirror; but, from hisbehaviour, it is probable he knew it only by name. One of this partysold his "Jeewa" or head ornaments for a wine glass. Sometimeafterwards, the others saw a bottle, which they wished to purchase inthe same way; it was, however, given to them as a present, and they wentaway very well satisfied. These canoes were of pine, from twelve totwenty feet long, and from two to four wide; their anchor is made ofwood loaded with stones. As no answer came this morning from the Great Man, Captain Maxwell tookthe ships into a more secure anchorage at the north-east corner of thebay; our first anchorage being too close to a reef, and moreover open tothe south-west winds. The place we had now shifted to, though apparentlyexposed, is, in fact, sheltered by a chain of reefs under water outsideof us to the westward. By this change, we have been brought close to thebridge spoken of before, and are now abreast the east end of the town:the Lyra not being more than a quarter of a mile from the shore. Astrict watch is kept on shore, so that no boat leaves the ships withoutbeing observed. Orders have been given for the whole anchorage to becarefully sounded; in doing this, the boats often approach the shore, and whenever this happens, a crowd of the natives, headed by one orother of the chiefs, repair to the spot, and wave them to keep fartheroff. 21st of September. --There appears to be some embargo upon the canoes, for there has not been one near us this morning, and only one on boardthe Alceste. It was found necessary to-day to move the frigate stillfarther in, and four or five hawsers were laid out for the purpose ofwarping her a-head. While this was going on, the beach, and all theheights near us, were crowded with people, wondering, no doubt, how theship was made to move without sails, for the hawsers were low down, andmight have escaped their observation. In the canoe which visited theAlceste, there came two men, who had not been seen before; they remainedbut a short time, which was spent in examining the hawsers and the modeof warping the ship. As soon as they had made themselves master of thissubject, they went on shore, as if to make a report. During their visitthey said little, being intent upon what was going on; but theinterpreter learnt from one of them, that a Great Man had actually come, or was expected in the town to-day. A report prevails, that the King ofthe island has lately been on board in disguise. We cannot trace thereport to any good foundation, and it is probably false. At the sametime, if his Majesty has any curiosity, it is not unlikely that he mayhave come near enough to see such a strange sight as we must be. It is possible that our moving up so close to the town has alarmed thepeople, and may have prevented their visiting us as heretofore; at allevents, it is very unfair in our friends, the Chiefs, neither to let thepeople come on board, nor to allow us to go on shore to look at them. Our occupation in the mean time is to observe the natives through thetelescope placed on a table on the Lyra's poop. The stone bridge appearsto be a great thoroughfare, several roads from the country leading toit; it seems also to be the only entrance to the town on this side. Nobody crosses it without stopping to look at us, and a crowd of idlepeople have taken post on and about it. We see a number of women comingfrom the country with baskets on their heads. Their outer dress differsfrom that of the men, it is open in front, and they have no girdle; theyhave an under dress, or sack, which is also loose, but not open; in somewe can see that this comes nearly to the feet, in others just to theknee, and we imagine that those who work in the fields have the shortdress: most of them allow their upper garment to flow out with the windbehind them. We observe a woman carrying a child across the hip as inIndia, with its hands on its mother's shoulder, while her arm is roundthe child's waist. One young lady has been seen for some time amusingherself by making a dog bark at the ships. We see women beating rice inwooden mortars. On the banks of the stream which the bridge crosses, there are a number of people washing clothes, which they perform in theIndian way, by dipping the clothes in water and beating them on stones. From one end of the beach to the other there is a range of peoplewatching us, they are formed here and there into groups; one of which, on a craggy knoll abreast of the ships, has struck us as beingparticularly interesting. A fine majestic looking man, whose full beardand flowing garments remind us of a figure in the Cartoons of Raphael, is standing in the middle of a circle of old men, who are lying on thegrass, and appear to be listening to him. 22nd of September. --This morning brings us no news, no permission toland! A number of flags and streamers are displayed on the masts of thevessels in the inner harbour, and there seems to be something going onon shore; no boats have come to us, and we have no occupation butlooking through the glass, which, however, affords a good deal ofentertainment, particularly as the people whom we see with it act in theusual way, being unconscious of our scrutiny. In the afternoon a number of boats left the shore and proceeded to theAlceste in procession. In the foremost boat there seemed to be a personof consequence, whom we immediately conjectured to be the Great Manalluded to by the people yesterday. He got on board the Alceste beforeus, and the natives also had left their canoes, so that we found theship's decks crowded with people. The Chief, whom we found seated in thecabin, was clothed in purple silk, with a light purple hatchee matchee. An official communication of our history was now repeated at the oldman's request. He listened with great attention till Captain Maxwellconcluded his statement, by informing him that the ship was leaky andrequired frequent pumping. He then begged permission to see thisoperation, if it would not give too much trouble. As this was exactlywhat we wished, the chain pumps were ordered to be got ready, and theconference went on, consisting principally of compliments. Observingthat we took notice of his being a little deaf, he seemed anxious toexplain that this was the effect of age. He made us feel his pulse, andlook at the withered state of his hand, then taking ours and feeling thepulse, held them up along with his own, and laughed with great goodhumour at the contrast which age had produced. He was about sixty yearsold, and his beard of thin hair was as white as snow: he had acheerfulness of expression, and a liveliness of manner, which areremarkable for a man of his years. His manners were graceful andelegant, and from the first moment he seemed quite at his ease. Everything about him, in short, indicated good-breeding, and a familiaritywith good society; and we could not help remarking his decidedsuperiority in appearance over the other chiefs. When the pumps were ready, he was escorted to the main deck, where hesat for some time in great admiration of the machinery; and seeing thelabour required to work it, he seemed really affected at our situation, which he naturally thought must be very bad, from the immense quantityof water thrown out by the pumps. The ship being upright, the water didnot run off freely from the deck, and in a short time it flowed roundthe chair in which the old man was seated. Three or four of the sailorsseeing him somewhat uneasy at this inundation, took him up chair andall, and placed him on a dry spot. The old gentleman was surprised, notdispleased, and very graciously replied to the low bows which thesailors made him. On returning to the cabin, they were all entertainedas usual with sweet wine, cherry brandy, and pipes. The old man filledpipes for us, and as soon as this part of the ceremonial had been gonethrough, a formal request was made for permission to land the Alceste'scasks and stores, in order to stop the leak and make other repairs. Thisproduced a long discussion amongst the chiefs, in which the old manjoined but little; he spoke, however, now and then, and whatever hesaid, appeared to be to the purpose. Whenever the chiefs spoke, theyrose and addressed themselves to him in a most respectful manner. Atlength, having agreed about an answer, they communicated to CaptainMaxwell that there was no good place here for the purposes he wanted, and that as our present anchorage was unsafe, they recommended our goinground to the harbour alluded to on a former occasion. At this place, which they call Winching or Oonching, he said we might put on shorewhatever we chose. On our asking if in Winching the water was deepenough to admit a large ship, a long discussion arose, during which theyappeared to be considering the merits of the harbour. They seemedapprehensive of giving it too high a character, and that on our reachingit we should be disappointed. The old man at length suggested sendingthe "little ship" to see whether it would answer. To this CaptainMaxwell agreed, only requesting that a person might accompany us, inorder to save time in the search. Simple as this appears, they took along time to consider it, and ended by saying that no reply could begiven till the next day. While the subject of this harbour was under discussion, the old man drewon a sheet of paper, a chart of the island, and pointed out the placewhere the harbour lay. It proved afterwards, when we had surveyed theisland, that this sketch possessed considerable accuracy, as thesituation of the harbour of which they spoke corresponds exactly withthat of Port Melville, discovered in the Lyra. It is much to beregretted that this curious sketch is lost. The Chief now walked about the cabin, examined the globes, books, andpictures, with great attention. The wainscot struck him particularly, aswell as the machinery and finish of the windows and sliding shutters. Captain Maxwell tried to make him comprehend our track on the globe. Hehad felt it becoming to preserve some state while business was going on, but he now became quite chatty and familiar. He went all over the ship, accompanied by the other chiefs and his own personal suite, consistingof a pipe bearer, a man who carried his large camp chair, another with acover of red cloth for the chair, and a man who carried a round Japanbox for the hatchee-matchee. Two others took it in turn to fan him, andto hold his arm by the elbow and wrist whenever he walked about;probably as a piece of state, for the ship had very little motion: thesefanners were very expert at their business, for not content with coolinghis face and neck, they lifted up his large sleeves and fanned his arms. On returning to the cabin, he saw Mr. Clifford using gloves, and beggedleave to try them on; with the right one he succeeded very well, but thenails of his left hand being about an inch long, he found it not so easya matter: he seemed to think them the oddest things he had met with, andlaughing much, held them up repeatedly to the other chiefs. The old man brought a present for Captain Maxwell, and sent another tothe Lyra, consisting of a hog, a kid, two bags of potatoes, a basket ofcharcoal, thirty bundles of eggs (five in each), a bundle of vermicelli, and a jar of an ardent spirit called samchew. All the chiefs, who werein their best attire, were severally accompanied by a man carrying a boxfor the hatchee-matchee; their dresses were of various colours, andtheir sandals and stockings all alike. On rising to go away, the old manbowed to me, and said that he meant to visit my ship; but this beingevidently complimentary, I begged him not to take so much trouble: he, in return, expressed himself obliged to me for being satisfied with thepoliteness intended. The Embassador's barge was manned to take him onshore, but as soon as he saw what was intended, he drew back, anddeclared that he could not land in any boat but his own. As it wassupposed that his modesty prevented his accepting this offer, he wasurged to overcome his scruples, and land in the manner proposed; hestill, however, declined the honour, but at last went down the ladder, and having stepped into the barge, made a bow to Captain Maxwell, as ifin acknowledgment of the attention, but immediately afterwards went intohis own boat and pushed off, under a salute of three guns from eachship. Our intention of returning this visit the next day was not mentionedduring the discussions in the cabin, from the certainty of its beingcombated, and perhaps overruled: but when the last of the chiefs wasgetting into the boat, the interpreter was desired to tell him, in acareless way, as a matter of course, that next morning this visit wouldbe returned on shore. As had been foreseen, this did not receive theirapprobation; the interpreter went into the boat, where every persuasionwas used to convince him of the impropriety of our intention: they couldnot succeed, however, in making him yield this point, and at length wentaway. This interpreter is called "John" by all parties, and thoughmerely an under servant of the factory at Canton, he is a very shrewdfellow. His English is certainly not the best, and probably the Chinesehe speaks is the base provincial language of Canton; so thatmisunderstandings are no doubt often caused by his erroneousinterpretation. John's report after the boat had put off, and from which we gather thatwe shall be expected, was as follows: "They ax me, 'what for my Ta-yincome sho?' I say, 'to make chin-chin[7] they Ta-yin;' they tell me, 'YouTa-yin too much great mandarine, no can come sho;' I say, 'What for myTa-yin no come sho? He great man; he[8] Ta-wang-tee too much great man;he let you Ta-yin come board ship, and you no let him come sho, chin-chin you Ta-yin; what for this?' Then they speak long timetogether; by and by ax me, 'how many people bring sho you Ta-yin?' So Ishake my head, I no like give answer long time, (they always take longtime answer me). When they ax me again, I say, 'Ta-yin bring five peoplemo besides me. ' They say, 'too much men come;' I say, 'No, no too much. 'They ax, 'What time come?' I give no answer. " 23d September. --As we had not contemplated such adventures as these, wehad made no preparations for them; and now that it was necessary to makesome return to the chief whom we were going to visit, we found greatdifficulty in preparing a suitable present. Captain Maxwell took withhim several dozens of wine, some books, glasses, various trinkets, and alarge piece of blue broad cloth. I took half the quantity of CaptainMaxwell's other presents, and a table cloth in place of the broad cloth. Smaller presents were also made up for each of the chiefs. At oneo'clock we set out in the barge, with a large union jack flying, and asit blew fresh, we soon reached the harbour. As we rowed past the shore, the people were seen running along all the roads leading to the town, sothat by the time we reached the harbour, the crowd on both sides wasimmense: the trees, walls, and house tops, and in short every spot fromwhich we could be seen, was literally covered with people, forming asight as striking and animated as can well be conceived. As we enteredthe harbour several of the chiefs were observed to come down to a point, and wave for us to go round the end of a pier or mole, forming the innerharbour, where there was a good landing-place. The chiefs helped us out, and then led us along, Ookooma taking CaptainMaxwell's hand, Shayoon mine, and Jeema Mr. Clifford's; the others, according to their rank, conducted Mr. M'Leod of the Alceste, Mr. Maxwell, and another midshipman, Mr. Browne. They held our hands nearlyas high as the shoulder, while a lane was formed for us through thecrowd of people, who were perfectly silent. The children were placed infront, and the next rank sat down, so that those behind could see us inpassing. At about a hundred and fifty yards from the landing-place, wecame to the gate of a temple, where we were met by the Chief, who stoodjust on the outside of the threshold, on a small raised pavement: hetook Ookooma's place, and conducted Captain Maxwell up a few steps intothe temple, which was partly open on two sides, with deep verandahs, which made the interior shady and cool. A large table, finely japanned, was spread, and two ornamented chairs were placed for us. The Chiefseated himself at one end of the table, and placed Captain Maxwell onhis left. He expressed himself much gratified and honoured by the visit, asked ourages, and if we were married. He was greatly pleased with CaptainMaxwell's account of his family, which nearly corresponded with his own. He guessed Mr. Maxwell's age to be twenty-seven, and was with difficultypersuaded to believe that a person six feet high could be only sixteen. The same mistake was made by all the natives, who invariably judged ofthe age of our young men by their height alone. An entertainment was nowserved, beginning with a light kind of wine, called sackee, which washanded round in very diminutive cups, filled by Issacha, from a smallhigh pot in which the sackee was kept hot. They insisted on our emptyingthe cup every time, shewing us a fair example themselves. During thewhole feast the sackee never left the table, being considered apropos toall the strange dishes which we partook of. The first of these consistedof hard boiled eggs, cut into slices, the outside of the white beingcoloured red. A pair of chopsticks[9] was now given to each person, andthese were not changed during the feast. Next came fish fried in batter, which we found an excellent dish; then sliced smoked pork, next pig'sliver sliced. After this, tea was handed round in cups of a moderatesize; the tea was quite new, resembling, as was observed, an infusion ofhay. Pipes and tobacco served to fill up the short intervals between thecourses. A man attended behind each of our chairs, whose sole businessit was to fill and light the pipes. The next dish was the strangest ofany, and disgusted most of the party; it consisted of a mass of coarse, soft, black sugar, wrapped up in unbaked dough, powdered over with riceflour, dyed yellow. After this we had dishes of round cakes, likegingerbread nuts; then cakes made in the form of wreaths, and in avariety of other shapes. There was something like cheese given us afterthe cakes, but we cannot form a probable conjecture of what it was made. Most of the dishes were so good that we soon made a hearty dinner, butthe attendants still brought in more, till the Chief seeing that we didnot eat, recommended the sackee to us. The old gentleman's eyes atlength began to glisten, and observing that we felt it hot, he requestedus to uncover, shewing the example himself. He seized the doctor'scocked hat and put it on, while the doctor did the same with hishatchee-matchee. The oddity of the Chief's appearance produced by thischange overcame the gravity of the attendants, and the mirth becamegeneral; nor was the joke relished by any body more than the Chief's twosons, who stood by his chair during all the entertainment: they werepretty little boys, with gaudy dresses, and their hair dressed in highshewy top-knots. [Illustration: LOO-CHOO CHIEF and his TWO SONS. ] During the early part of the feast, our presents were brought in ontrays, and laid at the feet of the Chief: the old man rose and saw themarranged, he then made a graceful bow, and acknowledged hissatisfaction, observing that we had sent him too much, and had done himmore honour than he was entitled to, and that he could not think ofaccepting the whole. This we considered matter of form, and in replylamented our inability to make suitable presents; upon which he satdown and said no more. The other chiefs ran about shewing the list oftheir presents to their friends among the crowd. The room in which this entertainment was given was open at first on twosides only, but afterwards the partitions on the other two sides weretaken down, being contrived to slide in grooves; thus the rooms areenlarged or diminished at pleasure. When the partition behind us wasremoved, several strange looking figures made their appearance, who wefound were Bodezes or priests. Their heads and faces were shaved, theirfeet bare, and their dress different from that worn by the rest of thepeople, being somewhat shorter, and much less free and flowing, withoutany belt round the waist, the robe being merely tightened a little by adrawing string tied at the side; over the shoulders hangs an embroideredband or belt, like that used by drummers: the colour of their dress isnot uniform, some wearing black, others yellow, and some deep purple. They have a timorous, patient, subdued sort of look, with a languidsmile, and ghastly expression of countenance. They are low in stature, and generally look unhealthy; they all stoop more or less, and theirmanners are without grace, so that a more contemptible class of peoplecannot easily be imagined. Along with the Bodezes were several boys, whom we took to be their children from the resemblance they bore tothem; but this mistake must have arisen from these boys being dressedlike the priests, for the Bodezes are strictly confined to a life ofcelibacy. From the circumstance of our being in a temple, as well asfrom our general habits of respect to persons filling sacred stations, we felt at first disposed to treat these Bodezes with attention, butthis was looked upon as ridiculous by the chiefs, who seeing us bowingto them, begged we would take no further notice of them. Instead ofbeing the class most respected, they are considered the lowest, and ifnot held in contempt, are at least neglected by all other ranks. During all the time we were at table, the crowd pressed round theverandahs, and perched themselves upon the walls and house-tops in thevicinity, or wherever they could get a peep at us. The satisfaction herewas mutual, as we were anxious to make the most of the opportunity, notknowing if we should ever be allowed to land again. After sitting twohours we rose, and were escorted to the boats in the same order as whenwe landed. An attempt had been made during the feast, when the wholeparty were in good humour, to prevail upon the old gentleman to sanctionour taking a walk into the town; but the bare mention of such a thingsobered the whole party in an instant, and the subject was accordinglydropped. The sailors, who had been kept in the boats for fear of theirdoing mischief, had not been neglected by the Chief, who had sent thempart of the feast, nor did it seem that they had any objection to thesackee. We looked anxiously on the right and left as we passed throughthe crowd, in hopes of seeing some of the women, but in this expectationwe were disappointed. At a considerable distance indeed, on the oppositeside of the harbour, we saw a group of women, several of whom came downto the causeway to obtain a better view of the boats as they passed. Sixor eight young girls ran to the pier head, round some rocks near theend; they reached this spot just as we rowed past, but looked quitefrightened at finding themselves so near us, and immediately drew backout of our sight. We fancied that we could discover a good deal ofbeauty in some of their faces, and that their figures were handsome; butas we had not seen a fair lady's face for nearly half a year before, ourjudgment in this case is not perhaps to be depended on. Ookooma and hisassociates put off to accompany us in one of their own boats, but as itblew hard, they came no farther than the pier head: Jeeroo, however, wassent along with us, to see that there were no stray sheep. What is to follow is uncertain, but it is clear that we have made littleprogress of late, while fresh obstacles have been hourly rising againstour landing; in the meantime, the Loo-chooans shew no little sagacityand kindness of disposition in supplying us liberally with all kinds ofstock. 24th of September. --Last night and to-day it has blown a hard gale ofwind, beginning at north north-east, and shifting to north-west, but thereefs and the land break its force, and enable us to ride in perfectsecurity: in all probability it blew severely in the open sea. Thebarometer fell from 29. 62, to 29. 50, yesterday; in the evening it hadreached 29. 48, and this morning stood at 29. 40. About four in themorning it began to rise rapidly, and the severity of the gale did notcome on till it had risen a good deal. The thermometer both in the dayand night stands at 82º, with very little variation, but the sky beingconstantly clouded, no observations could be made. 25th of September. --Jeeroo came on board this morning with a present ofvegetables and fruit, and afterwards went on board the Alceste to joinOokooma and Jeema. They had preceded him with a present from the Chief, by whose desire they made a number of kind inquiries, and repeatedlyexpressed, in his name, surprise and satisfaction at our having beenable to ride out the gale. They also apologized for not visiting usyesterday, which the gale had rendered impossible. It was represented inthe conference to-day, that our limbs were getting quite stiff for wantof exercise, and that it became absolutely necessary for us to land, onaccount of our health: they debated amongst themselves for some time, and then said that a final answer would be given to-morrow. They havequite forgotten their promise to send a pilot for the harbour to thenorthward: they wish also that we should forget it, since they changethe subject whenever it is spoken of, and affect total ignorance of ourmeaning. The government probably think it best to keep us where we are, and therefore discourage our investigating the island any further. Jeeroo, who begins to get quite familiar with us all, is a laughinggood-humoured man, about thirty: he shakes every one cordially by thehand when he comes on board, and engages in all our amusements withgreat cheerfulness. He is very useful to us, because the anxiety he hasto learn English makes him communicate freely the knowledge of his ownlanguage: thus there is little difficulty in fixing him over a glass ofConstantia, upon which occasions he contributes largely to Mr. Clifford's vocabulary. Some of our words the Loo-chooans cannotpronounce; the letter _l_ preceded by _c_ appears the most difficult;they call Clifford "Criffar, " and even this requires many efforts: notone of the natives has yet been able to make any thing of child; theycall it shoidah, choiah, and chyad. 26th of September. --No boats have been near us to-day, and we mightreadily land if we chose it; but Captain Maxwell is resolved not to doso till he gets the consent of the natives. 27th of September. --As we were still prevented from going on shore, weamused ourselves by examining a reef which forms the north side of theanchorage. We found a field of coral about half a mile square, dry atlow water, with the surf breaking very high on the outer edge, whichlies exposed to the waves from the north. The surface of the rock isevery where worn into small holes, which being left full of water as thetide goes out, are occupied by a number of beautiful blue fish. Thecoral is exceedingly hard, and though at many places it sticks up insharp points, it requires a hammer of considerable weight to break it, and emits sparks like flint when struck; in a short time it entirelydefaces the hammer. This extent of level space has suggested the idea ofmeasuring a base on it in order to survey the anchorage, since thereappears so little chance of our being allowed to land for this purposeon the beach. While we were deliberating on this matter, we had a striking proof ofthe inconvenience to which we were likely to be exposed during thissurvey, by the tide rising and fairly washing us off. Notwithstandingthis, we determined to commence next morning, and returned to makepreparations, in high spirits at the prospect of an occupation, if noton terra firma, at least out of the ship, within whose sides we had beenconfined so long. On returning, we found that Captain Maxwell hadarranged a party to visit the small island and reef which we were soclose to on the 14th instant; the survey was therefore postponed. Jeeroo sent us off some fresh fish to-day; some were red, and one or twoblue: he came himself afterwards, and was happy to find us muchgratified by his present. A formal message was sent to-day to the chiefsin attendance, stating that both ships were in want of fresh water, andthat the boats must go on shore with casks to bring some off. In a shorttime after this message had been delivered, a number of canoes camealongside with large tubs of water; a strong proof of their alertness ingetting rid of all our excuses for landing, and at the same time, itmust be owned, of their readiness to supply our wants. An elderlygentleman, not a chief, visited us to-day, accompanied by his secretary. His appearance and manners being greatly in his favour, we paid him allthe attention in our power. His wish was to be permitted to go all overthe ship at his leisure; and in this way he examined every thing onboard with far more attention than any body had done before him. Hissecretary, who was equally inquisitive, accompanied him in order to takenotes. He employed himself for about six hours in examining the upperdeck, and never quitted any thing till he understood its use. While hewas thus occupied, he was attended by the sailors, who were pleased withhis reverend appearance, and very readily assisted the old man in hisenquiries. It was interesting to observe, indeed, how early the gentle and engagingmanners of all classes here won upon the sailors, no less than upon theofficers. The natives from the first were treated with entireconfidence; no watch was ever kept over them, nor were they excludedfrom any part of the ships; and not only was nothing stolen, but whenany thing was lost, nobody even suspected for an instant, that it hadbeen taken by them. The old man next came down to the cabin, where he remained a long timeexamining the books and furniture, and occasionally engaging inconversation with Mr. Clifford, for whose Vocabulary he supplied manynew words, and corrected others which had been written down erroneously. He would not accept any thing valuable, but was grateful for samples ofrope, canvas, and cloth. This old gentleman renewed his examination ofthe brig next day; nor was it till the third day that he completed hissurvey. 28th of September. --At sunrise we set out for Reef Island, which liesabout six miles from the anchorage: we reached it in about an hour, butas it was low water, the coral was left almost bare for a considerableway out, and our large boat could not get near the beach. In thisdilemma we took possession of a canoe which was at anchor, and inseveral trips all the party landed. Near a hut we saw about a dozenpeople who stood looking at us till we landed, and then ran away, leaving their tobacco-pipes, pouches, and various other things on theground about the hut, in which we found a pot of boiled sweet potatoesand several jars of water. Having, in vain, tried to allay theapprehensions of the natives by waving to them, to induce them toapproach us, we sat down to breakfast; which we had hardly done, whentwo of them, an old man and a boy, came to the door of our tent andprostrated themselves before us, apparently in great alarm, for theyanswered incoherently, "ooa" (yes) to every question we asked them. Atlast we raised the old man on his knees, but he would not quit thisposture till we gave him a glass of rum, which re-assured him a little, and shortly afterwards he consented to stand on his legs. Having thusgradually gained confidence, he made signs that we had taken his canoe:upon which an order was given to the coxswain to restore it. He guessedimmediately what was said, and in the joy of his heart was proceeding toprostrate himself again, but was stopped by our holding out buttons andsome pieces of meat and bread to him, which he received in both hands, and touching his head each time with the presents, made three lowobeisances and retired. On rising from breakfast we found, near the tent, about a dozen natives, who, in most respects, resembled our friends at Napakiang, but were notso neatly dressed; and their hair, instead of being formed into a knot, was allowed to fly loose. During the morning the party amused themselvesin various ways. Some took their guns and went in search of curlews andsea-snipes: others set out to explore the reefs; and two or threeremained near the tent, for the purpose of making observations on thesun at noon; but as it became cloudy about this time, the latter partyfailed in their object. The rest were more successful; the sportsmenhaving shot some game for dinner; and the other party having found allthings favourable for inspecting the reef. The examination of a coral reef during the different stages of onetide, is particularly interesting. When the tide has left it for sometime it becomes dry, and appears to be a compact rock, exceedingly hardand ragged; but as the tide rises, and the waves begin to wash over it, the coral worms protrude themselves from holes which were beforeinvisible. These animals are of a great variety of shapes and sizes, andin such prodigious numbers, that, in a short time, the whole surface ofthe rock appears to be alive and in motion. The most common worm is inthe form of a star, with arms from four to six inches long, which aremoved about with a rapid motion in all directions, probably to catchfood. Others are so sluggish, that they may be mistaken for pieces ofthe rock, and are generally of a dark colour, and from four to fiveinches long, and two or three round. When the coral is broken, abouthigh water mark, it is a solid hard stone, but if any part of it bedetached at a spot which the tide reaches every day, it is found to befull of worms of different lengths and colours, some being as fine as athread and several feet long, of a bright yellow, and sometimes of ablue colour: others resemble snails, and some are not unlike lobsters inshape, but soft, and not above two inches long[10]. The growth of coral appears to cease when the worm is no longer exposedto the washing of the sea. Thus, a reef rises in the form of acauliflower, till its top has gained the level of the highest tides, above which the worm has no power to advance, and the reef of course nolonger extends itself upwards. The other parts, in succession, reach thesurface, and there stop, forming in time a level field with steep sidesall round. The reef, however, continually increases, and being preventedfrom going higher, extends itself laterally in all directions. But thisgrowth being as rapid at the upper edge as it is lower down, thesteepness of the face of the reef is still preserved. These are thecircumstances which render coral reefs so dangerous in navigation; for, in the first place, they are seldom seen above the water; and, in thenext, their sides are so steep, that a ship's bows may strike againstthe rock before any change of soundings has given warning of the danger. The island at high water is formed into three parts, which at low waterare joined by reefs; the whole being about two and a half or three milesfrom east to west, and tolerably clear of rocks on the south side; buton the north it is guarded by a semicircle of coral extending upwards ofa mile from the shore. On the centre island is only one hut, which, asthere was reason to believe it to be the actual abode of theinhabitants, it may be allowable to describe. The walls were sunk underground, so that only the roof appeared from without, the inside wasfifteen feet by six: the walls of neatly squared stones, being two feethigh, and the roof in the middle about six or seven high, formed of aridge pole supported in the centre by a forked stick; the rafters ofrough branches were covered with reeds, and thatched over with the leafof the wild pine, which grows on all the coral islands. The fire-placewas at one end on a raised part of the floor, and the other end appearedto be the sleeping place. It was conjectured, that this wretched placecould only be meant as a temporary residence of fishermen, whose nets wesaw lying about; but the number of water jars and cooking utensils whichwe found in and about it, gave it the appearance of a fixed habitation. It was almost dark when we quitted the island, and the tide carrying usout of our proper course, we missed the ships and grounded on the reefsnear the town; but as the tide was flowing, we easily got off, and bycoasting along, soon gained the anchorage. Sunday, 29th of September. --This day is memorable, on account of itsbeing the first on which we were permitted to land. Yesterday, when we were absent at Reef Island, the chiefs had come onboard to say that we might land, but that our walk must be confined tothe beach, and that we were neither to enter the town, nor to go intothe country. At one o'clock several of the chiefs came on board andaccompanied us to the beach, where we landed amidst an immense crowd, and were handed along by Ookooma and the rest, who, in their desire tobe civil, held us by the arms. The day, however, being excessively hot, and the sand deep, we found this troublesome, and begged leave to walkalone, to which they reluctantly consented, and we proceeded along thebeach for a quarter of a mile. Beginning to get tired of our walk, we stopped and expressed somesurprise at such a reception, and told them how disagreeable it was tous to be in the sun at such an hour. But our remonstrances did notproduce much effect, for, on our objecting particularly to the heat, they shewed us to a sort of cave in a rock on the beach, where they putdown a mat and wished us to drink tea in the shade, since we dislikedthe sun. This could not be submitted to, however, and we told them thatour object in landing was not to sit down on the beach to drink tea, butto walk about under the trees in order to recover our health, impairedby a long stay on board ship. They tried all their eloquence to persuadeus that our walk, thus limited, was perfectly pleasant; till at lengthCaptain Maxwell gave them to understand, that he wished to go to the topof the hills under the trees; but that, as he did not mean to advance asingle step beyond what was approved of, he would return instantly tothe ship if they persisted in confining him to the beach. A consultationwas held upon this, during which, frequent reference was made to severalelderly men, whose opinions appeared to have great weight. They did notwear the dress of chiefs, but, from all that passed, we suspected themto be persons about court, who had been sent to assist the councils ofthe local commission, without superseding its authority. They at lastagreed to our going to the top of the hill, taking the precaution beforewe set out, of sending on a couple of runners, probably to give warningto the women who might be in that direction. About half way up the road, which winds along a steep face, there is a neatly-built well, suppliedby a stream which runs along a carved water-course, and near it werethree or four rudely carved stones about a foot long and four inchesacross, with slow matches and a small quantity of rice laid upon each. Mr. Clifford distinctly made out that this was meant as a religiousoffering, but its precise object could not be discovered, though it wasconjectured that the guardian deity of the well might have some title tothe honour. The side of the hill is cut into horizontal irregularterraces, which are cultivated with apparent care, and irrigated bymeans of ditches leading from the well. On gaining the brow of the hillwhich overlooks the anchorage, the chiefs stopped, but as we were withina few yards of the summit, where we saw a shady grove, we begged them toproceed, to which, after a short deliberation, they consented. Bygaining this eminence, we commanded a view of an extensive valley morebeautiful than any thing we had ever seen; and on the side opposite tous we saw the large building spoken of before, generally suspected to bethe King's palace: our questions, however, on this subject were alwaysanswered in so evasive a manner, and with such apparent distress, thatwe seldom made any allusion either to it or to the King. Here we remained under the trees for an hour, drinking tea and smokingpipes in company with all the chiefs, besides four or five of the oldmen mentioned before. We amused them by lighting their pipes with aburning glass; but one old gentleman, who suspected some trick, and didnot join in the surprise shewn by the rest, held out his hand that itmight be exposed to the focus; and he was soon undeceived, to the greatamusement of the circle. The magnifying power of the glass engaged theattention of them all, but they were differently affected by it: astart and an exclamation of pleased surprise was the most usual effect;some laughed immoderately at every experiment, while others were madevery grave by it, who had not been particularly serious before. Advantage was taken of the moment when their admiration of the glass wasat the highest, to present it to Jeeroo, whose good-will it was thoughtexpedient to conciliate: he had not expected this, and felt obliged tous for so public a mark of our esteem. A man on horseback happening to ride by, it was gravely suggested to thechiefs that nothing would so materially contribute to the establishmentof our health as this species of exercise; but they insisted upontreating our request as a mere joke. On the way back an attempt was madeto vary the walk by turning to the left on reaching the brow of thehill, and so walking along the edge of the cliff to another road; thechiefs observed upon this that we should infallibly tumble down and killourselves; affecting, notwithstanding the absurdity of any suchapprehensions, to be greatly distressed at our danger: so we turnedback, after having had a short interview with an old man seated in ashed on the edge of the precipice. His white beard, which covered hisbreast, suited well with his sedate and contemplative air, and gave himmuch the aspect of a hermit. Our appearance did not in the leastdiscompose him, nor did he take any notice of us till desired to do soby Ookooma; he then bowed slightly, but immediately resumed his fixedlook, as if he had been quite alone. As we drew near to the place where we had landed, our companionssurprised us by an invitation to a feast, prepared, they said, on ouraccount in a temple close to the shore. Here they gave us painted eggs, smoked salt pork, and various preparations of eggs and fish, with sweetcakes in numberless forms, besides tea, pipes, and sackee, a light kindof wine made hot. Nothing could be more cheerful than they all wereto-day: they placed us on the floor at the upper end of the room, and, for some time, they would not allow us to move; but Mr. Clifford, who, from the progress he has made in their language, has become a greatfavourite, was invited to join a merry party in the verandah, to whichthey brought flowers, fruits, and every thing they could think of, inorder to learn their English names, and give in return those ofLoo-choo. On reaching the boats, Jeeroo and two of his friends seemed disposed togo on board; they were accordingly invited to do so, which made him sohappy, that he took a rudely-carved ivory ornament, in the shape of amonkey, from his tobacco-pouch, and gave it to me. Dinner was on tablewhen they came on board, but there was time before taking my friendsbelow, to intimate to the servants, that these gentlemen were going todine with me, so that when we reached the cabin, three plates were laidin addition. They had probably not expected to find dinner ready forthem on board, for they expressed surprise at these preparations havingbeen made, and would not sit down for some time. When the covers wereremoved, they became silent, and looked on either hand for directionshow to proceed. On being helped to soup, they did not stir till they sawus take spoons, in the management of which they shewed but littleawkwardness. The knife and fork gave them more trouble, but they setseriously about acquiring a knowledge of their use, and, in a shorttime, found no difficulty. Their grave propriety on this occasion is the more worthy of remark, from its standing in some measure opposed to our own behaviour undersimilar circumstances: for instance, when we first tried to eat withtheir chopsticks: on that occasion there was a sort of gigglingembarrassment shewn by some of us, a contempt as it were of ourselves, for condescending to employ an effort to acquire the use of a thingapparently so unimportant. Their diminutive cups and odd dishes, too, sometimes excited mirth amongst us. Our Loo-choo friends, however, nevercommitted themselves in this way; a difference of manners, which mayarise from their looking upon us as their superiors, and vice versâ; buteven admitting this, which we were sufficiently disposed to do, it iscertainly no excuse for us. On this occasion Jeeroo and his friends had evidently made up theirminds to find every thing quite new, for all three made a slightinvoluntary exclamation when one of the covers was lifted up, and sheweda dish of their own sweet potatoes. They ate of every thing, using agreat deal of salt, with the fineness and whiteness of which they weremuch pleased. A tart, however, being put on the table, they all objectedat first to touching it; they would not say why: they were at lengthprevailed upon to taste it, which they had no sooner done, than theyexclaimed that it was "masa! masa!" (good! good!) It was made of Scotchmarmalade, and Jeeroo, in recommending it to his friends, told them itwas "injássa, amása, " (bitter, sweet), a union which they appeared notto have met with before. They drank wine with us, but said they fearedit would make them tipsy; upon which we shewed them our mode of mixingit with water, which was evidently new to them, for they relished it somuch in this form, that they were in a fair way of running unconsciouslyinto the very excess which they dreaded. As soon as the cloth wasremoved, they rose, and went to walk about the ship: on our shewing awish to accompany them, they intreated us to keep our seats. During dinner, though it was the first they had ever seen in theEuropean style, these people not only betrayed no awkwardness, butadopted our customs, such as drinking wine with each other, so readily, that we were frequently at a loss to determine whether they had but justlearned these customs, or whether their own usages in these cases weresimilar to ours. As they pushed off in their boat they were asked tosing, which they did at once, and by their manner we suspected that thesong had some allusion to us, but we could not make out the words. 30th of September. --During the whole of this morning we were engaged inthe survey, accompanied by several of the midshipmen of both ships. Wemeasured a base, and continued taking angles till the tide rose anddrove us off. 1st of October. --As a free intercourse was now established with thenatives at this place, and little doubt remained of our being able togain their permission in a day or two for landing the Alceste's stores, it became an object to ascertain, without further delay, whether or notthis anchorage was better than the harbour described by the natives asbeing a few miles only to the northward. While any apprehensions existedof our not being able to land here, it was not thought prudent to sendthe Lyra to look for that harbour, lest the chiefs should become stillmore suspicious of our intentions. At this moment, however, there wasreason to believe that the chiefs wished the Alceste to remain where shewas, and it was expected that any show of moving to another harbourwould stimulate their exertions to render our present situationagreeable. The Lyra was accordingly ordered to weigh this morning at daylight, forthe purpose of examining the coast for ten or twelve leagues to thenorthward. We went out by a narrow passage through the reefs, and in thecourse of the morning beat up to Sugar Loaf Island. We did not land uponit, but passed near enough to see that it is richly cultivated on thelower parts, and that all the houses are collected into villages, shadedas usual by large trees round the bottom, and for one-third of the wayup the sides of the peak. As this was our furthest point in the presentsurvey, we tacked on reaching the Sugar Loaf, and coasted round theshores of a large square bay on the west side of the great island. Thewind shifted gradually as we sailed along, blowing directly off theshore at every place, by which means we were enabled to complete thecircuit of the bay before dark, after which we anchored in sixty-fivefathoms water. Next morning we resumed our examination of the coast, but as the weather was fine, we hoisted out a boat and pulled closealong the shore, while the brig kept her course at the distance ofseveral miles. In this manner we traced the whole shore, till we cameclose to Napakiang, without seeing any port. We tried to land at severalplaces, but were every where kept off by coral reefs stretching alongthe coast, at the distance of two or three hundred yards, and forming, to strangers at least, an impenetrable barrier. The canoes of thenatives paddled away from us, and passed through the surf by passageswhich we were afraid to approach. We returned to the brig about twoo'clock, and at three anchored in our former place at Napakiang. The departure of the Lyra had excited a great sensation on shore; thechiefs came off to inquire of Captain Maxwell where the "honee gua"(little ship) was; but he did not choose to satisfy them, except bysaying that they had trifled with him so long, and refused to let himland his casks and stores with such obstinacy, that he must endeavour tofind some more favourable place at which to refit his ship. The effectwas exactly what he wished; they intreated him not to think of movingfrom Napakiang; offered him not only large boats to put his stores in, but said he should have store-rooms on shore for whatever he desired, while his ship was refitting. They moreover granted him permission toland with his officers, and to go to the top of the hill without beingguarded as formerly. On the Lyra's anchoring, the chiefs came on board in great agitation, desiring to know what we had discovered. As we had actually nothing torelate, there was little difficulty in keeping our secret. Theyaccompanied me on board the Alceste when I went to make my report, butCaptain Maxwell, having found the advantage he had already gained bykeeping them in ignorance of his intentions, was nowise communicative. They now offered to allow his people to land for the purpose of washingtheir clothes, which they had before refused to do, and in short, werein a mood to grant any thing, provided we were willing to remain at thispart of the island. They did not pretend that this was out of regard forus, and it was easy to see that they apprehended more trouble inmanaging us any where else than at this place. Amongst the argumentsused by them to dissuade us from going to the other end of the island, they said it was inhabited by savages. It came out accidentally too, that in the event of the ship's actually proceeding to other parts ofthe island, the six chiefs were to accompany us: so that they wereprobably influenced by considerations of personal convenience to makeevery exertion to prevent our moving. 3d of October. --The Lyra's crew were allowed to go on shore to-day towash their clothes, and amuse themselves by running about on the side ofthe hill. Two of the sailors of this party, who happened to be singingnear the well, drew a number of natives round them, who expressed greatpleasure at hearing their songs. At first the crowd consisted entirelyof the peasantry, who listened with great attention, and neverinterrupted the sailors; but in about half an hour, a person of somerank, with a number of attendants, came up, and begged them to singseveral of their songs over again: we could not find out who this personwas, but it was probably one of the chiefs, some of whom are remarkablyfond of our music. 4th of October. --The survey on the reef was completed to-day: the onlyinconvenience we had experienced here, was the limited time which thetide allowed us each day, otherwise the situation was well adapted for abase, from its commanding a view of all parts of the anchorage. Duringthe progress of the principal survey, the young gentlemen sent byCaptain Maxwell, in conjunction with the midshipmen of the Lyra, completed a survey of the reef itself. A native of a genteel appearance, but not in the dress of a chief, visited the Lyra to-day, and gave me apresent of two pipes and two bags of sweet potatoes. 5th of October. --Captain Maxwell called for me this morning at sunrise, on his way to the shore. The chiefs had not expected us so early, andour only companion for some time was an old peasant, who now and thenran on before to give notice of our approach. Two well dressed peopleshortly afterwards came up, and continued with us during our walk, whichat first lay along the beach, but afterwards led into the country; someexception was taken to this by our companions, but as no attention waspaid to them, they desisted. After walking about a mile, we passed through a grove of young trees, and found ourselves close to a village, which lies in the bottom of aglen highly cultivated, the houses being almost entirely hid by trees, of which the bamboo is the most conspicuous. This village is surrounded by a close hedge, and every separate housealso has an inclosure: some of the houses have attached to them neatarbours, formed of a light frame of bamboo covered with a variety ofcreepers. The rice fields are divided by small banks of earth, made toretain the water, and along the top of each bank there is a foot-path;the whole valley having much the air of a scene in India. A number ofthe villagers, accompanied by their children, came out to meet us, butthere were no women amongst them: we passed on, as they were evidentlyaverse to our entering the village. On our way across the valley we were attracted by the appearance of acottage, so buried in foliage as to be completely hid from our view tillwe were within a few paces of the door. It was surrounded by a slightfence of rods, about an inch apart, with a line of creepers along thetop, and hanging down on both sides: a wicker gate admitted us, and weentered the house, which we found divided into two apartments, eightfeet square, besides a small verandah at one end. The floors, which weremade of slips of bamboo, were raised about six inches from the ground, and covered with a straw mat. The walls were five feet high, beingneatly wattled with split bamboo, above which rose a pointed thatchedroof. It was occupied by an old man, whom we appeared to have disturbedat breakfast, for cups and tea-things were arranged on the floor; heasked us to sit down, and gave us pipes and tea. The little apartment wewere in was as neat as any thing we had ever seen: on one side there wasa set of shelves, with cups, bowls, and cooking utensils; on the otherswere hung various implements of husbandry, with hats and variousdresses, all clean and in order. Higher up was a sort of loft or garret, formed by bamboo poles, laid horizontally from the top of the walls; onthis were placed various tools, nets, and baskets. The fire-place was inthe middle of one side, and sunk below the level. On the outside, in thespace between the house and the fence, there was a pigeon house and apoultry yard, and close to the little verandah spoken of before, therestood two spinning-wheels of a light and ingenious construction. Allround on the outside of the fence, the trees were high and thick; andthough the sun was above the hills, the house was completely shadedexcept at the end, where a small opening admitted the rays into theverandah. We staid some time with the old farmer, trying to express ouradmiration of the simplicity and beauty of his cottage, and then went upthe opposite side of the valley. Here we found a road like a dressed walk in a garden: following this, wepassed through a series of beautiful groves of bamboo and other trees, till at length, after winding about a good deal, we came to a double rowof tall pine trees, interspersed with many others whose names we did notknow, so as to form a walk which must be shady at all hours of the day. This road we knew would lead to the town, and therefore when we hadreached the highest point we turned to the right, and after a short walkreached the grove of trees which had been made the limit to our firstwalk on the 29th ultimo. At this place Captain Maxwell surprised thenatives a good deal by shooting several birds on the wing, but theycould not be prevailed upon to fire themselves, nor even to pull thetrigger when no powder was in the pan. 6th of October. --After divine service to-day on board the Alceste, along conference was held between Captain Maxwell and the five chiefs, when, after a good deal of discussion, it was agreed on their part toallow the Alceste's stores to be landed, for the purpose of getting atthe leak. Our means of interpreting on these occasions are not the bestthat could be wished; but John, our Chinese, is nevertheless a keenfellow, and very ready with answers when pressed. We generally explainas fully as possible to John what our wishes are, and then leave him tocommunicate them the best way he can. An instance of his quicknessoccurred to-day, which seems worth mentioning. John had communicated tothem, by Captain Maxwell's desire, that as the leak complained of was inthe magazine, it would be necessary to land the powder: they debated along time upon this, and then asked John "Why the powder was not put onboard the little ship?" John, who was not aware of any good reason, affected to be surprised at this question, which he refused tointerpret, saying that if Captain Maxwell thought such a measure right, he would surely not have waited till they suggested it. The light inwhich he had thus put the question, made them earnestly desire him notto mention any thing about it, declaring at the same time, that theywould willingly give a place for the powder, and for any other storeswhich Captain Maxwell might wish to land. To-day for the first time they talked unreservedly of the king, whosename even they had hitherto studiously avoided: they spoke freely of hismajesty's having sent all the stock and vegetables with which we weredaily supplied. Captain Maxwell, who of course was very desirous ofopening a communication with the court, intimated his wish to pay hisrespects as soon as might be convenient. They heard this with apparentsatisfaction, and signified that his request should be made known to theking. We are at a loss to discover what can have caused this change ofmanner. We can only conjecture, that perhaps the king, on hearing somany reports about us, may have become desirous of seeing us himself. Atall events it is clear that some alteration in the instructions to thechiefs must have been made, otherwise they would have shewn their usualreserve when the king's name was mentioned, and would on no account haveallowed us to talk of visiting him. At one o'clock we went on shore to look at the place assigned by thechiefs for the reception of the Alceste's stores. It is an oblonginclosure, sixty yards by forty, surrounded by a wall twelve feet high, rather well built with squared coral: the entrance is by a large gate onthe south side, from which there extends raised gravel walks, withclipped hedges, the intermediate spaces being laid out in beds, like agarden. The temple in which we were feasted on the day of our firstvisit, occupies one corner of the inclosure; it is completely shaded bya grove of trees, which also overhang the wall. In that part of thegarden directly opposite to the gate, at the upper end of the walkthere is a smaller temple, nearly hid by the branches of several largebanyan trees; and before it, at the distance of ten or twelve paces, asquare awkward looking building, with a raised terrace round it. Thetemple first spoken of is divided by means of shifting partitions intofour apartments, and a verandah running all round, having a row ofcarved wooden pillars on its outer edge to support the roof, whichextends considerably beyond it. The floor of the verandah is two feetfrom the ground, the roof is sloping and covered with handsome tiles, those forming the eaves being ornamented with flowers and variousfigures in relief; there are also several out-houses, and a kitchencommunicating with them by covered passages. In one of the innerapartments, at the upper end, there is a small recess containing a greenshrub, in a high narrow flower-pot, having a Chinese inscription on atablet hanging above it on the wall. On another side of the same room, there hangs the picture of a man rescuing a bird from the paws of a cat;the bird seems to have been just taken from a cage, which is tumblingover, with two other birds fluttering about in the inside: it is merelya sketch, but is executed in a spirited manner. In one of the backapartments we find three gilt images, eighteen inches high, with aflower in a vase before them. The roof of the temple within is ten feethigh, and all the cornices, pillars, &c. Are neatly carved into flowersand the figures of various animals. The ground immediately round it isdivided into a number of small beds, planted with different shrubs andflowers; and on a pedestal of artificial rock, in one of the walks closeto it, is placed a clay vessel of an elegant form, full of water, with awooden ladle swimming on the top. On a frame near one of the out-houses, hangs a large bell, three feet high, of an inelegant shape, resembling along bee-hive; the sides are two inches thick, and richly ornamented:its tone is uncommonly fine. It was determined to appropriate part of the large temple to the use ofthe sick and their attendants; the assistant surgeon of the Alcestetaking one room, and the gunner, who was to have the whole inclosure inhis charge, another. The small temple at the upper end, being a retiredspot, was fixed upon for the Lyra's observatory; the square building inthe centre seemed well adapted for a magazine. At the gate a notice washung up, both in English and Loo-choo, signifying that no person was toenter without a written pass from Captain Maxwell, or from one of thechiefs. 7th and 8th of October. --These days have been occupied in carrying thearrangements of Sunday into effect. It was very interesting to observethe care which the natives took of the sick, whom they assisted all theway from the beach to the temple; a number of people attended to supportsuch of them as had barely strength enough to walk. When they weresafely lodged, eggs, milk, fowls, and vegetables, were brought to them;and whenever any of them were tempted by the beauty of the scenery towalk out, several of the natives were ready to accompany them. The powder was landed, and Mr. Holman, the gunner of the frigate, beganthe operation of drying it on hides spread in the sun round themagazine. The cows and other stock were also landed. One of the cowscalved that night, to the surprise of every body, and the great joy ofthe natives, who took a great fancy to the little bull born amongstthem. Mr. Mayne, the master of the Alceste, took up his quarters in thetemple, in order to be near his observatory, which was in the centre ofthe garden. The stores of all kinds were sent on shore from the Alceste, which produced an apparent confusion, and the chiefs, seeing so manyvaluable things lying about, began to fear that they would be takenaway; at least, it was supposed that they had such an apprehension, forthe wall of the temple was immediately fenced in by a sort of net-workof long bamboo poles, the ends of which were fixed in the ground at thefoot of the wall on the outside, and the tops made to cross one anotherfour or five feet above the wall. This contrivance, instead of renderingthe place more secure, made it more accessible; but as our opinion wasnot asked, and we had no apprehensions of theft, we let them proceed intheir own way. Mrs. Loy, wife of the boatswain of the Alceste, was the only female inour squadron, and as such excited no small interest at this place. Shewas a perfectly well behaved person, and sufficiently neat in her dress, but without great pretensions to good looks. The natives, who from thefirst paid her much attention, shewed at all times their desire ofgranting her every indulgence. They even went so far as to say she mightgo into the city; but, upon consulting with her husband, who wasapprehensive of some accident, she declined it. When this circumstancebecame known to us, we easily convinced the boatswain that no mischiefcould possibly arise from trusting his wife amongst such kind people;but Mrs. Loy could not be persuaded of this; and thus was lost the onlyopportunity of seeing the town which occurred during all our stay. Two of the natives have been studying English with great assiduity, andwith considerable success. One is called Mádera, the other Anya. Theycarry note books in imitation of Mr. Clifford, in which they record intheir own characters every word they learn. They are both keen fellows, and are always amongst the strangers. From the respect occasionally paidto them, it is suspected that their rank is higher than they give out, and that their object in pretending to be people of ordinary rank, is toobtain a more free intercourse with all classes on board the ships. Mádera, by his liveliness and his propriety of manners, has made himselfa great favourite; he adopts our customs with a sort of intuitivereadiness, sits down to table, uses a knife and fork, converses, andwalks with us, in short, does every thing that we do, quite as a matterof course, without any apparent effort or study. He is furtherrecommended to us by the free way in which he communicates every thingrelating to his country; so that as he advances in English, and we inLoo-choo, he may be the means of giving us much information. As aninstance of his progress in English, it may be mentioned, that one dayhe came on board the Lyra, and said, "The Ta-yin speak me, 'you go ship, John come shore;'" by which we understood that Captain Maxwell had senthim on board the brig for the interpreter. This was about three weeksafter our arrival. [Illustration: PRIEST and GENTLEMAN of LOO-CHOO. ] Most of the natives have acquired a little English, so that Mr. Cliffordhas now no difficulty in finding people willing to instruct him, and totake pains in correcting his pronunciation. One of his teachers, calledYáckabee Oomeejeéro, will not permit him to write down a single wordtill he has acquired the exact Loo-choo sound: but he is like the restin shewing an invincible objection to giving any information about thewomen. He admits that he is married, and gives the names of his sons:but when his wife or daughters are alluded to, he becomes uneasy, andchanges the subject. On Mr. Clifford's gravely telling him that hebelieved there were no women on the island, he was thrown off his guard, and answered hastily, that he had both a wife and daughter, butinstantly checking himself, turned the conversation another way. On thepicture of an English lady being shewn to him, he commended it highly, saying, at the same time, "Doochoo innágo whoóco oorung" (Loo-choowomen are not handsome. ) This old gentleman is a better teacher thanscholar; he calls the letter L "airoo;" veal, "bairoo;" flail, "frayroo;" in which instances of mispronunciation, we may recognize adifficulty not uncommon amongst English children. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 6: This circumstance is by no means common, and thereforecannot be depended on. In fine weather these reefs give no warningwhatever, and a ship on approaching them ought invariably to have a boata-head. ] [Footnote 7: Chin-chin in the corrupt dialect of Canton, means theceremony of salutation, which consists in the action of holding up theclosed hands, pressed together before the face, and bowing at the sametime. ] [Footnote 8: Ta-whang-tee is Chinese for Emperor, King. ] [Footnote 9: Chopsticks are two pieces of ivory or wood, about a foot inlength, of the thickness of a quill; they serve in China instead of aknife and fork, and are held in the right hand. Until the difficult artof holding them is attained, they are perfectly useless. The Chief atthis feast, seeing that we made little progress, ordered sharp pointedsticks to be brought, which he good humouredly recommended our usinginstead of the chopsticks. ] [Footnote 10: A large collection, which was at this time made of theseZoophites, was unfortunately lost in the Alceste. ] CHAPTER III. The Lyra sent to survey the Island of Loo-choo--Discovery of Port Melville--Description of that Harbour, and the Villages on its Banks--Lyra nearly wrecked--Interview with Natives at the South Point--Return to Napakiang--Behaviour of the Natives at a Seaman's Funeral--Mádera's Character and Conduct--Sociable Habits of the Natives--Dinner given to the Chiefs of the Island by Captain Maxwell--Mádera's Behaviour on this Occasion--Two Women seen--A Lady of Rank visits the Boatswain's Wife--Captain Maxwell fractures his Finger--Loo-choo Surgeon--Concern of the Natives--Visit of the Prince--Discussion about the King of Loo-choo's Letter--Mádera appears in a new Character--Feast given by the Prince--List of Supplies given to the Ships--Behaviour of the Prince on taking Leave--Preparations for Departure--Mádera's Distress--Last Interview with the Chiefs--Brief Memorandums upon the Religion, Manners, and Customs of Loo-choo--Advice to a Stranger visiting this Island. As soon as the survey of Napakiang anchorage was completed, and aperfectly good understanding established with the natives, it wasdetermined to make a survey of the whole island, and the Lyra wasordered upon this service. She were absent about a week, during whichperiod the general chart of the island was constructed. It will beobvious to every one acquainted with the subject, that, in so short atime, a very exact survey of the coast of an island nearly sixty mileslong could not have been made: yet, as the weather was in general fine, and other circumstances favourable, the chart will be found sufficientlycorrect for most practical purposes. As the chart and the nautical andhydrographical details are given in the Appendix, I propose at presentto relate only such particulars of the cruise as seem likely to interestthe general reader. 9th of October. --At daybreak we got under weigh and stood to sea througha passage discovered by the boats; it was so extremely narrow, that theleast deviation from the course brought us close to the rocks. We wereregulated in steering by two marks on the land, which lie in the samestraight line with the centre of the passage; these it is necessary tokeep always together: but not conceiving that such nicety was requiredwhile sailing out, the marks were allowed to separate, by which we foundourselves in a minute or two within a few yards of a coral reef, theragged tops of which were distinctly seen two or three feet below thesurface, whilst, at the same time, the leadsman on the opposite sidesounded in nine fathoms. This early proof of the danger of navigatingamongst coral, by teaching us the necessity of extreme caution, was ofgreat importance to us in our future operations. As the coast lying between Napakiang and the Sugar Loaf had already beenexamined, we proceeded at once round that island, which, from its havingthe same aspect on every bearing, and being quite different in shapefrom any land in this quarter, is an excellent land-mark for navigators. The natives call it Eegooshcoond, or castle[11]. The English name wasgiven, I believe, by Captain Broughton. Having rounded this peak and stood in for the north-west side of theGreat Loo-choo, where there is a deep bight, a small island was observedclose in shore, behind which it was thought there might be shelter forships; the coast, however, being unknown to us, it was not thought safeto carry the brig very close in, and a boat was therefore dispatchedwith an officer to reconnoitre: he returned at eight o'clock to say thatthere was a harbour in the main land, the entrance to which lay on theinside of the small island mentioned before; but that the passages werenarrow and winding, and that a more careful examination was necessarybefore the brig could venture in. 11th of October. --In the morning we again stood in, using theprecaution of sending a boat a-head to sound the way; when we had nearlyreached the entrance we anchored, and proceeded in three boats toexamine the harbour discovered last night. As it was near noon when wepassed the small island, we landed and observed the meridian altitude ofthe sun; after which we entered the harbour in the main island, by anintricate passage of about a quarter of a mile in length, and at oneplace not two hundred yards wide. Here we found ourselves in a circularbason upwards of half a mile across, with deep water, and completelysheltered from all winds. On its western shore we saw a large andbeautiful village almost hid amongst trees, with a high wooded rangebehind it stretching to the south. The eastern shore was low and laidout in salt fields, with a few huts here and there. At first sight thisbason did not appear to have any outlet except by the one we hadexamined; but on rowing to its upper or southern side, we found that itjoined by a narrow channel with another harbour still larger, and ifpossible more beautiful than the first, for here the land was high onboth sides, and richly wooded from top to bottom. Proceeding onwardsthrough this bason, which had all the appearance of an inland lake, wecame to another outlet, not above a hundred yards wide, formed by cliffsrising abruptly out of the water to the height of a hundred feet. Bothsides being covered with trees, which almost met overhead, the spacebelow was rendered cool and pleasant, and the water, thus sheltered fromevery wind, was as smooth as glass. We rowed along for some time byvarious windings through this fairy scene in total uncertainty of whatwas to come next, and at last, after advancing about three miles, itopened into an extensive lake several miles in length, studded withnumerous small islands. The depth of water in the lake varied from four to six fathoms; but inthe narrow neck which connects it with the sea the depth is from ten totwenty fathoms, being deepest at the narrowest parts. Ships might ridein any part of this extraordinary harbour, in perfect safety during themost violent tempests: and the shores are so varied, that every purposeof re-equipment might be served. At some places natural wharfs areformed by the rocks, and eight and ten fathoms water close to them. Ships might lie alongside these places, or might heave down by them:there are also shallow spots on which ships might be careened. Many ofthe cliffs are hollowed into caves, which would answer for storehouses;and in the numerous lawns on both sides encampments might be formed ofany number of people. We rowed directly across, and landed at the southern side at the footof a wooded range of hills, which forms the southern boundary of thelake. As no road was observed, it was resolved to go directly up thehill, and, in about an hour, after a good deal of scrambling amongst thebushes and long grass, we gained the top, where we found a neat pathwaywith a ditch on each side, and a hedge growing on the top of the mound, formed of the earth from the ditch; it resembled not a little an Englishlane. Without knowing where this might take us to, we followed it, inthe hope of meeting some of the people, but in this we weredisappointed. Yet this place must, at times, be frequented, as weobserved a number of similar paths leading to the right and left. The trees on this range of hills are low, and of no great beauty; thefir is the most common, but we did not know the names of the rest. Afterwalking about a mile, our path took an abrupt turn down the brow of thehill, and appeared to lead to a large village at some distance. The viewfrom this elevation was very satisfactory, as it enabled us to check ourrough eye draught of the harbour and coast. The road down the hill wasso steep that it was just possible to stand upon it, being inclined, aswas conjectured on the spot, at an angle of 45º. At the foot of the hillthere was a little cottage, consisting of two parts, made of wattledrattans, connected by a light open bamboo roof, so covered with a largeleaved creeper as to afford a complete shelter from the sun. Thecottage, which was thatched, was enveloped in creepers, encircled by theusual rattan fence at two or three yards distance. One of the wings wasoccupied by goats; the other, which was dark, seemed to belong to thepeople, who had deserted it on our approach. There being only a smallhole in the wall to admit light and air, and to allow the smoke toescape, every thing inside was black and dirty. Two spears hung on oneside, which, upon enquiry afterwards, we were told were for strikingfish. On coming to our boats, we found them surrounded by a party of thenatives, smaller in stature than our friends at Napakiang, and shewingless curiosity: probably their surprise at our sudden appearance had notsubsided sufficiently to allow of their indulging curiosity in detail. Alarge party of them watched attentively while a musket was loaded, andwhen pointed over their heads in the air, they seemed aware thatsomething was going to happen, but from their not shrinking or removingout of the way, it seemed they knew not what. When it was fired, thewhole party fell as if they had been shot, but rose instantly again, andlooking to the right and left of each other, indulged in a timorouslaugh. A cartridge was given to one man, with which he was nearlyblowing himself up by placing it on his lighted pipe. The officer of theboat informed us that a gentleman had come to him and offered his horseto ride; he had dismounted for that purpose, but the horse wasfrightened, and would not suffer the officer to get upon him. We sawthis person riding along when we were at the top of the hill; he calledout to us repeatedly, probably to offer his horse, but we thought hewished to dissuade us from walking over the hill, and accordingly tookno notice of him. In the meantime Mr. Clifford, who had been unwell, and felt unequal tothe labour of climbing the hill, proceeded in one of the boats towards alarge village on the eastern side of the lake. He was met by a number ofthe inhabitants, whose dress and appearance were inferior to what we hadbeen accustomed to see at Napakiang; on his asking them in Loo-choo forsome water, they gave it cheerfully; but they shewed little curiosity, and the party which followed wherever he went, seemed to have no otherobject than to prevent disturbance. They made no objection to his goinginto the village, where he saw in one inclosure a complete farm-yard. The principal house was closed, but to the offices there was freeaccess. In the stable were two handsome bay ponies; there was also awell stocked pig-sty, and a poultry-house. In another quarter stood amill for husking corn, consisting of a grooved solid cylinder of wood, fitting neatly into a hollow cylinder, the sides of which were alsogrooved; near this lay a hand flour-mill and several baskets of cotton. In another part of the court was a granary erected on posts about sixfeet above the ground, having billets of fire-wood piled below it. Atanother place, under a tree in the village, he saw a blacksmith's anvilfixed in a block; the forge was of masonry, having an air hole, but thebellows was wanting. In the centre of the village stood a building like a temple, surroundedby a stone wall. It was filled with elegant vases of different shapesand sizes, closed up and ranged in rows on the floor; the verandahencircling the building was also covered with vases. According to theaccount of the natives, the remains of the dead are deposited in thesejars. Round the building bamboo poles were placed so as to lean againstthe thatched roof, having notches cut in them, to which bundles offlowers were hung, some fresh, others decayed, apparently funerealofferings; but their exact import Mr. Clifford was not able to learn. The elegant shape of the vases, and the tasteful way in which they werearranged, with the flowers hanging all round, gave to this cemetery anair of cheerfulness, which we are in the habit of thinking unsuitableto a depository of the dead. This village, which is at the head of a bay, is sheltered from the northwind by a row of trees between it and the beach; behind it is shelteredby a range of hills. A broad road runs between it and the water; treesare planted among the houses, so as nearly to conceal them. In themiddle of the village near the cemetery, in an open square, there is acluster of granaries like the one described above; the walls are made ofwattled rattan, and overhang the lower part. Mr. Clifford tried in vain to see the Chief of the village; but eitherthere was no such person, or he was out of the way: the inhabitantspointed out a man on horseback as a Chief, who passed on to anothervillage; this was probably the same man who offered his horse to Mr. Hall, the officer of the boat. Mr. Clifford went to the top of the rangebehind the village, and afterwards into the valley on the other side, which he found highly cultivated. From the heights we saw that the large space which was at firstconsidered a lake, communicates with the sea to the north-eastward, aswell as by the narrow passage through which we had come, but there wasnot time to allow of its being fully examined. As we returned by thenarrow straits, we called at some of the small villages on the easternside. At one of these, the people of the village, headed by a man whoappeared to be superior to the rest, came towards the boat, and stoppedfor some minutes at the distance of fifty yards; after which, appearingto have gained confidence, they came on, with the old man in front, carrying a green bough in his hand. He would not come close, however, till invited by Mr. Clifford in Loo-choo to look at the boat; he thenadvanced and presented his bough, in return for which we broke a branchfrom a tree, and gave it to him with the same formality he had usedtowards us. Soon after this exchange was made, they left us, and went toexamine the boat, to fishermen always an object of great interest. On our entering the village we were met by a man who appeared to be theprincipal person of the place; he was very polite, shewed us through thevillage, and took us over his garden, where he had some sugar-canegrowing; this we admired very much, upon which he ordered one of thefinest of the canes to be taken up by the roots and presented to us; weimmediately gave him a few buttons off our jackets, with which he wasquite pleased. On its beginning to rain while we were in the garden, heinvited us into his house, which, from the walls being of wattled cane, looked like a large basket. Rude pictures and carved wood-work figureswere hanging on the walls, together with some inscriptions in Chinesecharacters. On returning to the lower harbour of all, we went to the large villagebefore spoken of, which is by far the most finished of any that we haveseen on this island. The streets are regular and clean swept; each househas a neat cane wall, as well as a screen before the door; plantain andother trees are growing so thickly in the inside of the fence, that theycompletely shade the house. Near the beach were several large houses, inwhich a number of people were seated writing: on going up to them theygave us tea and cakes, and afterwards allowed us to go over the villagewithout restraint; they were curious to know whether the brig was cominginto the harbour or not, and if so, how many days we meant to stay; theyexpressed neither pleasure nor regret when we said that we were notcoming in. In front of the village, and parallel with the beach, thereis a splendid avenue thirty feet wide, formed by two rows of largetrees, whose branches join overhead, and effectually screen the walkfrom the sun; here and there are placed wooden benches, and at someplaces stone seats are fixed near the trees: this space, which is abouta quarter of a mile long, is probably used as a public walk. A range of hills of a semicircular form embraces the village, and limitsits extent: at most places it is steep, but at the point where the northend joins the harbour, there is an overhanging cliff about eighty feethigh, the upper part of which extends considerably beyond the base; ateight or ten yards from the ground on this inclined face, a longhorizontal gallery has been hewn out of the solid rock: it communicateswith a number of small square excavations still deeper in the rock, forthe reception of the vases containing the bones of the dead. The trees and creepers on the edge of the precipice hung down so as tomeet the tops of those which grew below, and thus a screen was formedwhich threw the gallery into deep shade: every thing here beingperfectly still, the scene was very solemn and imposing. It took ussomewhat by surprise, for nothing in its external appearance indicatedthe purpose to which the place was appropriated: happening to discoveran opening amongst the trees and brushwood, and resolving to see what itled to, we entered by a narrow path winding through the grove. Theliveliness of the scenery without, and the various amusements of theday, had put us all into high spirits, but the unexpected and sacredgloom of the scene in which we suddenly found ourselves had aninstantaneous effect in repressing the mirth of the whole party. This village is called Oonting, and is certainly the same that isalluded to by the chiefs, and which we formerly wrote down Winching andOonching. This excellent harbour, which we discovered, has been named PortMelville, in honour of Lord Viscount Melville, First Lord of theAdmiralty. It was quite dark when we reached the brig. As a heavy swell was rollingin, no time was lost in getting under weigh, but before we could succeedin running well off the reefs, the wind suddenly changed, and theweather, which before had been fine, became so dark and squally, that wealmost lost sight of the shore. Our situation was now very critical, forwe had just sufficient knowledge of the coast, to be sensible howextremely dangerous it was; and the wind, which blew directly on theshore, came in such violent gusts, that there was every reason toapprehend the loss of our topmasts; to reef the sails was impossible, asthe delay which this operation must have caused would have been fatal. While things were in this state, it became necessary to tack, but owingto the heavy and irregular swell, the brig came round again against ourwill, and before the sails could be properly trimmed, she had gone sternforemost almost to the verge of the reef, on which the sea was breakingto a great height. Had this occurred a second time, nothing could haveprevented our being wrecked. After beating about in this awkwardpredicament for two hours, the wind shifted a little, and enabled us tostretch off clear of all danger. 12th of October. --It blew so hard that we kept out at sea clear of theshore. 13th of October. --As the weather had become moderate, we stood in, anddetermined the position of five islands which lie to the northward ofPort Melville. 14th of October. --During this day the whole of the east side of thegreat island was explored. The north and north-east sides are high, anddestitute of cultivation; nearly in the middle, on this side, there is adeep indenture on the coast, and the wind being such as to admit ofsailing out again, we ran in under low sail with the usual precautions;notwithstanding which we were very nearly on the reefs, for the watershoaled suddenly from twenty-four to eight fathoms; and although thebrig was instantly tacked, the soundings as she came round were onlyfive fathoms, and to leeward of us the ragged tops of a rock just levelwith the surface were discovered at the distance of only fifty yards. Inexploring such places there ought to be a boat on each bow, as well asone a-head. The coast from this bay to the south point of the island hasa belt of coral reefs at the distance of ten and fifteen miles from theshore, and therefore cannot be approached by a ship without greatdanger. The extreme south point is comparatively clear of coral; wetherefore anchored off it at sunset, proposing to land next day todetermine its position. We found the iron cables of great use whenanchoring amongst coral reefs. 15th of October. --It blew hard last night, but in the forenoon itmoderated sufficiently to allow of our landing. We ascertained thelatitude of the extreme south point with precision, and made severalother observations, all circumstances being favourable. We had scarcely landed when the natives began to assemble in groups onthe top of the cliffs, and in a short time they came down to us, most ofthem carrying long poles in their hands; we were sufficiently aware oftheir inoffensive character to have no apprehension of their intentions, otherwise their appearance would have been somewhat formidable. Therewas no person of rank among them; they were communicative and full ofcuriosity, which difference in manner from the inhabitants on the shoresof Port Melville may have arisen from these people knowing something ofus by reports from Napakiang, which is not above ten miles distant. Itwas to be expected that we should have become a topic of discourse atso short a distance, and probably what was said of us would befavourable, or at all events such as would excite curiosity rather thanfear. Most of these people had fish spears tatooed on their arms in theform of a trident, with rude barbs. When drawn on the right arm it iscalled "Oódeemaw;" when on the left, "Toóga. " This is the only instancewe have met with of this practice. Our curiosity was farther excited bythe appearance of these spears, from the circumstance of our neverhaving seen any warlike weapon on this island; but the people invariablycalled them "Eéo stitchee" (fish spear). Several of the tallest of thesepeople were measured, but none were above five feet six inches; theyare, however, strong limbed and well proportioned. One of them wore aring on his finger, which is the only instance we have met with of anyornament being worn at Loo-Choo. The ring finger is called in theLoo-choo language, "Eébee gánnee, " finger of the ring; and it seems afair inference from this, that amongst some part of the community ringsare habitually worn; probably by the women. The coast here is formed ofcliffs, about seventy or eighty feet high, with numerous cavernshollowed out by the waves. The pools of water left by the tide were fullof beautiful fish of a great variety of colours. 16th of October. --In the morning we weighed and stood to the westward, among the group of islands called Amakírrima by the natives. At one ofthese there seemed at first sight to be a harbour for ships; but onsending the boats to explore, it proved only safe for small vesselsbeing filled in every part with coral. On our way across from the southpoint of the great island to the Amakírrimas, we passed near a coralreef exactly circular, and half a mile in diameter; it is just levelwith the water's edge at half ebb, so that in fine weather the sea doesnot break upon any part of it. As it is upwards of seven miles from anyland, and lies directly in the passage towards Napakiang, it isexceedingly dangerous, and ought not to be approached in the night by astranger. At four o'clock we anchored in our old place in-shore of the Alceste. Aswe stood towards the anchorage we could see the coral from the mast-headso distinctly as to be able to trace the forms of all the reefs as wepassed among them. This can rarely be done, although the water is alwaysclear, because an unusual degree of smoothness in the surface isrequisite to make the rocks visible; and the sun must also shine uponthe water at a particular angle. A stranger cannot therefore calculateupon having the danger pointed out in this way; but when suchcircumstances do occur they may be taken advantage of to check thesurveys of reefs made in boats. We find things at Napakiang nearly as we left them; the bestunderstanding seems to exist between Captain Maxwell and the chiefs. Every body is allowed to walk about and do as he likes. The frigate hasbeen bountifully supplied with stock and vegetables; and the sick onshore are rapidly recovering under the kind care of the natives, whotake a peculiar interest in their comfort. A young man belonging to the Alceste had died during our absence. Whenthe natives were informed of this circumstance, they requestedpermission to make the grave, and begged Captain Maxwell to point out aplace for this purpose. Captain Maxwell said that no situation could bemore appropriate than under the grove of trees near the temple, a spotalready rendered sacred by many Loo-choo tombs. Next day the body was carried to the grave with all the formalitiesusual on such occasions, Captain Maxwell, according to custom, walkinglast, with the officers and crew before him. The ready politeness of thenatives was never more strikingly displayed than now; for perceivingthat those who were of the highest rank walked in the rear, theyconsidered that their station must of course be in front; and theyaccordingly placed themselves at the head of the procession, andpreserved throughout the ceremony the most profound silence. They wereall dressed in white robes, which we have reason to believe is theirmourning. On the next day the natives requested leave to raise a tomb over thegrave; this was of course agreed to, and when it was completed, theyperformed their own funeral service over it, by sacrificing a large hog, and burning a quantity of spirits. Jeeroo officiated on this occasion, and when he had done, he carried the hog to the sick in the hospital. The chiefs also gave directions for a small square stone to be smoothedand prepared for an epitaph; which being traced upon the stone by Mr. Taylor, the clergyman of the Alceste, was carved very neatly by thenatives. The epitaph, after mentioning the name and age of the deceased, stated briefly, that he and his companions in his Britannic majesty'sships Alceste and Lyra, had been kindly treated by the inhabitants ofthis island. When the purport of the writing was interpreted to thechiefs, they appeared very much gratified at our acknowledging theirattentions. 18th of October. --Our friends expressed much pleasure on meeting usagain, particularly Jeeroo, who seems to take great interest in ourconcerns: he carried us up to the sailor's tomb, where we were joined byOokooma, Jeema, and some of the others, who unaffectedly expressedtheir sorrow for this man's untimely fate. I found my people who hadbeen landed previous to our sailing on the survey, much recovered, andvery grateful for the kindness of the natives. Milk, eggs, meat, andvegetables, had been brought to them every day, and whenever they feltdisposed to walk they were accompanied by one or two of the natives, whotook their arms on coming to rough ground, and often helped them up thesteep side of the hill behind the hospital, to a pleasant grassy spot onthe summit, where the natives lighted pipes for them: in short, Isuppose sailors were never so caressed before. The chiefs were anxious to know what we had been doing during the weekin which we had been absent. From an apprehension that they might bedispleased at our having instituted a regular examination of the wholeisland, we said we had been looking at the harbour they had spoken of;they immediately mentioned the village of Oonting, and asked how weliked it. But they guessed that we had been round the island, fromseeing that we returned by the south, though we had sailed to the north;they said repeatedly, that the island was very small, appearing to beanxious to depreciate it; our reply of course was, that it was verylarge and beautiful. Mádera has made great improvement in English, and his character isaltogether more developed. He is quite at his ease in our company, andseems to take the most extraordinary interest in every thing belongingto us; but his ardent desire to inform himself on all subjects sometimesdistresses him a good deal; he observes the facility with which we dosome things, and his enterprising mind suggests to him the possibilityof his imitating us; but when he is made sensible of the number of stepsby which alone the knowledge he admires is to be attained, his despairis strongly marked. He sometimes asks us to read English aloud to him, to which he always listens with the deepest attention. One day, onshore, he saw me with a book in my hand: he begged me to sit down undera tree, and read: Jeeroo was the only chief present, but there wereseveral of the peasants in attendance upon him; they all lay down on thegrass, and listened with an attention and interest which are naturalenough: every one expressed himself pleased and satisfied except Mádera, whose anxiety was to read in the same manner himself. From the earnestway in which he inquired into every subject, we were sometimes inclinedto think that he must have been directed by the government to informhimself on these topics; and certainly a fitter person could not havebeen selected; for he adapted himself so readily to all ranks, that hebecame at once a favourite, and every person took pleasure in obliginghim. Jeeroo is esteemed in another way; he is uniformly good humoured andobliging, and not without curiosity; but he is not clever, and has noneof the fire and enthusiasm of Mádera. We all think kindly of Jeeroo, andshake him cordially by the hand when we meet him; but Mádera is admiredand respected, as well as esteemed, and his society is courted for hisown sake. Mádera is about twenty-eight years of age, of a slender figure, and veryactive; his upper teeth project in front over the lower ones, giving hisface a remarkable, but not a disagreeable expression. He is alwayscheerful, and often lively and playful, but his good sense prevents hisever going beyond the line of strict propriety. When required byetiquette to be grave, no one is so immoveably serious as Mádera, andwhen mirth rules the hour, he is the gayest of the gay: such indeed ishis taste on these occasions, that he not only catches the outward toneof his company, but really appears to think and feel as they do. Hisenterprising spirit and versatility of talent have led him to engage ina number of pursuits; his success, however, is the most remarkable inhis acquisition of English. About a month after our arrival, he wasasked what had become of his companion Anya; he replied, "Anya, himmother sick, he go him mother house;" and when asked if he would return, he said, "Two, three day time, him mother no sick, he come ship. " Withall these endowments and attainments he is unaffectedly modest, andnever seems aware of his being superior to the rest of his countrymen. We were a long time in doubt what was his real rank; for at first hekept himself back, so that he was well known to the midshipmen, beforethe officers were at all acquainted with him: he gradually came forward, and though he always wore the dress of the ordinary respectable natives, his manners evidently belonged, to a higher rank, but he never associatedwith the chiefs, and disclaimed having any pretensions to an equalitywith them. Notwithstanding all this, there were occasionalcircumstances, which, by shewing his authority, almost betrayed hissecret. One morning a difficulty arose about some supplies which thechiefs had engaged to procure, but which they had neglected to send; assoon as Mádera was told of the circumstance, he went to Captain Maxwell, and undertook to arrange it to his satisfaction, at the same timebegging that if any difficulty occurred in future, he might be appliedto. Whatever may be Mádera's rank in his own society, it is highlycurious to discover in a country so circumstanced, the same politeness, self-denial, and gracefulness of behaviour which the experience ofcivilized nations has pointed out as constituting the most pleasing andadvantageous form of intercourse. The great interest which Mádera took in the English, and the curiosityhe always expressed about our customs at home, suggested the idea oftaking him with us to England, where he would have been an interestingspecimen of a people so little known; and he also might have carriedback knowledge of the greatest use to his country. When it was proposedto him, he paused for some minutes, and then, shaking his head, said, "Igo Injeree, --father, mother, childs, wife, house, all cry! not go; no, no, all cry!" In our absence a number of watch-houses had been erected on the heightsround the anchorage; they are mere sheds of cane thatched over, in whichthree or four of the natives remain, day and night, in order to be readyto accompany any person who may happen to land, wherever it be. Theyhave also erected a long shed, with a floor of split bamboo; in thisplace, which is on the top of the hill above the usual landing place, the chiefs generally assemble in the morning; they invite every one whopasses to drink tea and smoke pipes, which is very convenient when theboats happen not to be ready to take us on board. Each of the chiefs isattended by a boy, generally his son, whose business it is to carry alittle square box, in which there are several small drawers, dividedinto compartments, filled with rice, sliced eggs, small squares ofsmoked pork, cakes, and fish; and in one corner a small metal pot ofsackee, besides cups and chopsticks. By having this always with them, they can dine when and where they choose. They frequently invite us todine with them, and if we agree to the proposal, they generally ask anyother of the chiefs whom they meet to be of the party and join dinners. The place selected for these pic-nics is commonly under the trees, in acool spot, where a mat is spread on the grass; and every thing beinglaid out in great order, the party lies down in a circle, and seldombreaks up till the sackee pot is empty. An artist of the island brought a drawing of the Alceste on board to-dayfor Captain Maxwell: it is about two feet by one and a half, and isaltogether a most extraordinary production, in which perspective andproportion are curiously disregarded. The captain and officers areintroduced in full uniform, and a number of the sailors on the riggingand masts. With all its extravagance, however, it has considerablemerit; there is nothing slovenly about it, and there is enough of truthin it to shew that it was sketched on the spot. A dispute has arisen between John the interpreter and the chiefs, who itseems had positively promised to get a horse for Captain Maxwell toride; as they have not kept their word, John declares that he will havenothing to say to people who do not speak truth. They have againpromised, however, that a horse will be got ready, and in the mean time, a fresh stock of beef and vegetables has been sent to both ships, whichhas pacified John a little. We have had much occasion to lament nothaving been accompanied by one of the gentlemen of the factoryacquainted with the Chinese language, for although to have John is muchbetter than to be without any interpreter, it is probable that he is notvery delicate in his requests, and makes use of expressions andarguments unsuited to our character, and contrary to our wishes andinstructions. 19th of October. --In the morning, before breakfast, Captain Maxwell wasinformed by one of the chiefs, that a horse was ready for him on thebeach; he landed accordingly, and found a little pony saddled, and twoof the chiefs mounted. They objected to his riding in the country, wherethe roads were uneven, so that for the present his ride was confined tothe beach. The saddle is made of wood, and so uneven as to be veryunpleasant: it is proposed to have one made of a blanket and mats infuture. To the stirrup there is tied a box, large enough to receive thewhole foot. A dinner was given to-day by Captain Maxwell to the chiefs Ookooma, Shayoon, Issacha Sandoo, Jeema, and Issacha Hackeeboocoo; Jeeroo wasalso invited to it, but did not attend; being the junior, he hadprobably been left in charge of the beach and store-rooms. Mádera alsomade one of the party, though not originally included in the invitation. As he had never laid any claim to an equality in rank with the chiefs, it had not been thought right to invite him along with them: but Mádera, who probably knew that he would be very welcome, put himself in CaptainMaxwell's way just before dinner, and was prevailed upon, after a littlepersuasion, to remain. Dinner was served at five o'clock in as sumptuous a style as possible. Ookooma was placed on Captain Maxwell's right, and Shayoon on his left;I sat beside the former, and Mr. Clifford next the other; then the twochiefs next in rank, and beside them two of the officers of the ship:the first lieutenant, Mr. Hickman, sat at the foot of the table, withHackeeboocoo on his right, and Mádera on his left. They were all ingreat spirits, and ate and drank freely, and though they complained ofthe size of the glasses, and of the strength of the wine, tasted everything from punch to champagne: the briskness of the last indeedsurprised them not a little, and effectually muddled two of them forsome time. Cheese was the only thing they all objected to, probably onaccount of its being made of milk, which they never taste. Theinterpreter not being present, the conversation was carried on throughMr. Clifford and Mádera, and partly by signs. Whether intelligibly ornot, every body was talking. Mádera has dined often on board the ship, and is quite perfect in our customs. On this occasion he took greatcharge of the chiefs at his end of the table, speaking sometimes in onelanguage and sometimes in the other. Observing Jeema eating ham withoutmustard, he called to Captain Maxwell's servant, and pointing to Jeema, said, "Tom, take mustard to him. " When the desert was put on table, andthe wine decanters ranged in a line, they exclaimed in astonishment, "Moo eeyroo noo sackee, " six kinds or colours of wine; but thesweetmeats and prepared confectionary pleased them most. After sitting about an hour and a half after dinner, and drinking withtolerable spirit, they rose to depart; but this they were not allowed todo, and they were informed that it was the English custom to sit a muchlonger time. They represented that the sun had set, and they would neverbe able to find their way on shore, but would all be drowned inattempting it. This alarming difficulty was easily overruled by apromise of the barge, and they sat down again. While the discussion wasgoing on between Captain Maxwell and his guests, Mádera kept his seat, and looked about him in his keen observant way, to discover, if hecould, what was likely to be the issue of this adventure. Havingobserved that in general we were anxious to keep our company at table aslong as we could, he naturally enough thought that we would not let thisopportunity pass of entertaining the chiefs according to our fashion. Heappeared to have settled this question with himself just as the chiefsresumed their seats, for rising half off his chair, and with a mixtureof archness and simplicity, as if he had made an amusing discovery, cried out in English, "When all drunk then go ashore!" Though Mádera, aswill be seen, was not quite right in his guess, there was enough oftruth in his remark to raise a hearty laugh among those who understoodhim; and as he joined in this laugh at his own joke, it was some timebefore he could explain what he had said to the chiefs, who, being in amerry humour themselves, took it in perfect good part, though theirmirth was evidently dashed by a little apprehension of the fate whichMádera had anticipated for them. The health of his Royal Highness the Prince Regent was then given, allthe company standing in the most respectful manner. This was followed bythe health of the King of Loo-choo, which was drank with similarobservances. On sitting down after the latter toast, the chiefsconferred a few minutes across the table, and then all rose to proposeCaptain Maxwell's health; their wishes being explained by Mádera. Whenthey sat down, Captain Maxwell proposed the health of Ookooma and theother chiefs, but as we in return stood up to drink to them, theirmodesty disclaimed this part of the compliment, and they rose likewise;nor was it till a good deal of persuasion had been used, that theyconsented to be seated while we were standing. These four bumpers made the party very merry, and it now was intimatedto them, that as all the usual formalities had been observed, they mightdrink just as much as they liked, or pass the bottle altogether; apermission of which few of them took advantage. They lighted theirpipes, laughed, joked, and seemed so happy, that it was agreed on allhands, that conviviality is no where better understood than at Loo-choo. After a time, at our request, they played some games, of which we hadheard them speak. The object of these games was drinking; a cup of winebeing the invariable forfeit. That every thing might be in characterduring the games, some of their own little cups were put on table. Oneperson holds the stalk of his tobacco-pipe between the palms of hishands, so that the pipe rolls round as he moves his hands, which he isto hold over his head, so as not to see them. After turning it round fora short time, he suddenly stops, and the person to whom the bowl isdirected has to drink a cup of wine. Another is a Chinese game: oneperson holds his hand closed over his head, he then brings it quicklydown before him with one or more fingers extended; the person he isplaying with calls out the number of them, and if he guesses right, hehas to drink the cup of wine. These and other games caused a good dealof noisy mirth, and at length it was proposed by them to go out, inorder to look at the sailors who were dancing on deck. Before leavingthe cabin, they shewed us a Loo-choo dance round the table: Máderaplaced himself at the head before Ookooma, while the others rangedthemselves in a line behind him; he began by a song, the air of whichwas very pretty, and nearly at the same time commenced the dance, whichconsisted principally in throwing the body into a variety of postures, and twisting the hands about. Sometimes the hands were placed flattogether, at others separate, but generally the former; the movementsboth of the body and hands were regular and of a waving description. Thehead was made to incline slowly from side to side, so as almost totouch the shoulders; the feet were moved with a slight shuffling motion, with an occasional long sweeping step to one side and then back again;but the perfection of the dance appeared to be in the proper use of thehands and body. The words of the dance song were "Sasa sangcoomah, sangcoomee ah! sangcoomee ah! kadee yooshee daw;" when they came to thelast word they all joined in the chorus and clapped their hands. Although Mádera was the leader both in the dance and song, he wasoccasionally joined in the latter by several of the others, the wholeparty repeating the last word several times over. In this way they wentseveral times round the table. Mádera had a graceful carriage, and hisdancing, though fantastic, was really elegant; his singing too was ingood taste. The others danced clumsily, though in perfect good time, andjoined with some spirit in the chorus. The ship was illuminated, and the sailors were dancing on the upperdeck. The chiefs were much pleased with this scene, which was livelyenough. After watching the dance of the sailors for a few minutes, Mádera, who, to use a common phrase, "was up to every thing, " ran amongthe sailors, and seizing one of them by the shoulders, put him out ofthe dance, took his place, and kept up the reel with the same spirit, and exactly in the same style and step as the sailors. The other danceswere left off, and the whole ship's company assembling round Mádera, cheered and clapped him till the dance was done. The chiefs joined inthe applause, seeming no less surprised than ourselves at Mádera'sskill, for his imitation of the sailors' odd steps and gestures was asexact as if he had lived amongst seamen all his life. The officers thendanced a country dance, after which the chiefs, unasked, and with a sortof intuitive politeness, which rendered every thing they didappropriate, instantly stepped forward and danced several times roundthe quarter-deck, to the infinite gratification of the sailors. On returning to the cabin to tea, they were all in high spirits, andwhile amusing themselves with a sort of wrestling game, Ookooma, who hadseen us placing ourselves in the boxer's sparring attitudes, threwhimself suddenly into the boxer's position of defence, assuming at thesame time a fierceness of look which we had never before seen in any ofthem. The gentleman to whom he addressed himself, thinking that Ookoomawished to spar, prepared to indulge him; but Mádera's quick eye saw whatwas going on, and by a word or two made him instantly resume his wontedsedateness. We tried in vain to make Mádera explain what were themagical words which he had used to Ookooma. He appeared anxious to turnour thoughts from the subject, by saying, "Loo-choo man no fight;Loo-choo man write--no fight, no good, no, no. Ingerish very good, yes, yes, yes; Loo-choo man no fight. " Possibly he considered that Ookoomawas taking too great a liberty; or, perhaps, he thought even thesemblance of fighting unsuitable with the strict amity subsistingbetween us. Before they went away, Captain Maxwell, who had remarked thesatisfaction with which the chiefs received any attention shewn to theirchildren, ordered a large cake to be brought him, which he divided intoportions for the family of each. The chiefs were in a proper mood tofeel this kindness, and they expressed themselves, as may be supposed, very warmly upon the occasion. When they put off for the shore theybegan singing, and never left off till they landed. 20th of October. --The forenoon was passed at the Observatory, andafterwards we walked in the country without being observed, for thechiefs had not yet recovered from the effects of last night's gaiety:but we had not gone a mile before Jeeroo overtook us. We were veryanxious to gain the brow of a neighbouring hill, from which we imaginedthere would be a good view of the palace; but although Jeeroo was themost obliging creature in the world on every other occasion, he wasresolute now in not letting us go far beyond our usual limits; we triedto overrule his objections by telling him that we should do nomischief, and would not go farther than the adjoining height. He wouldlisten, however, to nothing; and as we still walked slowly on, he atlast sent off a messenger for assistance, but before this reinforcementarrived we had turned back, to Jeeroo's great relief. Although theobject proposed had not been accomplished, we got a better sight of thepalace than we had yet obtained. It is so much enclosed by trees thatparts only can be seen, but it is undoubtedly a very large building. Onreturning we met Hackeeboócoo, the fat chief, coming puffing and blowingup the hill; he had set out to overtake us on being told by Jeeroo'smessenger what we were proposing to do. He had drank a good deal of wineyesterday on board, and said he had been "weetee" (drunk), and that hishead ached very much. After he joined us we passed near a village, wherewe met two women at the turning of a road: they did not see us tillwithin a few yards, and their alarm was great; they threw down thebaskets, which they were carrying on their heads, and fled into thewood. Our two companions were very uneasy at this rencontre, and wouldnot listen to our reasoning upon the absurdity of their apprehensions, looking quite miserable till the subject, which seems to be aninterdicted one, was changed. We went afterwards to the high groundbehind the hospital, in order to fill up by eye the edges of the reefsin our charts, for which regular triangles could not be taken in thesurvey. While I was thus engaged, Mr. Clifford endeavoured to learn fromJeeroo whether or not the King lived in the large house spoken ofbefore; Jeeroo as usual denied any knowledge of the King, and could notbe prevailed upon to say what the house was, or who resided there; apeasant, however, who happened to be along with us was morecommunicative, and was giving all the information desired, when Jeeroo, observing what he was about, reprimanded him sharply. On coming downfrom the height we found all the chiefs seated in a long room erected onthe outside of the garden gate: they were very merry on the subject oflast night's adventure. 21st of October. --While Mrs. Loy was employed at the well to-day washingclothes, at a moment when every body else was out of the way, she wasvisited by a Loo-choo lady, accompanied by a numerous guard of men. Shedescribes her as being about eighteen years of age, well dressed, fairin complexion, with small dark eyes, and not without beauty; her hairwas of a glossy jet black, made up into a knot on one side of the head. She wore a girdle tied at the side, and had on sandals like the men. Mrs. Loy wished to touch her, but she shrunk back in alarm. Whetherthese details be quite correct or not, the circumstance of a lady ofrank having visited Mrs. Loy is so far interesting as it denotes aconsiderable degree of curiosity on the lady's part, together with thepower of gratifying it, which, in a country where the women are strictlysecluded, perhaps would not be allowed. 22d of October. --Ookooma and Jeeroo came to the Observatory to-day, together with a number of the most respectable of the natives; they weredesirous of seeing the reflected images of the sun in the artificialhorizon through the telescope of the sextant. As this was placed on astand there was no difficulty in satisfying their curiosity, for theyhad only to place their eye to the tube, the angle having beenpreviously arranged. Many of them were amused by the changes of colourin the reflected images by means of the different shades; others weremore struck with the apparent motion of the two suns, which is veryperceptible when a high magnifying power is used; a few endeavoured tounderstand the meaning of what they saw, but with the exception ofJeeroo, I think they had no conception of its cause. Jeeroo appeared tohave some notion of astronomy; his idea of eclipses was more accuratethan could have been expected. From him Mr. Clifford got the names ofthe days and months, and the various points of information respectingTime, which will be found in the Vocabulary. Whenever we were actuallytaking observations, the natives invariably remained at a considerabledistance. They had been told that the least motion disturbed the surfaceof the quicksilver, and prevented our taking observations. They had muchpatience, and sometimes sat quite still and silent for several hours, till invited to come forward to look at the instruments. When Ookoomaand Jeeroo came to us, we observed that they were in great distress, andupon our asking the cause, the former explained that Captain Maxwellduring his ride this morning had fallen down, or rather that his horse, which was too weak for his weight, had fallen with him, and that hisfinger was broken: "Tayin ma tawrittee, Tayin no eebee ootee" (theTayin's horse fell, Tayin's finger broke). A Loo-choo doctor, he said, had gone on board, who would soon cure it. On going to the Alceste we found that the Loo-choo surgeon had placedCaptain Maxwell's broken finger in a thick paste made of eggs, flour, and some other substance which he brought along with him. He thenwrapped the whole in the skin of a newly-killed fowl. This skin dried ina short time and held the paste firm, by which the broken finger waskept steady. The doctor went through a number of ceremonies, such asfeeling the pulse, looking at the tongue, and so on. He had a box alongwith him, containing upwards of a hundred medicines. Captain Maxwell mentioned, that while he was sitting in a shed after theaccident, he was surprised to see a person enter the door crawling onall fours, and half dead with terror. This it appeared was the surgeon, who had been sent for by the chiefs. He was horror-struck at theaccident, but soon recovered himself on observing Captain Maxwell'sperfect tranquillity. Captain Maxwell's gentleness and forbearance, and his uniform attentionto the wishes of the natives, and the great personal kindness which hehad shewn to so many of them, had very early won their confidence andesteem. As our intercourse became more intimate, these feelingsnaturally became stronger, and the concern which the natives felt uponthis occasion was very general, and was expressed, not only by Máderaand the chiefs, but by the lower orders, in a manner highly flatteringto Captain Maxwell. 23d of October. --A deputation of the chiefs went on board the Alcesteearly this morning to say, that the Prince of the island, who was thenext person in rank to the King, and heir to the throne, meant to comeon board the frigate this afternoon, as well for the purpose of payinga visit of ceremony, as of enquiring into the state of Captain Maxwell'shealth after the accident. At noon the four senior chiefs, dressed in their state robes andhatchee-matchees, came to announce the Prince's approach, and in abouthalf an hour afterwards he was brought in a closed sedan-chair to theboat, through a concourse of people, to whom he seemed as much a show asto us. The state boat was a large flat-bottomed barge, covered with anawning of dark blue, with white stars on it, the whole having much theappearance of a hearse. It was preceded by two boats bearing flags withan inscription upon them, having in the bow an officer of justicecarrying a lackered bamboo, and in the stern a man beating a gong. Avast number of boats were in attendance, some bearing presents, andothers following out of mere curiosity. One of the Chiefs came on boardwith the Prince's card, which was of red paper forty-eight inches long, and eleven wide[12], and shortly afterwards the Prince's barge put offfrom the shore; upon which the rigging of both ships was manned, and asalute of seven guns fired; when he came on board he was received with aguard, and under a like salute. Captain Maxwell, who had been confinedto the cabin ever since his accident, desired me to receive the Prince. No arrangement having been made with us respecting the ceremony ofreception, I merely took off my hat and bowed: but all the chiefs fellon their knees the instant he came on the quarter-deck. I took his handfrom one of the chiefs who had assisted him up the accommodation ladder, and led him to the cabin. When seated beside Captain Maxwell, the Prince made several anxiousenquiries about his finger, expressing much regret that so disagreeablean accident should have occurred at Loo-choo. He then called to hispipe-bearer, and having prepared a pipe, presented it to CaptainMaxwell, who returned him this compliment, by giving him one of his own. The usual questions as to our ages and families, and variouscomplimentary speeches, having passed, he said he had heard much of thewonders of the ship, and should like to see them himself: he rose uponthis and went to the globes, which he examined with great care. Hebegged to be shewn Ingeree, Loo-choo, Quantoong (China); Niphon (Japan);Manilla, and Pekin. The chiefs would not sit down in his presence, andnever spoke to him without kneeling. On his expressing a wish to look atthe different parts of the ship, he was conducted all round the decks. He observed every thing with attention, but without betraying any greatdegree of curiosity: he had heard of the boatswain's wife, and asked tosee her; the lady, in her best dress, was presented to him; he stood forabout half a minute looking at her with a sort of pleased surprise, andthen, as if suddenly recollecting that this was somewhat rude, he drewhis fan from his breast, and with an air of the utmost politeness, heldit towards her, and upon Mrs. Loy curtsying in acknowledgment, he sentit to her by Mádera. He asked to see the fire-engine worked, andappeared much gratified by seeing the water thrown to so great aheight. He had heard of the African negro, and begged that he might besent for. When the black man was brought before him he lookedexceedingly surprised, and probably was in doubt whether the colour wasnatural, as one of his people was sent to rub his face, as if todiscover whether it was painted or not. The natives, who had flocked onboard in crowds, fell on their knees whenever the Prince passed. [Illustration: THE PRINCE of LOO-CHOO. ] On returning to the cabin, the Prince was invited to a collationprepared for him in the foremost cabin: for a long time he refused tosit down, nor could we conjecture what his objection was; at length, however, he complied, while the chiefs, who are neither allowed to sitdown nor eat in his presence, retired to the after-cabin. He tastedevery thing which was offered him, but seemed afraid of the wines, having probably heard of the proceedings on the evening of the 19th. Inabout half an hour he rose and went to the after-cabin; the chiefs andthe people of his suite, to the number of fifteen, then sat down at thetable he had left, and made ample amends for the temperance andmoderation of his royal highness. As soon as they rejoined the party in the after-cabin, business wasentered upon by Captain Maxwell's returning thanks, in the name of theEnglish government, for the liberal way in which we had been suppliedwith every kind of refreshment, and for the other assistance which hadbeen given to us. The Prince replied, that the King of Loo-choo wasanxious to do every thing in his power for the King of England's ships. Upon this Captain Maxwell observed, that he was very desirous of seeinghis majesty, for the purpose of expressing in person his gratitude forthe kindness we had received in this country. The Prince answered, thatit was contrary to the laws and customs of Loo-choo, for any foreignerto see the king, unless sent by his own sovereign, and charged withcomplimentary presents. Coming from such high authority, this assurancewas conclusive, and as nothing further could now be said on the subject, the hope of opening a communication with this court, which had been soanxiously desired, seemed now destroyed. The Prince, however, unexpectedly resumed the subject, by saying that a letter would bewritten to the King of England, if Captain Maxwell would undertake todeliver it; his answer was, that nothing could give him moresatisfaction than being made the bearer of such a communication: that hehad earnestly desired the honour of paying his respects to his majesty, but from the moment that he had heard that it was contrary to thecustoms of the country, he had ceased to think of it. As soon as it wasinterpreted that Captain Maxwell was willing to carry the letter alludedto, and that he no longer urged his desire to see the King, the Princerose and pressed Captain Maxwell's hand and mine between his, while allthe chiefs fell on their knees in a circle round us, shewing by theexpression of their countenances, how great the anxiety had been fromwhich they were relieved by Captain Maxwell's ready acquiescence withtheir wishes: the Prince in particular, who had hitherto looked full ofanxiety, became all cheerfulness, and his manner assumed a totallydifferent character. The inference from this curious scene is, that the real object of thePrince's visit was to dissuade Captain Maxwell from urging his requestto be allowed an interview with the King; and we conjectured that thecircumstance of his accident was taken advantage of to pay a visit tothe Alceste, where they naturally thought that the remonstrances of aman of such high rank as the Heir Apparent to the throne, would carrymore weight than any which had yet been tried. When the Prince again alluded to the letter, it appeared that it was tobe written by the minister, and not by the King. This altered the casematerially, and Captain Maxwell most respectfully informed the Prince, that such a letter as he described could not be received, as it would bean indignity to our sovereign to offer his majesty a letter written byanother king's minister. The Prince at once seemed sensible of thepropriety of what Captain Maxwell had said, and calling the chiefs roundhim, entered into a long discussion with them: at the close of which, hedeclared himself incompetent to decide upon so important an occasion, but said that he would consult with the King, whose pleasure would becommunicated in a few days. Captain Maxwell expressed his willingness toabide by his majesty's decision as far as was consistent with therespect due to his own sovereign. The Prince seemed entirely satisfiedwith this answer, and said something to the chiefs, upon which theyagain fell on their knees before Captain Maxwell, notwithstanding allhis efforts to prevent them. Nothing more of any consequence passed. In the early part of the interview the present was brought in, or atleast such parts of it as were capable of being thus displayed. Thewhole consisted of two bullocks, three hogs, three goats, and a quantityof vegetables and fruit; besides fifteen webs of the cloth of theisland, thirty fans, and twelve pipes. The Prince said he had sent apresent to me, which I found to consist of half the above mentionedthings. He shortly afterwards rose to take leave. The rigging was mannedon his going away, and similar honours were paid him as were shewn whenhe came on board. The Prince of Loo-choo, whose name is Shang Pung Fwee, and title PochinTay Foo, belongs to the highest of the nine orders of chiefs on theislands, the distinction of which rank is a hatchee-matchee of a pinkground, with perpendicular rows of black, yellow, blue, white, and greenspots. He was clothed in a robe of light blue silk, lined with silk ashade lighter, over which he wore a girdle richly embossed with flowersof gold and different coloured silks: in other respects his dress waslike that of the chiefs. He is about fifty years old, his beard is fulland white, and his figure well proportioned. In manners he is genteeland sedate, but occasionally a little awkward, which his retired habitssufficiently account for. Towards the close of his visit, when hisreserve had in some degree worn off, we observed him smile for aninstant, now and then, with a shrewd expression in his eyes, as if hewas observing what was passing more narrowly than we at first suspected. It was thought, too, that in making inquiries about different things onboard, he shewed more discrimination than most of those who had precededhim; but on the whole, there was nothing very interesting in him besideshis rank. While he was looking over the books and other things in thecabin, a picture of his majesty King George the Third was shewn to him. As the interpreter was not present, we could not immediately explain whoit was intended to represent, till it occurred to us to join our handsand bow to it in the Loo-choo manner: the Prince instantly saw what wasmeant, and turning towards the picture, made a low and respectfulobeisance. His suite consisted of several chiefs whom we had not seen before, andsix or seven personal attendants, two of whom stood behind to fan himand light his pipe. It is curious that these men, who from their dressand manner were certainly servants, derived a sort of rank from beingabout the Prince's person; for when the chiefs sat down to table afterhe had left it, they all stood by as if expecting to be invited to sitdown also; but Mr. Clifford, to whom Captain Maxwell had given the partyin charge, having observed how particular they were with respect to thedistinctions of rank, did not think of asking them to be seated, tillJeema requested him to do so; still suspecting some mistake, he appliedto Mádera, who said it was perfectly correct, and they were accordinglyasked to sit down with the rest. We had never been able to obtain from the natives any clear account offormer visitors, and as the Prince was thought a likely person to be inpossession of the desired information, questions were asked him uponthis subject. He said that a vessel had been here about twenty yearsago, and that she went away immediately without holding anycommunication with the court. This must have been the schooner in whichCaptain Broughton visited Napakiang in July, 1797, after he had beenwrecked in his majesty's ship Providence, on the island of Typinsan[13]. He said that he knew of no other stranger who had visited Loo-choo. Onbeing interrogated as to the knowledge of other countries, he declaredthat they knew nothing of the English or French, or any nation indeedbut the Chinese, Corean, and Japanese. Something was said about Manilla, and from its not being very remote, it is possible that somecommunication may have existed between that place and Loo-choo. Theiraccounts, however, were vague and unsatisfactory, and it is notimpossible that we ourselves may have first suggested the name, andafterwards ascribed the use of it to them[14]. Nothing, however, that occurred to-day, attracted more notice thanMádera's assumption of his long concealed rank. He came for the firsttime dressed in the robes and hatchee-matchee of a chief, and not onlytook precedence of all our old friends, but during the discussion in thecabin with the Prince, maintained a decided superiority over them all. While all the rest were embarrassed in the Prince's presence, andcrouching on their knees every time they spoke, Mádera, though alwaysrespectful, was quite at his ease; and we could not help fancying thathe addressed the Prince as if accustomed to his society. It was no lessremarkable, that the Prince referred much oftener to him than to any ofthe rest, and listened to what he said with greater attention. WhetherMádera owed such distinction to his actual rank, which may have placedhim about the court, or to the ascendancy of his talents, or to theaccidental circumstance of his having had better opportunities ofknowing us than any other of the natives, we could never discover. Headmitted, when interrogated, that he had often seen the Prince before, while the other chiefs confessed their ignorance even of his person, before to-day. As soon as the Prince was placed in his chair and carried away, Máderacame on board, and entered with great good humour into all the jokeswhich were made upon his new character. He declined telling why he hadkept his rank so long out of sight, but it was sufficiently obvious thathis main object was to establish an intimacy with all the differentclasses on board the ships, and in this he completely succeeded; for hehad gradually advanced in his acquaintance, first with the sailors, thenthe midshipmen, next with the officers, and last of all with thecaptains. By this means he gained the confidence and good will of eachclass as he went along; and by rising in consequence every day, insteadof putting forward all his claims at once, acquired not only substantialimportance with us, but gained a much more intimate knowledge of ourcharacter and customs than he could have hoped to do in any other way. 24th of October. --Mr. Clifford went along with me to-day for the purposeof sketching the bridge, which, though not above three hundred yardsfrom the landing place, the chiefs have always objected to ourexamining. We took Jeeroo with us without telling him our object, whichhe no sooner discovered than he became quite alarmed, and sent off forMádera, who came to us immediately, and upon learning that nothingfurther was proposed than a mere examination of the bridge, he said thatwe might go on; having first made us promise solemnly not to go anyfurther. While Mádera was binding us down in this way, I expressed somelittle impatience at his doubting our simple declaration of nothing morebeing intended than what we avowed; but his duty I suppose wasimperative, and he would not leave us till the matter was arranged inhis own way. As soon as he was satisfied on this point he said somethingto Jeeroo and left us; but turning back again, he came up to Mr. Clifford, and whispered, "captain no sulky?" meaning, we supposed, toexpress his apprehension that I had been angry at the stipulations sopositively required by him. Mr. Clifford, having assured him that I wasnot sulky with him, detained him to ask him what it was he feared? whathe had seen in us to excite such dread of our going near the town? Hereplied, "Loochoo woman see Ingeree man, Loochoo woman cry!" He thenreturned; and Jeeroo, who remained in a boat close to the bridge while Iwas employed measuring it and drawing it stone by stone, was greatlyinterested by Mr. Clifford's account of the great age of our venerableSovereign, and the number of his family, which excited his astonishmentand admiration. He conversed freely while the subject was the King ofEngland, but the moment the slightest turn in the discourse was madetowards the King of Loo-choo he drew up, and became impenetrable. "Hedid not know, " he said, "how old he was, nor how many children he had;"in short he seemed scarcely to admit that he had ever heard any thingabout him. From Mádera, however, who had no concealments, we learnt afterwards thatthe King has only one wife, but has twelve concubines; he is an old man, and has seven children. It is curious that none of the chiefs willinform Captain Maxwell whether or not the Prince who visited the shipsyesterday has any children; it is hardly possible that they can beignorant of the fact; but either they are kept strangely in the dark asto what passes in the palace, or they carry their reserve on royaltopics to a singular length. From the bridge we went to the top of the hill above the well, whereJeeroo sung several songs. On the way up we stopped at one of the largehorse-shoe tombs mentioned before, which resembles in all respects thetombs of China. On this similarity being pointed out to Jeeroo, hebecame anxious to explain that it was a Loo-choo tomb, and notexclusively Chinese; meaning probably that Loo-choo persons werecontained in it. He informed us that these tombs did not contain asingle person only, or a single generation, but were used as cemeteriesfrom age to age. The bodies, according to his account, are put intocoffins, and allowed to lie untouched for seven years, by which time theflesh is entirely decayed; the bones are then collected, and being putinto cases are preserved by the families of the deceased with greatcare. 25th of October. --This being the anniversary of His Majesty's accessionto the throne, the ships were dressed in colours, and a royal salutefired. Upon the natives this produced a great effect; they had neverseen any other flags than the single ensigns hoisted on Sundays, andthis display of several hundred flags was well calculated to surpriseand delight them. They were informed some days before that there wouldbe some ceremonies in honour of our King, and great numbers of peoplehad assembled on the shore in consequence. This morning had also beenfixed upon for returning the Prince's visit; accordingly we left theAlceste at one o'clock, forming a procession of four boats, with flagsin each. Captain Maxwell took twelve of his officers and younggentlemen, and six accompanied me from the Lyra, all being dressed infull uniform. We entered the harbour, and landed at the same part of thecauseway as before, where the chiefs were in attendance, as on theoccasion of our visit on the 23d ult. The Prince advanced a few yards on the outside of the gate, and havingtaken Captain Maxwell's hand, conducted him to the temple, where aningenious device was adopted to preserve the etiquette, requiring thatnone of inferior rank shall sit down in the Prince's company. The templewas divided into three rooms by ranges of columns, which were deemed asufficient separation; and, at the same time, no person in the otherrooms could feel himself slighted by the exclusion, since the divisionby the pillars was merely nominal. The feast was sumptuous, consistingof twelve regular courses, besides tea and sackee. There were many newdishes, principally of meat, dressed in various ways in large bowls. Wesaw what seemed to be wheaten bread for the first time to-day. It beingnecessary to make some return for the presents brought on board by thePrince two days ago, Captain Maxwell now gave him several pieces ofscarlet and blue superfine cloth, and samples of every species ofcloths, from the finest damask to the coarsest sail canvas; also a setof cut crystal decanters and glasses, and three dozen of wine of tendifferent sorts, with several books, and a number of smaller articles. It was also stated to the Prince, that a cow and calf had been left onshore in order to be offered to the King as a small mark of our sense ofthe kindness which we had experienced. The Prince expressed muchsatisfaction at this gift, as the calf had become a great favourite withthe natives. My present consisted of half the quantity of wine given byCaptain Maxwell, a mirror taken from a dressing-stand, samples ofEnglish stationary, Cary's map of England, an atlas, and a small brasssextant; which latter present had been suggested by the wonder which ithad invariably excited at the observatory. Mr. John Maxwell, to whom thePrince had sent a present of cloth and pipes after he landed yesterday, gave him a spy-glass and a map of London; the map was coloured, andround the edges were the palaces, Greenwich Hospital, and other publicbuildings, all of which he examined with great attention. After he hadlooked over most of the things, and was satisfied with the explanations, he rose and said that a great deal too much had been given, to which itwas replied, that a great deal too little had been given, and that theywere not offered as being, in any respect, an equivalent for thesupplies sent on board, but merely to shew our sense of the kindnessand attention with which we had been received[15]. During the time thatwe sat at table to-day, the interpreter was hardly ever called in, asMádera and Mr. Clifford contrived between them to explain every thing, if not as clearly as could have been wished, yet in a more satisfactorymanner than could have been done through the medium of John theChinaman, of whose fidelity we were nowise certain, and whose taste anddelicacy in conveying our sentiments we had great reason to doubt. The Prince, after a time, rose and proposed the King of England'shealth, which was accordingly drank in a cup of sackee. In return wegave the King of Loo-choo. As the surgeon had desired Captain Maxwell todrink no wine, there was very little drank at the Prince's table; but atthe others every art was used to circulate the sackee pot. Indeed, little persuasion was required, for the sackee, though not strong, wasvery good. Ookooma presided at the table occupied by the officers, andJeero at that where the midshipmen sat. Ookooma having remarked on board, that whenever the King's health wasdrank, whether his Majesty of England, or of Loo-choo, the cups werealways freely emptied, took advantage of this loyalty of sentiment, andgave "The King of Injeree's health" three or four times over, to which, of course, the officers were obliged to reply, by giving "The King ofLoo-choo" as often. He carried this rather farther than is customarywith us on similar occasions, for observing that the company were ratherbackward in eating a bowl of sweet rice-meal porridge, he stood up withhis bowl in his hand, and calling out "King of Injeree health!"swallowed the whole of it, and invited the rest to follow his example. The Prince seemed to enjoy the mirth of the other tables very much; hewas himself more cheerful and disengaged than when we first saw him, though he appears to be naturally a silent man. Ookooma, by overactinghis part, got, we thought, a little tipsy, and came several times intothe state chamber, talking louder than was proper, but of this thePrince took no notice. When Ookooma came near my chair, I whispered tohim, "Ya weetee, " (you are drunk;) he turned round, and affecting to beangry, called out, "Weetee nang, " (I am not drunk) in a voice and mannerwhich were in direct contradiction to his assertion: his subsequentbehaviour, however, was so correct and sedate when the feast broke up, and all were again upon duty, that he was probably merely pretending tobe tipsy, in order to suit what was considered to be the humour of thecompany. On rising to depart, the Prince led Captain Maxwell by the hand, notonly through the gate, but about twenty yards along the causeway; herehe stopped and took leave. Captain Maxwell availed himself of thisopportunity to repeat, for the last time, his thanks in the name of hisgovernment, for the numerous attentions and marks of kindness which wehad received. He requested that what he had said might be communicatedto the King, and assured the Prince, in the most earnest and respectfulmanner, that all the circumstances of our reception and entertainmentshould be stated to our own government. The Prince bowed to this in amanner which seemed to express his satisfaction at what was promised. Captain Maxwell next observed, that besides the high public benefits ofwhich he had just been speaking, he felt individually greatly honouredand obliged by the particular attention which had been shewn to himself, and to the captain of the little ship, and hoped that the Prince wouldaccept from himself a small mark of his respect and gratitude. As soonas this was interpreted to the Prince, Captain Maxwell took from hisneck a small thermometer, set in silver, and presented it to the Prince, who leaned his head forward, and requested that it might be hung roundhis neck. This may be supposed a curious place to hang a thermometer, but we hadlearned during our intercourse with the chiefs, that some management ofthis kind was necessary whenever it was intended to offer them presents;for their extreme delicacy made them unwilling to accept any thing ofvalue, lest it might appear in the light of remuneration for theirhospitality. Whenever any thing merely ornamental, or of little value, was offered, and particularly if worn about the person, no objection wasmade to receiving it. It thus became the practice, as being the mostconvenient method, to tie the proposed gift by a ribbon round the neck;and after a time, every one had rings, seals, watch-keys, or bank tokenswith holes drilled in them, prepared for these occasions. Thethermometer which was given to the Prince had particularly attracted hisnotice when he was on board. After Captain Maxwell had given his present, the Prince turned to me, and I put over his neck a cornelian ornament, suspended by a ribbon, inthe same manner as the thermometer. He was greatly delighted with these compliments, and immediatelyresuming Captain Maxwell's hand, led him along the whole length of thecauseway to the boat, and then stepped upon the top of the parapet tosee us row away. As soon as we had put off, every one in the boats stood up and gavethree cheers; to which the Prince bowed several times, with his handsclosed and raised to his breast. He remained on the parapet, andcontinued waving his fan to us as we rowed down the harbour, as long aswe could see him. As the boats rowed in procession out of the harbour, all the chiefs ran along to the end of the causeway, where theycontinued, along with a vast crowd of natives, waving theirhandkerchiefs and fans till we were a great way from the shore. On eachside of this group of chiefs a gong was beat incessantly. On every side, the rocks, the trees, houses, and boats, in short, every spot wascrowded with people, waving their hands, and cheering us as we wentalong. This brilliant scene had less of novelty in it, to be sure, thanwhat we had witnessed at the same place on the twenty-third of lastmonth, but it was still more pleasing, for we had now become acquaintedwith many of the individuals forming this assemblage, and could feelassured that their expressions of kindness and respect were sincere. Onthe first occasion, too, the natives being ignorant of our intentions, were very generally alarmed at our appearance; and accordingly, thoughthere was much curiosity shewn, a profound silence and stillnessprevailed over the whole crowd, very different from the friendly shoutsand signs with which they greeted us as we passed among them to-day. Precautions had been taken to prevent the ladies from indulging theircuriosity as they had done on the first visit, not a female being seenany where. 26th of October. --Last night both the Alceste and Lyra were illuminated. At nine o'clock a _feu de joie_ was fired, and a number of fire-workslet off from the yard-arms. A great concourse of the natives, who hadbeen apprised of our intentions, assembled on the shore, and were veryhighly delighted with this brilliant exhibition. [Illustration: SCENE after the PRINCE of LOO CHOO'S FEAST. ] The sick, as well as the remaining stores belonging to the Alceste, wereremoved on board this morning, and every preparation made for sea. Whileemployed in completing the series of observations at the observatory, Mádera joined us, having in his hand the sextant which I had given tothe Prince yesterday. It seemed that he had been ordered to make himselfacquainted with the use of it; and a more hopeless enterprise could nothave been proposed to any man. But Mádera was not a man to be throwninto despair by difficulty; on the contrary, he persevered in observingwith this sextant, and the more the difficulty was made apparent, themore keenly he laboured to overcome it. The progress which he made in afew hours in the mere practical operation of taking angles and altitudeswas not surprising, because there is in fact not much difficulty in it;but he was nowise satisfied with this proficiency, and seemed anxious toapply his knowledge to some useful purpose. With a sextant on a stand, I made him take the distance between the sunand moon, four or five times; on every occasion he was wonderfully nearthe truth. We endeavoured to confine him to one object, merely toascertain the time of apparent noon; and I think we succeeded inexplaining to him how this was to be done. He expressed repeatedly hisregret at our approaching departure, in which sentiment he was joined byJeeroo and the rest of the chiefs, who were quite out of spirits. Jeeroo, poor fellow, had prepared a handsome dinner for us under a treenear the observatory. He made us drink what he called "wackaríttee, " orthe parting cup, several times over. We had a number of visitors at theobservatory, who saw the instruments packed up and sent off with looksof real regret. They all said they were sorry we were going away. Oneman gave Mr. Clifford, as a farewell gift, a curious drawing of theAlceste dressed in flags, and executed, he said, by his son. Thechildren, too, were all much affected by our preparations, and thewonted hilarity of the lower orders was quite gone. Having taken our final leave of the shore, we went to the Alceste, wherewe found the chiefs in conference with Captain Maxwell, who made each ofthe chiefs a present of a cut wine glass, which he knew they had longdesired to possess. To Ookooma he gave a finely cut tumbler, in a redmorocco case. This was much beyond his expectations, and perhaps hiswishes, for he appeared to observe the wine glasses of the others withsomewhat of a disappointed look. Captain Maxwell perceiving in a momentthat Ookooma had set his heart upon a wine glass, opened the case, andplaced one inside the tumbler, to Ookooma's great satisfaction; and soonafterwards the whole party went on shore, saying, before they left theship, that in the morning the Bodzes would come on board in order toperform some sacrifice. As they never came, it is probable that theinterpreter misunderstood them, particularly as Isaacha Sandoo said toMr. Clifford, "Acha hoonee nittee Doochoo mang hoonee oocooyoong. ""To-morrow the ships will go, and all the Loo-choo people will pray forthem, or wish them well;" which was probably what was meant when theinterpreter reported that the Bodzes were to come on board. While we were at dinner, Mádera came into the Alceste's cabin for thepurpose of asking some questions about the sextant. He had not beenaware of our being at dinner, and looked shocked at having intruded; andwhen invited to sit down, politely, but firmly declined. From the cabinhe went to the gun room, to see his friend Mr. Hoppner, the juniorlieutenant of the Alceste, with whom he had formed a great friendship. Mr. Hoppner gave him a picture of the Alceste and some other presents;upon which Mádera, who was much affected, said, "To-morrow ship go sea;I go my father house, two day distance: when I see my father, I show himyour present, and I tell him, me, Henry Hoppner all same (as) brother, "and burst into tears! Sunday, 27th of October. --At daybreak we unmoored, and the natives, onseeing us take up one of our anchors, thought we were going to get underweigh immediately, and give them the slip, which was not at allintended. This alarm, however, brought the chiefs off in a great hurry;not in a body in their usual formal way, but one by one, in separatecanoes. Old Jeema called on board the Lyra on his way to the frigate; hewas a good deal agitated, and the tears came into his eyes when I put aring on his finger. He gave me in return his knife. The other chiefs called alongside on their way to the frigate, but wenton when I told them that I was just going to the Alceste myself. In themean time Mádera came on board, with the sextant in his hand; he was insuch distress that he scarcely knew what he was about. In thisdistracted state he sat down to breakfast with us, during which hecontinued lighting his pipe and smoking as fast as he could; drinkingand eating whatever was placed before him. After he had a littlerecovered himself, he asked what books it would be necessary to read toenable him to make use of the sextant; I gave him a nautical almanack, and told him that he must understand that in the first instance: heopened it, and looking at the figures, held up his hands in despair, andwas at last forced to confess that it was a hopeless business. Hetherefore put the sextant up and bade us farewell. Before he left theLyra he gave Mr. Clifford his pipe, tobacco pouch, and a crystalornament; saying, as he held out the last, "You go Ingeree, you givethis to your childs. " Mr. Clifford gave him a few presents in return, and expressed hisanxiety to be considered his friend. Mádera, with the tears streamingdown his cheeks, placed his hand several times upon his heart, andcried, "Eedooshee, edooshee!" My friend, my friend! To me he gave a fan and a picture of an old man looking up at the sun, drawn, he said, by himself: he probably meant in his picture someallusion to my usual occupation at the observatory. After he had put offin his boat, he called out, "Ingeree noo choo sibittee yootoosha, " Ishall ever remember the English people. When he went to the Alceste, oneof the chiefs remarked that he had neither his hatchee-matchee on norhis robes, and told him that it was not respectful to wait upon CaptainMaxwell for the last time, in his ordinary dress; particularly as allthe others were in full array. Mádera, who, poor fellow, had been toomuch concerned about other matters to think of dress, was shocked atthis apparent want of politeness, and went immediately to apologize toCaptain Maxwell, who took him by the hand, and gave him a present, telling him, at the same time, that he was always too happy to see him, to notice what dress he had on. On going into the cabin, I found the chiefs seated in a row, all verydisconsolate, and apparently trying to conceal emotions different, inall probability, from any which they had ever before experienced. Captain Maxwell had made them his parting present, and I therefore gaveto each chief some trifle, receiving from them in return, their knives, pipes, pouches, and fans. In the mean time the anchor was hove up, andevery thing being ready for making sail, the chiefs rose to take leave. Ookooma wished to say something, but was too much affected to speak, andbefore they reached their boats they were all in tears. Mádera cried bitterly as he shook hands with his numerous friends, whowere loading him with presents. The chiefs, as well as the people in the numerous canoes which hadassembled round the ships, stood up, and continued waving their fans andhandkerchiefs till we were beyond the reefs, and could see them nolonger. * * * * * Almost every thing respecting the manners and customs of Loo-choo, withwhich we have had an opportunity of becoming acquainted, has been laidbefore the reader in the foregoing narrative. It is proposed to inserthere a few particulars which in the hurry of the moment were noted downwithout date. They might easily have been embodied with the narrative, but it has been considered of less consequence to sacrifice arrangement, than to interfere in any way with the integrity of the Journal, in whichnothing has been inserted out of the exact order in which it is known tohave happened. The religion of Loo-choo appears to be that of Fo, said to be introducedby the bodzes one thousand years ago[16]. We found great difficulty indiscovering any thing precise on this subject from the natives; but fromall that we could gather, religion does not appear to be made a matterof general instruction as in Europe, being left, as in China, to thepriests. This we infer from the careless way in which the subject was atall times treated by the natives, and the ignorance which theyprofessed of the forms and ceremonies used in the temples. The bodzesare not respected or esteemed in society; they are prevented frommarrying, and are not allowed to eat meat: few people associate withthem, and even the children turn them into ridicule. On the occasion ofthe Loo-choo funeral service over the grave of the seaman, the bodzesstood behind, and were not called upon to officiate, the service beingentirely performed by Jeeroo. In the large temple we saw three gilt idols and various pictures; butwith the exception of the funeral service just alluded to, we never metwith any thing in the least degree resembling a religious ceremony. Thebodzes kept the temple clean swept, and took care of the walks andhedges, and this appeared to be their only employment. It is fair tosuppose, however, that the occupation of the temple by us may havecaused a temporary cessation of their religious observances. They have large tombs or cemeteries for their dead, being mostly of theChinese form, viz. That of a horse-shoe. They are formed of stones andmortar, and are covered with a coat of cheenam, (shell lime), which isalways kept nicely whitewashed and clean swept: some are more highlyfinished than others; their size varies from twenty to thirty feet inlength, by twelve to fourteen broad. The coffin, when closed, is placedin the vault under the tomb, and is not touched for six or seven years, by which time the flesh is found to have separated and wasted away; thebones are then collected, and put into jars ranged in rows on the insideof the vault. Burning is never used at any stage of the proceedings, norunder any circumstances. In the course of time, when these vaults becomecrowded, the vases are removed to houses appropriated to their receptionabove ground: such must have been the building described by Mr. Cliffordin the village near Port Melville. The lower orders, who cannot affordthese expensive tombs, take advantage of hollow places in the rocks, which by a little assistance are made secure vaults. In the cliffsbehind the village of Oonting, the galleries cut for the reception ofthe vases must have been the work of men possessed of power andauthority. Not being fully aware what the Chinese customs are withrespect to the dead, in ordinary cases, it is impossible for us to sayhow nearly they resemble those of Loo-choo, but there are certainly somepoints of resemblance. From Mr. Clifford's notes on the Loo-choo inscriptions, I have extractedthe following particulars. "A number of carved stones, called by the natives Kawroo, were found atmany places, particularly in the groves on the hill. The Kawroo is twofeet long, by one wide, and one high; it is excavated a little on theupper part, on which an offering of rice is placed. On the sides of thisstone are carved a variety of characters, denoting the rank of theperson who makes the offering, as well as the object of his petition, together with the date. "Two of these inscriptions, copied at the time, have since beentranslated by a gentleman acquainted with the Chinese characters. Thefirst gives an account of a man about to sail for China, in the reign ofKien Lung, the late monarch of that country; this person implores thedivine aid in protecting him during his voyage. The other is dated inthe twenty-first year of the reign of Kia-King, the present emperor ofChina, answering to the year 1816, in which we visited Loo-choo. This isan invocation to the deity for success in a literary pursuit. "Two narrow strips of paper, with characters inscribed on them, which byconsent of the natives were taken from a pillar in the temple, and whichhave since been translated, prove to be invocations, one to the supremedeity, and the other to the evil spirit. The first is on a slip ofpaper, two feet long, by two inches wide, and contains a supplicationfor pardon. The latter invocation begins by seven rows of the charactersymbolical of the Devil. In the upper line there are seven, and in thelast one, so that a triangular page is formed of twenty-eightcharacters, each signifying the Devil; and the prayer itself is writtenin a narrow perpendicular line underneath; the whole inscriptionresembling in form a kite with a long tail attached to it. " Polygamy is not allowed in Loo-choo as in China, and the king, itappears, is the only person permitted by law to have concubines; theyinvariably spoke with horror of the Chinese practice, which allows aplurality of wives, and were much gratified on learning that the Englishcustoms in this respect were similar to those of Loo-choo. The women arenot treated so well as we were led to expect from the mildness ofcharacter in the men, and their liberality of thinking in general. Theupper classes of women are confined a good deal to their houses, and thelower orders perform much of the hard work of husbandry. We saw them ata distance, in great numbers, carrying loads on their heads. Mádera saysthat the women are not treated with much indulgence, being evenrestricted from using fans; and that when they are met out of doors bythe men, they take no notice of one another, whatever may be the degreeof relationship or intimacy subsisting between them. The perseverancewith which they kept the women from our sight is curious, and leads usto conjecture that the general practice of the island is to seclude thewomen at all times. In this respect they differ from the Japanese, whoare said to allow wives to every stranger. This degree of seclusiondoes not prevail in China, as we had opportunities of observing atseveral places never before visited by Europeans. The Chinese accountquoted in the Lettres Edifiantes et Curieuses, vol. 23, states that theyoung men and women marry on this island by choice, and not, as inChina, by a contract made without any personal knowledge of each other. We took every opportunity of interrogating them on this subject, but asthe question was always evaded, we fear that their practice in thisrespect is not so praiseworthy as that account would make it appear. Of their literature we could get but few satisfactory accounts; they saythat they have few books in their own language, the greater number onthe island being Chinese. The young men of rank are sometimes sent toChina to be educated. Jeeroo had been there when a boy. None but theupper classes understand the spoken Chinese, and the peasantry are ingeneral ignorant both of the spoken and written Chinese language. They appear to have no money, and from all we could see or hear, theyare even ignorant of its use. Those, however, who have visited Chinacannot be so ill informed, and yet none of them set any value uponSpanish dollars, or upon any gold coins that we had. Though we wereincessantly trying to make out from Mádera and the others, what theirmedium of exchange was, we could never learn any thing distinct upon thesubject, nor could they be made to comprehend our questions about money;a difficulty, it may be observed, which we should expect to meet withamong people whose only mode of purchase was by barter. The onlycircumstance which came to our knowledge bearing at all upon thisquestion, was during the time when the garden was under preparation forthe reception of the Alceste's stores; it was then remarked that each ofthe labourers employed had a little piece of paper stuck in his hair, with a single character written on it; this naturally excited ourcuriosity, but the inquiries we were enabled to make at that early stageof our knowledge of the language, led to nothing conclusive. Afterwards, when our means in this respect were more ample, we could not recall thecircumstance to the recollection of the chiefs. As these papers werecalled by the people wearing them, "hoonátee, " and as "hoónee" meansship, Mr. Clifford has conjectured that they may have been writtenpasses to enable them to enter the gate on the ship's business. We saw no arms of any kind, and the natives always declared that theyhad none. Their behaviour on seeing a musket fired certainly implied anignorance of fire-arms. In a cottage at the north end of the island, wesaw a spear which had the appearance of a warlike weapon, but we hadevery reason to believe that this was used for the sole purpose ofcatching fish, having seen others not very dissimilar actually employedin this way. They looked at our swords and cutlasses, and at the Malaycreeses and spears, with equal surprise, being apparently as littleacquainted with the one as with the other. The chiefs carried littlecase knives in the folds of their robes, or in the girdle, and the lowerorders had a larger knife, but these were always of some immediatepractical utility, and were not worn for defence nor as ornaments. Theydenied having any knowledge of war either by experience or by tradition. We never saw any punishment inflicted at Loo-choo: a tap with the fan, or an angry look, was the severest chastisement ever resorted to, as faras we could discover. In giving orders, the chiefs were mild thoughfirm, and the people always obeyed with cheerfulness. There seemed to begreat respect and confidence on the one hand, and much consideration andkind feeling on the other. In this particular, more than in any otherthat fell under our notice, Loo-choo differs from China, for in thelatter country we saw none of this generous and friendly understandingbetween the upper and lower classes. One day when we were drinking tea and smoking pipes with the chiefs, onthe top of the hill, a boy began to exhibit feats of tumbling before us;in a short time all eyes were turned towards him, and his modesty causedhim to desist. We offered him buttons and various things, but he wouldnot resume his tumbling: we then asked Jeema to interfere; he did so, and told the youngster to go on; but he kept his seat, and Jeema becameangry, or rather pretended to be so, yet the tumbler sat obstinatelystill. "Well, " said Jeema to us, "what is to be done? It was for his ownamusement that he began, and probably for his amusement he will do soagain. " The boy, when left alone, in a short time resumed his tumbling. I mention this to shew Jeema's good sense in not forcing the boy to dothat as a task, which he had begun as an amusement, and which he haddiscernment enough to know would be unpleasant for us to witness in anyother way. By this treatment of their children, mutual cordiality andfreedom of intercourse are encouraged. It was probably owing to thismode of education that the children became at once familiar with us. Oneday while I was employed sketching the village and trees near thebridge, a boy stopped near me, and without saying any thing, endeavouredto attract my notice by performing various gambols before me. I took nonotice of him for some time, but at last looked up and smiled; uponwhich the boy cried out in perfectly good English, "How do you do? Verywell, I thank you;" and ran off, quite delighted at having displayed hisproficiency in English. The chiefs were generally accompanied by one or two of their sons, whotook their places near them, and were always put forward when there wasany thing curious to be seen. In this way they were encouraged to makethemselves acquainted with every thing, and yet nothing could be morerespectful or affectionate than they always were. Great pains were takento form the manners of the children, and we never observed an instanceof rudeness in any one of them, though they were as full of life andspirits as the wildest English school-boys. John the Chinaman affordedthem much amusement: he was a great coxcomb, and therefore fair game forthe boys; they used to surround him and pretend to pull his long tail;but they never actually pulled it, but merely teazed him a little, andthen ran away. These little traits seem worthy of notice, as they belongto a style of education quite different from what we had seen in Chinaand some other eastern countries, where the children are made to looklike men in miniature. During our intercourse with these people, there did not occur oneinstance of theft. They were all permitted to come on boardindiscriminately; to go into the cabins, store-rooms, and wherever theyliked, unattended. At the temple the Alceste's stores of every kind werelying about, as well as the carpenter's and armourer's tools; and in theobservatory, the instruments, books, and pencils were merely placedunder cover; yet there was not a single article taken away, though manyhundreds of people were daily admitted, and allowed to examine whateverthey pleased. This degree of honesty is a feature which distinguishesthe people of Loo-choo from the Chinese, as well as from the inhabitantsof the islands in the South Sea and of the Malay Archipelago; among whomeven fear, as was ascertained by Captain Cook and other voyagers, isaltogether insufficient to prevent theft. At Loo-choo the people areconsiderably civilised; but they have few wants, and they appear to beperfectly contented. Honesty is perhaps the natural consequence of sucha state of society. We saw no musical instruments of any kind; they were, however, aware oftheir use. The natives almost all sing, and we heard several very sweetairs, principally plaintive: they had many jovial drinking songs, one ofwhich we wrote down from their singing; it was inscribed on a drinkingcup, and is as follows: "Ty´wack koo, tawshoo, shee kackoofing, "Chaw ung, itchee shaw, shooha neebooroo; "Ting shee, you byee, chee taroo shoo ninnee "Nooboo cadsee meesee carra shaw jeeroo "Shing coodee sackee oochee noo shing. " The Chinese characters on the drinking-cup were thus translated inChina, "Tywack hoo[17], inspired by a jar of wine, writes an hundredpages of odes or verses without end. At the market town of Chaw-ung[18]he entered a wine shop to sleep. The Emperor summoned him to appear; inhis haste to obey the summons, he forgot to put on his neckcloth, andrushing into the royal presence, exclaimed, 'I am the wine-lovingimmortal. '" The Loo-choo dress has been so frequently mentioned, that a briefnotice, in recapitulation, will suffice in this place. Their loose robewas generally made of cotton, and of a great variety of colours. Therobe of a grown up person was never flowered or printed over withfigures, being generally of a uniform colour, though instances occurredof striped cloths being worn by the chiefs. This robe opened in front, but the edges overlapped, and were concealed by the folds, so as torender it difficult to say whether or not the robe was continued allround: the sleeves were about three feet wide: round the middle wasbound a belt or girdle about four or five inches wide, always of adifferent colour from the dress, and in general richly ornamented withwrought silk and gold flowers. The folds of the robe overhang the belt, but not so much as to hide it: the whole of the dress folds easily, andhas a graceful and picturesque appearance. The garments worn by thechildren were often gaudily printed with flowers. In rainy or coldweather, a sort of great coat was worn by the chiefs only, of thick bluecloth, buttoning in front over the robe, and tighter both in body andsleeves than the other. This cloth resembled the coarse cloth used inChina; and it looked like woollen manufacture, and may possibly havebeen originally brought from England. The sandals worn by all ranks wereexactly the same; they were formed of straw wrought into a firm mat tofit the sole of the foot, smooth towards the foot, and raggedunderneath: a stiff smooth band of straw, about as thick as one's littlefinger, passes from that part of the sandal immediately under the ancleand over the lower part of the instep, so as to join the sandal at theopposite side; this is connected with the foremost part of the sandal bya short small straw cord which comes between the great toe and thenext one. The upper classes wore stockings of white cotton, not unlikeour half stockings, except that they button at the outside, and have aplace like the finger of a glove for the great toe. [Illustration: GENTLEMAN of LOO CHOO in his CLOAK. ] Their hair is of a jet black, and is kept glossy by juice expressedfrom a leaf. There is no variety in the fashion of dressing it; it ispulled tight up all round, and is formed at top into a compact knot, soas to conceal the crown of the head, which is shaved; through the knotare thrust two metal pins, one of which has a square point and floweredhead consisting of six leaves or divisions: the other pin has one endsharp, and the other shaped like a scoop: the length of these pins isfrom four to six inches. We did not see the Prince's, as he remainedcovered during all the time of his visit; but the Chief of high rank, who visited the Alceste on the 23d of September, had the flowered end ofone pin studded with precious stones. The higher orders wear, on stateoccasions, what they called a "hatchee-matchee, " which is a kind ofturban, apparently made by winding a broad band round a cylinder, insuch a way, that a small segment of each fold is shewn at every turn, infront above, and behind below; this is effected by giving a slightdiagonal direction to each fold. The lower orders occasionally tie acoloured cloth or handkerchief round the head; this they call "sadjee:"next the body they wear a thin cotton dress. The men wear no ornamentsthrough their flesh, nor are they tattooed: we saw, indeed, somefishermen who had fish spears marked on their arms, but this does notprevail generally. An etching of these marks is given by Mr. Clifford inthe second part of the Vocabulary. The cattle on this island, which are of a small black breed, are usedexclusively for agricultural purposes. Hogs, goats, and poultry, withrice and a great variety of vegetables, form the food of theinhabitants: milk is never used. We saw no geese, so that those left byCaptain Broughton most probably did not thrive. They have no sheep norasses. Their horses are of a small slight make, and the natives are veryfond of riding. We saw no carts or wheeled carriages of any kind, horsesbeing used to carry loads; for this purpose the roads are numerous, andkept in excellent order, being from six to ten feet wide. Their mode of dressing the ground is neat, and resembles the Chinese, particularly in manuring and irrigating it. This is most attended towhere the sugar-cane is cultivated: they have, besides, tobacco, wheat, rice, Indian corn, millet, sweet potatoes, brinjals, and many othervegetables. The fields, which are nicely squared, have convenient walkson the raised banks running round each. Along the sides of the hills, and round the villages, the bamboo and rattan grow to a considerablesize. The pine is the most conspicuous tree on the island, growing to agreat height and size, which we infer from seeing canoes built withplanks several feet wide; the trees, however, near the temple atNapakiang were not above ninety feet high, and from three to four ingirt. The banyan-tree of India was seen at several places; the finestone overhung the small temple at Napakiang, which circumstance led tothe enquiry whether, as in India, this tree is held sacred, but we couldgain no information on this subject. In a little plot of ground in the temple garden, Mr. Phillips, purser ofthe Alceste, sowed mustard-seed, peas, and a variety of other seeds, thenatives taking his directions for their culture. Our total ignorance ofbotany prevented our making any observations on this subject while atLoo-choo; but to supply this deficiency, we collected specimens of everyplant at the place. These were preserved between sheets of brown paper, and given afterwards to Mr. Abel, the naturalist of the embassy, inorder to be arranged; but they were subsequently lost, along with thewhole of that gentleman's collection. Of their manufactures it is difficult to speak with certainty. By theirown account the silks which they wear are Chinese, but the cotton clothsare made on this and the neighbouring islands; the printed patterns ofthese are not without elegance. We saw no weaving looms, but as we wereonly in a few houses, this is not surprising: the webs are thirty-sixfeet long, and fourteen inches broad. Tobacco-pipes and fans are made atLoo-choo; as well as the sepulchral vases, of which there is amanufactory at Napakiang, from whence they are exported to Oonting, andother parts of the island. Some of the pouches of the chiefs were madeof cloth, which they say comes from China; it is exactly like our broadcloth. We tried in vain to learn what goods they send to China inexchange for silks: perhaps sulphur forms a part, which these islandsare said to produce, as well as tin. From the number of vesselsconstantly sailing out and in, it appears that they must have sometrade, but our enquiries on this and many other topics, thoughsedulously pursued, led to nothing satisfactory, owing probably ratherto our ignorance of the language, than to any wish on their part towithhold information; because, on topics which had no reference to theroyal family or the women, they in general spoke freely. We had frequent opportunities of seeing their method of making salt, andan account of it may, perhaps, be interesting. Near the sea, large levelfields are rolled or beat so as to have a hard surface. Over this isstrewn a sort of sandy black earth, forming a coat about a quarter of aninch thick. Rakes and other implements are used to make it of a uniformthickness, but it is not pressed down. During the heat of the day, menare employed to bring water in tubs from the sea, which is sprinkledover these fields by means of a short scoop. The heat of the sun, in ashort time, evaporates the water, and the salt is left in the sand, which is scraped up and put into raised receivers of masonry about sixfeet by four, and five deep. When the receiver is full of the sand, seawater is poured on the top, and this, in its way down, carries with itthe salt left by evaporation. When it runs out below at a small hole, itis a very strong brine; this is reduced to salt by being boiled invessels about three feet wide and one deep. The cakes resulting fromthis operation are an inch and a half in thickness. Of the population of this island we know nothing satisfactory: thenatives invariably pleaded ignorance themselves; and as we had noprecise data, our estimates were made at random, and as they neveragreed with each other, they are not worthy of notice. From the southpoint of this island, to five or six miles north of Napakiang, an extentof sixteen or eighteen miles, the country is highly cultivated, and isalmost entirely covered with villages. All round Port Melville too thereare populous villages, but the north, north-east and eastern places arethinly peopled, and not cultivated to any extent. We saw nothing likepoverty or distress of any kind: every person that we met seemedcontented and happy. We saw no deformed people, nor any who boreindications of disease, except a few who were marked with the small-pox. The style of living of those with whom we associated is generous andfree; their custom of carrying about their dinner in boxes, and makinglittle pic-nic parties, is peculiarly striking, and they appeared fullysensible of the advantage of bringing people together in this way, andexpressed much satisfaction at the ready way in which we fell into acustom from which all formality was dismissed. They shewed, moreover, agood deal of discernment, and could adapt themselves to the character ofthe particular persons they happened to be in company with, in a mannervery remarkable; but this was evidently the result not of cunning, butof correct feelings, and of a polite habit of thinking. Of their manners, little need be added here to what every page of thenarrative will show. It ought to be particularly noticed, however, thatthey are an exceedingly timorous people, and naturally suspicious offoreigners. A stranger visiting Loo-choo ought therefore to keep thesefeatures of their character constantly in mind. By imitating CaptainMaxwell's wise plan of treating the natives with gentleness andkindness, and shewing every consideration for their peculiarities, hewill stand the best chance of gaining their good-will and confidence. But if he should betray any impatience, or be at all harsh in treatingwith them, he may rest assured that he will lose much time, and in allprobability fail at last in his attempts to establish an unreserved andfriendly intercourse. As Loo-choo, however, lies quite out of the track of trading ships, anddoes not appear to produce any thing of value itself, and as theinhabitants seem indifferent about foreign commodities, and if theywished to possess them are without money to make purchases, it is notprobable that this island will be soon revisited. [Illustration: BRIDGE AT NAPAKIANG. ] FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 11: We first discovered the meaning of this word by hearingone of the natives apply it to the castle on the chess board: he usedthe same term when drawings of towers and castles were shewn to him. ] [Footnote 12: The literal translation of the card is "Loo-choo nation, extender of laws, Great Person (called Ko), Heang, bows his head andworships, " (the common visiting expression among the Chinese. ) It oughtto be remarked, that the Prince's name is placed on one corner of thecard, which is the most respectful mode that can be used, according toChinese usage. ] [Footnote 13: See Broughton's Voyage, Book II. Chap. 2. For a veryinteresting account of the natives of Typinsan, who appear to resemblethe people of the Great Loo-choo Island. In Book II. Chap. 3. CaptainBroughton gives an account of his visit to Napachan. He was received bythe inhabitants with great kindness; they supplied his wants, butobjected to his landing, and sent back to the schooner some of theofficers who had been sent on shore to examine the town. We foundCaptain Broughton's account of the people quite accurate. ] [Footnote 14: At Manilla we found that the Great Loo-choo Island wasknown only by name. There appeared to be no intercourse between the twoplaces. ] [Footnote 15: LIST OF SUPPLIES RECEIVED AT LOO-CHOO BY H. M. SHIPS. |Alceste. | Lyra. | Bullocks | 19 | 8 | Pigs | 23 | 10 | Goats | 15 | 7 | Fowls | *216 | 102 |*Not including Fish | 29 | 12 |extra supplies Eggs | 920 | 455 |to the officers. Bags of sweet potatoes | *59 | 27 |*Not including Squashes | 34 | 14 |ditto. Jars of Samchoo, each containing about | | | fifteen gallons | 6 | 3 | Baskets of oranges | 9 | 4 | Bundles of gingerbread | 8 | 3 | -----------Onions | 16 | 8 | -----------Radishes | 30 | 12 | -----------Celery | 12 | 5 | -----------Garlick | 8 | 4 | -----------Candles | 7 | 3 | -----------Wood | 16 | 8 | Pumpkins | 60 | 30 | Baskets of vermicelli | 7 | 3 | Boxes of sugar | 2 | 1 | Rolls of printed linen | 14 | 7 | Bundles of paper | 6 | 3 |] [Footnote 16: See Lettres Edifiantes et Curieuses, vol. 23. ] [Footnote 17: A man celebrated in the Tung dynasty for his convivialdisposition: he is known in China by the name of Jai-pe. ] [Footnote 18: The town of Chang-ngan in China, near the Great Wall. ] APPENDIX: CONTAINING CHARTS OF THE GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, THE WEST COAST OF COREA, THE GREAT LOO-CHOOISLAND, NAPAKIANG ROADS, AND PORT MELVILLE: WITH BRIEF EXPLANATORYNOTICES. TABLE OF OBSERVATIONS MADE WITH DR. WOLLASTON'S DIP SECTOR: WITH AN ENGRAVING, AND ADESCRIPTION OF THIS INSTRUMENT, AND DIRECTIONS FOR ITS USE. METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL, FROM JULY TO NOVEMBER 1816, WHILE THE SHIPS WERE IN THE YELLOW AND JAPANSEAS. ABSTRACT OF THE LYRA'S VOYAGE, FROM LEAVING ENGLAND TILL HER RETURN; SHEWING THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THEDIFFERENT PLACES AT WHICH SHE TOUCHED, AND THE TIME TAKEN IN PERFORMINGEACH PASSAGE. GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM; BEING A DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIMENS OF ROCKS COLLECTED ON THE SHORES OFTHE YELLOW SEA, COREA, LOO-CHOO, MACAO, AND THE LADRONE ISLANDS. CHARTS OF THE GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, THE WEST COAST OF COREA, THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND, NAPAKIANG ROADS, AND PORT MELVILLE. WITH BRIEF EXPLANATORY NOTICES. [Illustration: Track of His Majesty's Sloop LYRA _and Honble. Comps. Ship INVESTIGATOR_ _along the Shores of the_ GULPH OF PETCHELEE ByCaptain Basil Hall R. N. 1816. _East of Greenwich_] NOTICE EXPLANATORY OF A CHART OF THE SOUTH SIDE OF THE GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, YELLOW SEA. [Sidenote: First meridian used in constructing the chart. ] In constructing this chart, I have assumed the longitude of the fort atthe mouth of the Pei-ho to be 117º 49' east of Greenwich, or 11' west ofthe place where the squadron lay at anchor. From this the difference oflongitude was measured by two chronometers. The latitudes wereascertained by frequent observations of the stars, as well as of thesun. [Sidenote: Aspect of the south and south-west coasts. ] [Sidenote: Soundings. ] The coast on the south and south-west sides of this Gulf is very low, resembling, in this respect, the shore at the entrance of the Pei-ho, orPekin river, where it is uniformly low and sandy; occasionally a fewhouses are to be seen, and also square mounds or buildings like forts, but generally, a low white beach is all that can be discovered. Thecoast is not visible till within about three leagues distance, and theeye elevated eighty feet from the sea, which is the height of the Lyra'sforetop-gallant yard. The depth of water when the land first came insight, was generally five fathoms; at some places only four fathoms, andat the very bottom of the Gulf, it could not be discerned till in threeand a half fathoms. It may be said generally, that at ten miles distancethe soundings are from four and a half to six fathoms; at twelve miles, from six to eight fathoms. There is a wonderful uniformity in the depthfrom the Pei-ho round to the south-east corner of the Gulf; the bottomis mud, sometimes a little gritty, particularly towards the southernparts. [Sidenote: Colour of the water. ] The colour of the water was mostly of the same dirty yellow or greenwhich was observed off the Pei-ho, but we did not observe any redcoloured water, as was frequently noticed at that place; at the bottomof the Gulf, indeed, there were several changes in the colour of thewater, accompanied by long lines of foam, indicating, it would seem, the vicinity of a great river. [Sidenote: Tides on the western side of the Gulf. ] On the west side of the Gulf the ebb tide runs to the south-east bysouth, and the flood north-west by west; the periods are very regular, being generally about six hours: they vary, however, in rapidity. As weanchored on the flood we were enabled to measure its velocity; as we gotdeep in the Gulf it decreased: at the Pei-ho it frequently ran two andtwo and a half knots, but far south it was sometimes hardly perceptible;it is worthy of notice, too, that the perpendicular rise and falldecreased from ten feet off the Pei-ho, to one, or at most two feet, inthe bottom of the Gulf. [Sidenote: Bottom of the Gulf. ] The most southern point of our track was 37º 15' north; at this time wecould perceive the low coast stretching to the east and west; thedistance it is difficult to assign very accurately, but it was probablyseven or eight miles, for with a glass we could perceive a number ofpeople on the shore. I took great pains to ascertain the latitude statedabove, by the meridian altitudes of several stars; the longitude is 1º39' east of the Pei-ho, or 119º 28' east of Greenwich. [Sidenote: South-eastern side different from the opposite. ] The coast from the south-west corner of the Gulf to the peninsula ofTeu-choo-foo, is of a totally different character from that opposite toit, for it is high, and well marked: a range of mountains stretches fromsouth-west to north-east, at the distance of three or four leaguesinland; their outline is peaked, and they are intersected by deepravines without any verdure; the summits are also barren. [Sidenote: Mount Ellis. ] One of these mountains is very remarkable, having two peaks or paps bywhich it can be distinguished at the distance of fifty miles, and bearsthe same aspect when viewed from all parts of the Gulf. It lies in 37º6' north, and 2º 11' east of the Pei-ho, or 120º east of Greenwich. Ithas been called Mount Ellis, in honour of Mr. Ellis, the thirdcommissioner of the Embassy. [Sidenote: Aspect of the coast. ] [Sidenote: Jane's Isle. ] [Sidenote: Douglas Island. ] Between this range of hills and the shore, there is a lower belt ofelevated ground in a state of high cultivation, covered with many townsand villages, and interspersed with scattered trees and severalextensive woods; the ground, too, presents a varied surface, so that thewhole offers a pleasing contrast with the rugged land behind. There aretwo small islands on this line of coast; the southern one lies in 37º21' north, and 2º 5' east of the Pei-ho; the other is in 37º 28' north, and 2º 19' east of the Pei-ho. [Sidenote: Dangerous shoal. ] There is a dangerous shoal about five leagues off the shore, abreast ofthese islands, upon which the Lyra nearly struck at midnight on the17th instant. When at anchor just outside the shoal, the south islandbore south 20º east, and the other, east 21º south; on the shoal therewas two and a half fathoms, hard bottom. It seems to extend in a northand south direction, and is very narrow. It lies in 37º 32' north, whichI ascertained by altitudes of the pole star, under favourablecircumstances. It is 1º 58' 30" east of the Pei-ho. [Sidenote: Soundings and tides. ] The soundings on this side of the Gulf are somewhat deeper than on theother, but not so deep as might have been expected from the bold natureof the land. The ebb tide runs to the north-eastward, and the flood intothe Gulf. [Sidenote: Winds. ] [Sidenote: Melville Point. ] [Sidenote: Teu-choo-foo city. ] The wind was south-east and quite light, from the 11th August to the17th, when it shifted to north north-east till about eight P. M. Whenclose in shore near the southern of the two islands; it then blew off, with all the appearance of a regular land breeze. On the 19th it blew agale of wind from the north-east, with a short, high sea; during thegale we lay at anchor off a remarkable point, connected with the mainland by a low sandy neck; the ground felt soft to the lead, but it wasprobably rocky under the mud, as both ships lost a bower anchor by thecables being cut. This point lies in 37º 42' north, and 2º 35' east ofthe Pei-ho. We found the city of Teu-choo-foo to lie in 3º 4' east ofthe Pei-ho. The latitude observed in Teu-choo-foo roads was 37º 53'north, and the longitude 2º 54' east of the Pei-ho. The western MeadowIsland bearing north. [Sidenote: Cheatow Bay. ] The latitude of a small island at the north-east corner of the Bay ofCheatow or Zee-a-tow, was determined by the sun's meridian altitude onshore, to be 37º 35' 52" north, and longitude east of the Pei-ho 3º45', or in 121º 34' east of Greenwich. [Sidenote: Oei-hai-oei. ] The latitude of Oei-hai-oei was observed on shore to be 37º 30' 40"north, and lies 4º 25' east of the Pei-ho. [Sidenote: Variation of the compass. ] The variation of the compass in the Yellow Sea was found to be 2º 16'westerly. The rise and fall of the tide at the anchorage of the squadron off thePei-ho was twelve feet. It was high water at full, and change at III. The flood tide runs to the west-south-west, and the ebb generally abouteast and east-south-east. Its strength and direction are a good dealinfluenced by the prevalent winds. NOTICE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART OF THE WEST COAST OF COREA. [Sidenote: Inadequate time allowed for so extensive a survey. ] This chart extends from 34º to 38º north latitude, and from 124º to 127ºeast longitude. The time of our stay on the coast being only nine days, no great accuracy is to be expected, and this chart pretends to belittle more than an eye-draught, checked by chronometers and meridianaltitudes of the sun and stars. Under circumstances of such haste, muchhas unavoidably been left untouched, and what is now given is presentedwith no great confidence. [Sidenote: General remarks on the methods followed in the survey. ] What follows is extracted from notes made at the time by Mr. Cliffordand myself. The longitudes by chronometer have all been carefullyrecomputed, and the greatest care was taken in ascertaining the variouslatitudes. The true bearings are in every instance set down, thevariation being allowed for at the moment. The variation of the compassrecorded in this notice, was determined by two azimuth compasses, andthe method recommended by Captain Flinders, of repeating theobservations by turning the compass first one way and then the other, was invariably followed. [Illustration: Track _of His Majesty's Ship_ ALCESTE _and_ LYRA _Sloopalong the Western Coast of the PENINSULA of_ COREA by _Captain Basil Hall R. N. _] [Sidenote: The ships leave China. ] [Sidenote: Make the coast of Corea. ] [Sidenote: Sir James Hall's group. ] [Sidenote: Anchorage on the south side of an island. ] His Majesty's ships Alceste and Lyra, after quitting the port ofOei-hai-oei, which is in latitude 37º 30' 40" north, and longitude 122º16' east, on the north coast of Shantung Promontory, stood to thenorthward and eastward till in latitude 38º north, and then ran to theeastward. On the morning of the 1st of September, 1816, we saw the land, bearing about east. By sights with chronometer on the meridian of theseislands, we ascertained that the west end of the northern one lies in124º 44-1/2' east. The latitude of the south end of the eastern islandwas ascertained by meridian altitude of the sun to be 37º 44-1/2' north. There is a rocky white islet off the west end of the middle island. Wehad from twenty to thirty fathoms on rounding the south-west end of theislands, but on the south side of the southern one there is a bight withseven fathoms, black sand in the centre: here we anchored. There is goodanchorage all over the bay, which is sheltered from all winds exceptbetween west south-west and south-east, being open to the southward. There are two villages here. From the top of the highest peak on thisisland, which is about seven or eight hundred feet high, we coulddiscern the main land of Corea, high and rugged, stretching northnorth-west and south south-east, distant from eight to ten leagues. Along the coast abreast of us there were seen many islands. The channelbetween the middle island of the group and the one we were upon appearedclear and broad; but the northern and middle islands seemed connected bya reef which shews above water at several places. [Sidenote: Character of the inhabitants. ] The inhabitants were suspicious and unfriendly: we saw some cattle andmany fowls, but neither money nor any thing else that we had couldinduce them to part with either. [Sidenote: Lose sight of the coast. ] In the evening we weighed and stood to the southward; next morning therewas no land in sight. At noon we were in longitude 124º 47' 52" east, and latitude 36º 44-1/2' north, no land in sight. We hauled in shore tothe eastward, and anchored in the night in deep water. [Sidenote: Group of five islands. ] [Sidenote: Bearings. ] 3rd of September. --Weighed at 3. 30 and stood in shore; at 7. 45 A. M. Wewere due south of the western of a group of islands. Many sights weretaken as we passed to settle the place of this group: it lies between125º 42-1/2' east, and 125º 57-1/2' east, and in latitude 36º 44' north. After passing this group we stood to the south-east towards a vastcluster of islands: at noon, when we were just entering the cluster, thelatitude was observed 36º 18' 21" north, and longitude 126º 10' east. The south-west extreme of the islands bore south 40º west. There wereeight islands near us between south-east and south-west, and a highbluff dark rock south one-quarter east, four miles: and on the main landa very high hill, east 19º north. When we had got well among the islandsit fell calm, and we anchored in eight and a half fathoms. It remainedcalm during the night. [Sidenote: Run among the islands. ] 4th of September. --Weighed on a breeze springing up, and stood in shore. Observed in 36º 13' north, longitude 126º 30' east; at this time thefollowing bearings were taken. [Sidenote: Bearings. ] A remarkable peak on the main land, east. High mountain on the main land, east 38-1/2º north. White cliff on the east end of the fourth island to the left of the wideentrance into the cluster, north. Small round island, north 30º west. Another, north 35º west. Extremes of a large bluff island from north 38º west, to north 32-1/2ºwest. Rock, north 72º west. Outer island, north 75º west. Extremes of the outer cluster, from north 77-1/2 west, to west 1º south. Large island, from west 14º 30' south, to west 18º south. [Sidenote: Basil's Bay. ] [Sidenote: Unsocial disposition of the inhabitants. ] These islands being within from ten to fifteen miles, were laid down byestimated distances, but it was quite impossible to assign places to theimmense number of others which stretched away to the south andsouth-east, as far as the eye could reach. We stood in shore for thepurpose of discovering whether there was any place of shelter in themain land, but in general it proved shallow and unsafe. At length wediscovered a bay which promised shelter, but on running into it, thedepth was found not to exceed three or four fathoms. This bay is opentowards the south, and is formed by a curved tongue of land on the northand west. The longitude of the south end of this point is 126º 42' 22"east, and latitude 36º 7' 38" north. We remained here during the night, and the forenoon of the 5th. The natives came on board, but made greatobjections to our landing. [Sidenote: Tides. ] The tide rose and fell fifteen feet and a half; it was low water at 8P. M. , and high water at 2. 30 A. M. This was two and a half days beforefull moon. The Alceste's boats were sent to sound in the eastern quarter, but theyfound shoal water every where. [Sidenote: Proceed to the south-westward. ] 5th of September. --At 11 A. M. We got under weigh and stood to thesouth-west among the islands, carrying seven, eight, nine, ten, tofifteen fathoms, and occasionally deepening to seventeen fathoms. At4. 45 we observed in longitude 126º 24-1/2' east, and latitude 35º 52'north at this time. [Sidenote: Bearings. ] Two islands bore north half east, seven miles. A remarkable small black island, west 32º, north four miles. Another, west 22º north, seven miles. A range of islands, from east 10º north, to east 16º south. A long island, from south 25º east, to south 11º east. The islands off which we anchored on the 2nd instant bearing about north10º west. Two islands, from south 16º west, to south 25º west. [Sidenote: Main land. ] The main land from south south-east to north-east, high and rugged. We had a sea breeze to-day, and fine weather. Variation 2º 10' westerly. We ran on by moonlight till 11 P. M. , and then anchored among theislands. Latitude, observed by Polaris 35º 26' north. Longitude, atanchor by chronometer next morning 126º 23' 22" east. From this spot themain land was seen from east 12º north, to south 20º east. [Sidenote: Bearings. ] A rock, west 7º south, four miles. An island, from west 15º north, to west 31º north, 4-1/2'. Three islands, extending from west 36º south, to west 45º south, 3'. Two distant ones in the same direction. Cluster of islands, from west 64º south, to west 84-1/2º south. Large island, north 12º west, ten or twelve miles. A cluster of islands, from north 15º east, to north 28º east. Two distant islands, north 32º east. Two others, north 42º east. [Sidenote: Channels between the islands generally deep. ] 6th of September. --Weighed and stood to the southward. At noon observedin 35º 17' north, longitude 126º 28-1/2' east, being then in the centreof a semicircle of islands, extending from north-east to south-east andsouth-west. During the forenoon the flood tide set strong to the northnorth-east against us. Most of the channels between the islands weredeep, but to-day we tried one which had not more than five and a halffathoms. At 4. 30. Took sights, when a long bluff island bore eastnorth-east a quarter of a mile. Longitude 126º 6' 37" east; latitude 35º6' north. This island is the most westerly of the range of islands whichlie between the latitude 35º and 36º north. High and connected land wasfaintly discernible to the eastward. The soundings were generally fromnine to fifteen fathoms, deepening in most cases on approaching thebluff islands. [Sidenote: Flood tide runs to the northward. ] [Sidenote: Windsor Castle. ] [Sidenote: Bearings. ] 7th of September. --We anchored last night about ten o'clock in seventeenfathoms; the flood tide had made; it ran north nearly three miles anhour, till four A. M. When we got under weigh, and drifted fast to thesouthward with the ebb. At 9. 30. Got sights, which gave longitude 125º52' 45" east, latitude 34º 42' north; at this time a very remarkablehill on an island bore east 8º south; it has the appearance of a turretor large chimney. The other bearings from this spot were-- Western extreme of a large island stretching west north-west, and eastsouth-east; north 27º, east 4 or 5'. Round rock, north 18º east, 8'. Cluster of islands from north 50º west, to north 74º west. Round bluff small island, west 9º south. Large island, west 42º south, 7 or eight leagues. Two small distant islands, west 53º south, 10' leagues. Small island, south 11º east. [Sidenote: Soundings. ] [Sidenote: Variation of the compass. ] Extreme of distant land, south 37º east: besides, as usual, innumerabledistant islands. The flood tide made against us between ten and eleven. The soundings this morning have been from twenty-three to nineteenfathoms. The weather extremely hot and the water smooth. The ebb madeabout four, and there being no wind, it carried us rapidly towards somerocks joining two islands. We anchored in twenty-one fathoms. Thevariation of the compass 2-1/2º westerly. The bearings at anchor thisevening were as follows: [Sidenote: Bearings. ] Small island, south 3º 22' east. Large island, from south to south 20-1/2º east. A small island, south 22º east. Another, south 28-1/2º east. High bluff island, south 31º east. Island from south 9º east, to south 18º west. Sharp peaked rock, south 25º 40' west. Island from south 63º west, to south 65º west. Distant island, from south 63-1/2º west, to south 66º west, nine or tenleagues. Distant small island, west 1º 10' north, seven or eight leagues. [Sidenote: Bearings. ] Distant island, from west 6º 39' north, to west 9º north, formed of onelarge flat space and five hummocks, eight or nine leagues. Island, west 28º 50' north. Large island, from west 31º north, to west 38º 19' north. Round bluff island, off which we observed at noon to-day, west 39º 52'north. Distant small island, west 44º 28' north, four or five leagues. Large island, from west 71º north, to west 81º 30' north. An island, afterwards called Thistle Island, south 79º east, to east 14º52' north, besides numberless islands, in thick clusters, extending asfar as the eye could reach, in the north-east and east quarters. In theafternoon a boat went inside Thistle Island, and reported that there wasa clear anchorage. [Sidenote: Sail into Murray's Sound. ] [Sidenote: Latitude observed on shore. ] [Sidenote: Longitude. ] [Sidenote: Tides. ] [Sidenote: Variation of the compass. ] 8th of September. --At noon we weighed and sailed round the north end ofThistle Island, carrying seventeen fathoms, till the north end boresouth; we then shoaled to ten and eleven, and one cast nine fathoms. Onrounding the island we steered south, and anchored in eleven fathoms, soft bottom, about four hundred yards from the middle part of theisland. The islands at this place are so situated as to form a capaciousand secure anchorage, with passages among the islands in all directions. The latitude observed with an artificial horizon on shore, was 34º 22'39" north; longitude by mean of two chronometers, agreeing nearly, 126º2' 52" east. The tides run at the springs at the rate of three and fourknots, the flood to the north north-east; the rise and fall is fifteenfeet. Strong eddies are felt among the islands. The variation of thecompass is 2º 30' westerly. [Sidenote: Appearance of the Amherst Isles, from the top of a peakedisland. ] On the 9th of September Captain Maxwell and a party went to the summitof a high peak, on an island to the south-east of the ships, in latitude34º 20' north, and longitude 126º 6' east. From this spot, elevatedabout seven or eight hundred feet above the sea, the view of the islandswas very striking: we endeavoured to number them, but our accountsvaried, owing to the difficulty of estimating the number in the distantgroups; it will serve, however, to give some idea of this splendidscene, to say that the lowest enumeration gave one hundred and twentyislands. Many of these islands are large and high, almost all are cultivated, andtheir forms present an endless diversity. High land was seen to rise above the distant islands in the east andnorth-east; this probably was the main land of Corea, for it seemed moreextensive and connected than any group of islands we had seen. [Sidenote: Difficulty of estimating the number of islands on thiscoast. ] We had now ran along upwards of two hundred miles of this coast, and atevery part which we approached, the islands were no less thickly sownthan here; so that our attempts to enumerate them all, or even to assignplaces on the chart to those which we passed the nearest to, becameafter a time quite hopeless. [Sidenote: Winds and weather. ] During our stay upon the coast of Corea, between the 1st and 10th ofSeptember, the winds were principally from the northward; the weatherwas moderate and clear; and occasionally calm during the heat of theday. [Sidenote: Barometer and thermometer. ] The barometer rose and fell gradually between 29. 78. And 29. 98. Thethermometer was never above 82º, and never, even at night, under 72º Forfurther details respecting the winds and weather, see the MeteorologicalJournal. [Illustration: Chart of GREAT LOO CHOO Island _Surveyed in H. M. Sloop LYRA by Captain Basil Hall_ 1816] NOTICE TO ACCOMPANY THE GENERAL CHART OF THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND, ANDTHE CHARTS OF NAPAKIANG, AND PORT MELVILLE. [Sidenote: Different names of this island. ] This island is called Loo-choo, and sometimes Doo-choo, by the natives. In our maps it is variously written, but mostly Lekayo: the Chinese knowit by the name of Low-kow. The spelling used by Mr. Horsburgh in hisdirections, Lieou-kieou, or Lieu-chew. [Sidenote: Geographical limits and general aspect. ] The island lies between 26º 4-3/4' and 26º 52-1/2', north, and between127º 34' and 128º 18' east, being very nearly sixty miles long in anorth-east direction, and preserving a tolerably uniform breadth ofabout ten or twelve miles. The north end is high and bold, with wood onthe top of the hills. The north-east coast is also abrupt, but quitebarren. The south-east side is low, with very little appearance ofcultivation. The south, south-west, and western faces, particularly thetwo former, are of moderate height, and present a scene of greatfertility and high cultivation: it is to this quarter that the mass ofpopulation have resorted. The north-west side is generally rugged andbare. [Sidenote: Deep bay. ] [Sidenote: Barrow's Bay. ] There are two deep indentures, one on each side of the island; that onthe west has at least one hundred fathoms depth, and appears to have nocoral in it: while the eastern bight is extremely shallow, and is notonly skirted by a broad fringe of coral, but has reefs in the centre;and these last are very dangerous, for they give no warning either bybreakers or discoloration of the water, or by soundings: and this remarkwill apply generally to all the reefs round this island, rendering thenavigation, particularly at night, very dangerous. [Sidenote: General caution respecting coral reefs. ] [Sidenote: Sugar Loaf or Eegooshcoond. ] The most remarkable headland is the island called by Captain Broughtonthe Sugar Loaf, and by the natives Eegooshcoond (tower or castle); itcan be seen distinctly at the distance of twenty-five miles when the eyeis elevated only fifteen feet. It is a high conical mountain, varyingvery little in its aspect when viewed from different quarters: as thereis no other peak like it on or near this island, it cannot be mistaken. The latitude of the peak is 26º 43' north; and I have reason to believethat this is within one mile of the truth. Its longitude is 127º 44', or6' east of the observatory at Napakiang, by two chronometers. The baseof the cone and one-third of the way up is covered with houses; and thewhole island has the appearance of a garden. When nearly on the meridianof the Sugar Loaf its top seems rounded off. [Sidenote: Two safe anchoring places. ] [Sidenote: Geographical position of Napakiang. ] There are two places where ships can ride in safety, Napakiang Roadson the south-west, and Port Melville on the north-west side of theisland. The first of these is the one in which his majesty's shipsAlceste and Lyra lay for upwards of a month. By means of a base of 1319feet on a coral reef, which dried at half ebb, we were enabled to makethe survey which accompanies this notice. The latitude of theobservatory was determined to be 26º 13' 34" north, the mean of threemeridian altitudes of the sun by a sextant of Cary's, and five by acircle of Troughton's, the extreme difference being 20". The longitudeis 127º 38' east; this was ascertained by measuring the difference oflongitude between the observatory and Lintin Island off Canton river ina run of six days; on which occasion two chronometers on board the Lyragave within one mile the same difference of longitude, viz. 13º 50', with that shewn by two others on board his majesty's ship Alceste; thelongitude of Lintin being 113º 48' east of Greenwich. The longitude, bylunar observations, is 127º 37' 28". The plan of Napakiang roads will befound sufficient without many directions for ships wishing to enter it. The principal danger lies in the outer reefs, which do not show when theweather is very fine and there is little swell; on such occasions a boatought to go a-head at least a quarter of a mile, and the ship should putabout instantly upon approaching the reefs, which are every where bold. A ship coming from the westward ought to steer between the north-easternof the group of high islands to the south-westward, and a low greenisland with extensive reefs to the northward, in latitude 26º 15' north. On passing which she should haul up east by south, giving Reef Island abirth of at least a mile. [Sidenote: Plan of Napakiang. ] [Sidenote: Directions on approaching Napakiang. ] [Sidenote: Reef Island. ] [Illustration] [Sidenote: Directions for entering Napakiang roads. ] [Illustration: NAPAKIANG ROADS _on the S. W. Side of the_ GREAT LOO CHOO Island _Laid down from actual survey by Captain Basil Hall R. N. H. M. SloopLYRA_ 1816] [Sidenote: Capstan Rock. ] [Sidenote: Best anchorage off the mouths of two rivulets. ] [Sidenote: The northern entrance. ] On approaching the main land a conspicuous wooded point will be seen, having rocks on its summit like the ruins of an abbey; this forms thesouth side of the anchorage, and is considerably more to the westwardthan the north-east side. The harbour of Napakiang will soon be seen atthe south side of the bay; steer directly in for this, giving AbbeyPoint a birth of half a mile, and when directly between the south end ofthe outer reefs and Abbey Point haul up east by north. There is a veryremarkable rock on the south-east side of the anchorage resembling thehead of a capstan. It would be safest to anchor when this bears aboutsouth-south-east half a mile at most, in order to avoid a dangerouscoral tongue, which lies north a little easterly from it, three-quartersof a mile; but as this anchorage is exposed, the ship may proceedfarther in as soon as the exact place of the reef has been ascertainedby boats; and if she proposes staying any time, she may warp intoBarnpool, taking the precaution of placing a boat on each side of theentrance. There are two rivulets at this place, and probably the bestanchorage is off their mouths, the bottom consisting of the mud broughtdown by the stream. There is a well on the eastern side supplied by aspring, and there are landing places at the entrance of both harbours. There is a safe passage between the reef, on which the base wasmeasured, and the outer ones. The Lyra passed through this three times;and if the object is to go to the northward it ought to be followed, provided the wind will admit of steering north and two points on eachside of it. The leading mark for going by this passage is Capstan Fortor Rock, on with a remarkable nose formed by the trees on the highestdistant land; these are on when they bear about south by east half east. It would certainly not be advisable for a stranger to enter by thispassage, but he may run on coming from the northward along the shore atthe distance of two or three miles till Reef Island bears west, and thenhe should look sharply out for the reefs, keeping outside them till nearAbbey Point, then act as before directed. On running down towardsNapakiang from the northward a remarkable bluff table land will be seento the southward of Abbey Point. The west face of Abbey Point ought tobe kept just on with the east end of the table land; this will take youfurther out than is absolutely necessary; but it is safe; and when ReefIsland is just on with the northern of the group of distant islands youwill be exactly off the north entrance. [Sidenote: Appearance of land in coming from the northward towardsNapakiang. ] [Sidenote: Not to be attempted by a stranger. ] [Sidenote: Dangerous coral reef about four leagues south-west by westfrom Napakiang. ] On coming from the southward the only danger that lies in the way is acoral reef even with the water's edge; it is of a circular form, and atlow water several rocks shew on it. On every occasion that we passed thesea broke high upon it; but from what we saw of other similar reefs, itseems very probable that when the water is smooth it will give nowarning: it is about eight miles west, 15º north of the extreme southpoint of the island, and lies in latitude 26º 7' north, and longitude127º 26' east of Greenwich. [Sidenote: Port Melville. ] [Sidenote: Directions to approach it, and to anchor previous to enteringthe harbour. ] Port Melville is on the north-west side of the island. A ship wishing toenter it ought to make the Sugar Loaf Peak, and steer between it and thecluster of islands to the northward, directly for the bottom of thebight, which lies between the Sugar Loaf and the north end of theisland; here Herbert's Island will be seen close to the shore, run intowards its western end, anchor when it bears east one-third of a mile, and the Sugar Loaf west one-quarter north, barely shut in with a lowdark green point of land; here you will have from seventeen to twentyfathoms. [Sidenote: Boats should be sent to buoy the channel. ] The entrance of the harbour is narrow, and ought not to be attemptedwithout previous examination by the boats of a ship wishing to enter it. With a very little trouble the passage might be buoyed: a large shipwill probably find it expedient to warp in and out. [Sidenote: Eye-draught of Port Melville. ] The eye-draught, with the directions on it, render much further noticehere superfluous. The harbour is secure, and sufficiently capacious fora numerous fleet. It extends in a north and south direction for abouttwo miles, varying in breadth and form in a very remarkable manner; atthe lower or north end there are two basons of a circular form, and havefrom nine to fifteen fathoms, soft bottom; these are about one-third ofa mile across. At some places the steep rocks which form the banksapproach within an hundred yards of one another; here the water issixteen, eighteen, and twenty fathoms. There are many fine coves, somewith shelving shores, and others steep-to. Every part of the harbour issecured from the sea, and many parts from all winds: it is wellcalculated for the re-equipment of ships, for it is not only secure asan anchorage, but offers conveniences for landing men and stores, andalso for heaving down or careening a ship. [Sidenote: Villages of Cooee and of Oonting. ] There are several large villages on the shores of an extensive bay, communicating with the sea to the north-eastward, at the upper or southend of the line of harbours, and one called Oonting on the west side ofthe lower harbour; there is another of some extent, on the south side ofHerbert's Island, called Cooee. By permission of Captain Maxwell, I have named this excellent harbour, Port Melville, in honour of Lord Viscount Melville, First Lord of theAdmiralty. [Illustration: _Draught_ _of_ PORT MELVILLE _on the N. W. Side of_ _GREATLOO-CHOO_ Island _by_ _Captain Basil Hall_ _and_ _the_ OFFICERS _of__His Majesty's Sloop_ LYRA _11th Octr. 1816. _] From the top of a range of hills which we ascended, rising on the southside of the upper bay of Port Melville, we could see the south-westcorner of the great western bay, the whole range of Port Melville, andthe coasts adjacent. [Sidenote: Geographical position of Port Melville. ] The latitude of Herbert's Island, which lies directly off the entranceof Port Melville, is 26º 42-2/3' north, by meridian altitude of the sunobserved on shore. Its longitude, which is also the longitude of PortMelville, is 127º 55' east, or 17' east of Napakiang observatory. TheSugar Loaf bears from the centre of the island, west 4-1/2º north, aboutten miles. [Sidenote: Coast skirted by coral reefs. ] As the whole part of this coast is skirted by dangerous coral reefs, thegreatest attention should be paid to the lead, and the ship ought tobe put about the instant that the water shoals to eight, seven, or sixfathoms. On running in for the west end of Herbert's Island, on themorning of the 11th of October, we passed over a coral ledge having ninefathoms on it. The west point of Herbert's Island bore at this timesouth 8º 40' west, distant four or five miles. Before and after passingthis we had from thirty to sixty fathoms; whether it was shoaler thannine fathoms at any place, was not ascertained, but the circumstance isdeserving of notice, and ought to teach the necessity of constantvigilance, when near coral reefs. [Sidenote: Montgomery islands. ] The cluster of islands to the northward of Port Melville lies between26º 54' and 27º 4-1/2' north, the north end of the northern one being inlongitude 127º 57' east, or 19' east of the observatory. It does notappear that there is any good anchorage about them; and there aredangerous reefs off the south and south-western ones. [Sidenote: Hope Point. ] The north end of the Great Loo-choo lies in 26º 52-1/2' north, and thisis probably within one, or at most two miles of the truth. We observedin 27º 00' 15" north, at which time the northern extreme bore east 59ºsouth, nine miles by estimation, an inference which was checked by thedistance run on a direct course afterwards. The longitude is 128º 9'east, or 31' east of the observatory. [Sidenote: Sidmouth Point. ] The coast from the north point runs south-east by east, with some minordeviations, nearly four leagues: great pains were taken to ascertainthis precisely, as the former charts not only place it many milesfurther north, but make the coast at this end lie east and west. Thenorth-east point lies in 26º 47' north, and longitude 128º 18' east, or40' east of the observatory. The latitude was determined by the meridianaltitude of Sirius and an altitude of Polaris, so near daylight that thehorizon was well defined; but as this point, off which there is a smallisland, was some miles north of the ship at the time of observation, theabove latitude may err possibly two miles. It was intended to haveexamined two islands which lie to the north-eastward of the north point, but a strong current in the night carried us so far to leeward, that wecould not effect this object; the situation, therefore, of these twoislands, may perhaps not be accurately laid down in the chart. [Sidenote: Barrow's Bay. ] The deep indenture about the middle of the east side of the island isunsafe to enter during the north-east monsoon: as the wind, however, hadwesting in it, we sailed up to within three or four miles of the top, carrying from thirty to twenty fathoms water; but when about to haul infor the north side, where there appeared to be a bay, we shoaledsuddenly from twenty-four to eight fathoms: the helm was instantly putdown, and when head to wind, we had only five fathoms. While in staysthe water was observed to wash on a rock not a hundred yards to leewardof us, on which we must infallibly have struck, had we bore up insteadof tacking. [Sidenote: South-east coast dangerous. ] From the north-east to the south-east point, the coast runs south 40ºwest; the shore to the north-east of this deep bight is bold, and seemsclear; that on the south-west side of it presents a formidable barrierof islands and coral reefs, which break to a great distance: in fineweather this part of the coast ought to be approached very cautiously. [Sidenote: South Point. ] [Sidenote: Reef. ] The southern extreme of this island lies in latitude 26º 4' 46" north, determined with great care by the meridian altitude of the sun on shore;and in longitude 127º 35' east, or 3' west of the observatory. There isgood anchorage from twenty to thirty fathoms, south a little easterly, of this point. Between this point and the group of islands to thewestward, there is a dangerous reef, already spoken of; it lies in 26º7' north, and 127º 26' east; it bears 26' west, 15º north from the southpoint of the island, distant eight miles. Immediately round the point onthe west side there is a shallow harbour, formed by coral reefs, but theentrance is narrow and intricate. [Sidenote: South-western group. ] We stood over to the largest of the south-west group, on the east sideof which there stands out a conical rock, behind which it was thoughtthat a harbour might lie, but upon examination, it proved only fit forboats; it lies in 26º 11' north. [Sidenote: Reef Island. ] Reef Island lies west by north, about two leagues from Napakiang Roads;on the north side the reefs stretch a great way, but the south is moreclear. Between Napakiang and the Sugar Loaf there is no place for ships to liein safety; the bay immediately to the north was examined by Mr. Mayne, master of his Majesty's ship Alceste, when two shallow harbours werefound. [Sidenote: Tides. ] The flood runs to the northward and eastward, along shore, and the ebbin an opposite direction. The rise and fall is about nine feetperpendicular. High water at full and change IX. [Sidenote: Variation of the compass. ] The variation of the compass, determined with great precision by thetransit azimuth instrument, was 52' westerly. The longitude of the Lyra's observatory at Napakiang by the mean ofthirty-six lunar observations on both sides of the moon, is 127º 37' 28"east; by four chronometers, agreeing nearly, 127º 38' 30" east. Thelatitude is 26º 13' 39" north. [Transcriber's Note: Crescent moons are denoted by [((] or [))]; a circlewith a period therein is denoted by [(. )]] OBSERVATIONS MADE AT NAPAKIANG OBSERVATORY, GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. Lunars with a Sextant. Lunars with a Sextant. [(. )] West of [((] *[Greek: a] Arietis, East of [))] 25th September, 1816. 4th October, 1816 [(. )] [((] 127º. 38'. 15" East. * [))] 127º. 31'. 00" East. 35 . 15 37 . 00 36 . 15 43 . 00 34 . 45 52 . 30 33 . 00 54 . 30 36 . 00 38 . 45 30 . 45 52 . 45 28 . 30 50 . 15 32 . 15 50 . 30 31 . 30 127º. 33'. 39" Mean 41 . 45 40 . 30 26th October, 1816. 34 . 15 43 . 15 [(. )] [((] 127 . 38 . 30 39 . 45 39 . 45 ------------ 41 . 30 Mean by sextant 127 . 43. 20 * East of [))] 44 . 15 44 . 30 Lunars by Circle. 32 . 15 [(. )] West of [((] 33 . 00 31 . 45 4th October, 1816 31 . 15 [(. )] [((] 127º. 38'. 45" 27 . 30 127º 36'. 16" Mean 32 . 30 ------------- ------------- Mean by sextant 127 . 34 . 58 [(. )] W. [((] Mean 127 . 35 . 37 by circle. Mean by sextant [(. )] west [))] 127º 34'. 58" * East [((] 127 . 43 . 20 -------------- Mean longitude by sextant [(. )] * [))] 127 . 39 . 9 by circle [(. )] * [((] 127 . 35 . 37 -------------- Mean longitude by 36 lunars 127 . 37 . 28 Longitude by chronometers 127 . 38 . 30 east of Greenwich. LATITUDE OF NAPAKIANG. _By Meridian Altitudes of the Sun and Altitudes taken near Noon. _ By meridian altitudes observed. By meridian altitudes deduced in the usual way from sights taken near noon. 1816. 1816. Sextant. 8th Oct. Mean of 3 A. M. } 26º. 13'. 30" circle. 17th Oct. 26º. 13'. 43" and 3 P. M. } 20th Oct. 26 . 13 . 44 20th Oct. A. M. { 26 . 13 . 46} sext. { 26 . 13 . 44} Circle. 26th Oct. 26 . 13 . 29 20th Oct. P. M. { 26 . 13 . 58} { 26 . 13 . 47} sext. { 26 . 13 . 57} 22d mean 2 A. M. & 2 P. M. 26 . 13 . 24} circle. 26th 3 P. M. 26 . 13 . 29} Latitude by mean of 3 meridian altitudes 26º. 13'. 39" sextant and circle. Mean of 5 altitudes near noon 26 . 13 . 50 sextant. Mean of 3 do. Do. 26 . 13 . 28 circle. ------------ Mean latitude 26 . 13 . 39 north. * * * * * VARIATION OF THE COMPASS AT NAPAKIANG. The declination of the magnetic meridian was ascertained withconsiderable precision by means of the transit azimuth instrument: theneedle seldom showed the same variation, as it oscillated about tenminutes, but the mean position of the magnetic meridian was 52' 10" westof the true. A coral reef was selected for the place of theseobservations, in order to avoid the attraction arising from buildings, or from inequalities in the ground. * * * * * _Variation observed on board by Walker's Azimuth Compass. _ 29th Sept. 1816, P. M. Ship's head W. By S. Variation by 1st azimuth 0º. 51'. 30" west. 2nd 0 . 53 . 30 3rd 1 . 17 . 30 Amplitude 1 . 15 . 00 30th A. M. 1st azimuth 0 . 55 . 30 2nd 0 . 34 . 15 3d Oct. A. M. Ship's head E. N. E. 1st azimuth 0 . 37 . 00 2nd 0 . 48 . 00 ----------- Variation by mean of 7 azimuths and 1 amplitude 0 . 52 . 39 west. TABLE OF OBSERVATIONS MADE WITH DR. WOLLASTON'S DIP SECTOR: WITH AN ENGRAVING, AND A DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTRUMENT, AND DIRECTIONSFOR ITS USE. [Illustration: Wollaston's Dip Sector] EXPLANATION OF THE DIP SECTOR, AND REMARKS ON THE OBSERVATIONS MADE WITH IT IN HIS MAJESTY'S SLOOP LYRA. In our tables for apparent dip of the visible horizon at differentheights from the sea, as calculated from the known curvature of theearth, allowance is made for the refraction of the atmosphere, on asupposition of its being constant, but as it is known to vary, thetabular dip will often be erroneous, and, consequently, altitudes takenunder different states of the atmosphere, will exhibit different insteadof corresponding results. It is foreign to the present purpose to shew what the causes are whichhave most effect in raising or depressing the apparent horizon. It maybe sufficient to mention, that changes in the relative temperature ofthe air and the sea must produce changes in the refraction near thesurface. Dr. Wollaston has published two papers in the PhilosophicalTransactions on this subject, in the volumes for 1800 and 1803, and tothese I beg to refer the reader for precise information upon this verycurious subject. The object which this sector proposes to attain, is the actualadmeasurement of the dip angle; that is, to ascertain how much thevisible horizon is depressed below the horizontal plane passing throughthe eye of the observer. The instrument is so contrived as to measuredouble the dip angle twice over, so that we obtain four times therequired dip, and one quarter of this angle is what must be applied tovertical angles, measured from that part of the horizon which has beenobserved. Figure I. Is the instrument seen in perspective, and Fig. II. Is a planof it with the telescope removed. In order to explain its use, let A andB (Fig. II. ) represent the two reflecting glasses at right angles to theplane of the instrument, and also nearly at right angles to each other. It is clear that when the plane of the instrument is held vertically, aneye situated at E, and looking through the unsilvered part of the glassA at a distant point C, will at the same time see by joint reflectionfrom both glasses, another distant point D at 180º from C; and D willappear to correspond with C, if a suitable motion be given to the indexglass B by the tangent screw F. The instrument may now be supposed to measure the arc CZD. If the pointsC and D be each three minutes farther from the zenith than 90º, theentire angle will then exceed 180º by double that quantity. The relativeposition of the glasses then corresponds to 180º 6', and the six minutesof excess would be shewn on the arc at F if there were no index error. But, by reason of the index error, the real quantity will not be knowntill a similar observation has been made with the instrument in anopposite direction. If the instrument be now inverted, so that the unsilvered glass isuppermost, the arc intended to be measured is CND, or the sum of thedistances of the points C and D from the Nadir instead of the Zenith, which of course falls short of 180º by as much as the former arcexceeded that quantity. The difference of the two arcs is consequently twelve minutes, and ifthe index be now moved till the objects C and D appear to correspond, the amount of this double difference will be shewn by the _change ofposition_ of the vernier. Hence it is evidently unnecessary that the index error should bepreviously known, and even preferable that its amount should be such asto avoid the needless introduction of negative quantities by positionson different sides of zero. In the preceding description, it is supposed that the eye is lookingdirectly through the unsilvered glass at the horizon, and that it alsoperceives the opposite horizon after two reflections; but an inspectionof the figure will shew that the observer's head would necessarilyintercept the rays from the horizon behind him. To obviate this, boththe direct and the reflected rays are received in coming from theunsilvered glass, (and after passing through the field-glass of thetelescope) on a mirror placed at an angle of 45º, which reflects them tothe eye. By this ingenious contrivance, the obstruction is removed, andthe opposite points of the horizon may be both seen at one moment. In practice, it is most convenient to direct the telescope to the samepart of the horizon in both cases. Thus, if the east and west parts ofthe horizon be observed, and that the index glass be uppermost, andtelescope pointing to the west, the observer is on the south side, andhis face must be turned to the north. When the instrument is inverted, if the observer turn himself round at the same time, so as to face thesouth, then the telescope will be pointed as before to the west; butsince the index glass is now undermost, the inferior arc will now bemeasured precisely as if his face were to the north, but with theadvantage of the same lights seen in the erect position of theinstrument. In using this instrument at sea for the first time, considerabledifficulty arises from the constant change in the plane of theinstrument from the perpendicular position, in which it is absolutelynecessary that it should be held, in order to obtain a correctobservation. What at first appears to be a defect, however, is a realadvantage, namely, that whenever it is held in the least degree out ofthe vertical plane, the two horizons (that seen direct, and thereflected one) cross each other, and it is only when the plane isvertical that the horizons can appear parallel. The object is to get the two horizons to coincide exactly, and for thispurpose it will often be necessary to have them of different shades. This is managed, as in the sextant, by means of the screw, which raisesor lowers the telescope. When the telescope is brought nearer to theplane of the instrument, the reflected horizon becomes dark anddistinct, but when screwed off it becomes fainter, and is not so welldefined. Practice alone can teach the degree of intensity which is mostfavourable. In general it is best to have one horizon dark, and theother light; then bring them very nearly to coincide, and wait till theship is steady, at which moment a slight touch of the tangent screwbrings them exactly to cover one another. It will happen, of course, that when the coincidence is perfect, there is only one horizon to beseen, and a doubt remains whether all is right, but a slight motion ofthe instrument, by making the horizons cross each other, defines them atonce. It is advisable to take several observations, and the safest way is totake one first with the index glass uppermost, and then with theinstrument inverted, after which to return to the first, and so on fortwo or three times each way. In the pages which follow, there is given a table containing the resultof all the observations made during this voyage, preceded by severalsets of observations in the fullest detail. From the table it will beobserved how seldom the dip, actually measured, agrees with thatinferred from the mean refraction. Some of these experiments shew veryremarkable differences, and point out the great utility of thisinstrument. The practical navigator, particularly if he has been in hot climates, will recollect how discordant his observations for latitude always were, and how few even of the best observers agree in their determination ofthe latitude of the same place, simple as the observation is thought tobe. The cause is quite clear; and though it equally affects altitudestaken for absolute time, the disagreement is less obvious, and it willoften happen that a chronometer going extremely well appears to varyevery day from inaccuracy in the observations. Thus it is, I think, generally admitted, that it is almost impossible to rate a chronometerfrom altitudes observed with the sea horizon. Nor is this difficultyremoved by taking equal altitudes, because the refraction in allprobability will be different at the two observations. With anartificial horizon, indeed, the changes in refraction are not felt, because, at a considerable elevation above the horizon, the changes arevery trifling. But it often happens in practice, that the artificialhorizon cannot be used, and we are then reduced to the sea horizon, where the changes of refraction are always the greatest. In the YellowSea, for instance, we had no opportunity of landing during all the timethat the squadron was at anchor, till the day before we sailed. So thatduring nearly a fortnight that the ships were at anchor, the sea horizonwas necessarily used. I need only to refer to the observations taken offthe Pei-ho, viz. From No. 37 to 62, to shew how extremely fallacious theresults must have been. It is much to be wished that this excellent instrument should be broughtinto general use in navigation. THE FOLLOWING EIGHT OBSERVATIONS ARE SET DOWN IN THE FULLEST DETAIL, INORDER TO SHEW THE METHOD USED IN RECORDING THEM. No. 31. YELLOW SEA. _July 23, 1816. _--6 P. M. Index uppermost. Instrument inverted. A + 8'. 10" B - 7'. 10" 8 . 05 7 . 10 8 . 00 7 . 10 ------ ------ Mean 8 . 05 Mean 7 . 10 B. Mean + 8 . 05 A. ------- 15 . 15 ------- 3 . 49 Dip. 3 . 50 Tabular. 1 Difference. ------- Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches. Parts of the horizon observed, WSW. And ENE. Barometer 29 . 78 inches Thermometer {Air 82º {Sea 77º Latitude 35º north. Longitude 124º east. Wind light from south; horizon uncommonly well defined and sharp; skyclear, and sea perfectly smooth. No. 40. OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA. _July 29, 1816. _--9 A. M. Index uppermost. Instrument inverted. A + 8'. 20" B - 11'. 40" 8 . 45 11 . 35 8 . 30 11 . 50 ------ ------- Mean 8 . 32 Mean 11 . 42 B. Mean + 8 . 32 A. ------- 4) 20 . 14 5 . 3 Dip. 3 . 50 Tabular. 1 . 13 Difference + ------- Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches. Parts of the horizon observed, NW. And SE. The low land just visible in the NW. Distant 12 or 14 miles. Depth of the sea, 18 feet. Barometer 29 . 60 inches. Thermometer {Air 81º {Sea 84º Latitude 38º. 50' north. Longitude 118º. 00' east. There has been little wind this morning, after a very close night. No. 43. OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA. _August 6, 1816. _--1 P. M. Index uppermost. Instrument inverted. A + 7'. 48" B - 11'. 55" 7 . 48 11 . 45 7 . 55 11 . 45 ------ ------- Mean 7 . 50 Mean 11 . 48 B. Mean + 7 . 50 A. ------- 4) 19 . 38 ------- 4 . 54 Dip. 3 . 53 Tabular. 1 . 1 Difference + ------- Height of the eye, 15 feet, 6 inches. Parts of the horizon observed, SW. By S. And NE. By N. Depth of the sea, 29 feet. Barometer - 29 . 64 inches. Thermometer { Air 83-1/2º { Sea 81-1/2º Latitude - 38º 50' north. Longitude - 118º 00' east. Moderate breeze from SE. By S. ; rather hazy, but the horizon sharp anddistinct. No. 50. OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA. _August 8, 1816. _--6. 15. A. M. Index uppermost. Instrument inverted. A + 10'. 20" B - 12'. 50" 10 . 18 12 . 45 10 . 35 13 . 00 ---------- ---------- Mean 10 . 24, 3 Mean 12 . 51. 7 B. Mean + 10 . 24. 3 A. ---------- 4) 23 . 16 5 . 49 Dip. 3 . 50 Tabular. 1 . 59 Difference + ---------- Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches. Parts of the horizon observed, NNE. And SSW. Clear of the land. Depth of the sea, 26 feet. Barometer 29 . 65 inches. Thermometer { Air 69-1/2º { Sea 78º Wind NNW. Moderate. Latitude - 38º. 50' north. Longitude - 118º. 00' east. _Mem. _--The top of the fort at the mouth of the river, is just visible at 30 feet from the surface of the water. No. 53. OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA. _August 10, 1816. _--6. 10. A. M. Index uppermost. Instrument inverted A + 13'. 55" B - 7'. 30" 13 . 50 7 . 15 13 . 45 7 . 25 ------- --------- Mean 13 . 50 Mean 7 . 23. 3 B. --------- Mean + 13 . 50 A. --------- 4) 21 . 13. 3 5 . 18. 3 Dip. 2 . 20 Tabular. 2 . 58 Difference + Height of the eye, 5 feet, 6 inches. Depth of the water, 5 feet. Parts of the horizon observed, N. By E. And S. By W. Just clear of the land. Barometer 29 . 69 inches. } On board His Majesty's ship Lyra, Thermometer { Air 75º } distant three or four miles. { Sea 77º } Wind WNW. About one mile from the fort of Tung-coo, at the entrance of the Pei-horiver. _Note. _--Instrument readjusted. No. 58. OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA. _August 10, 1816. _--2 P. M. Index uppermost. Instrument inverted. A + 15'. 40" B - 8'. 50" 15 . 30 8 . 50 15 . 35 8 . 50 -------- -------- Mean 15 . 35 Mean 8 . 50 B. Mean + 15 . 35 A. 4) 24 . 25 6 . 6. 3 Dip. 3 . 50 Tabular. 2 . 16 Difference + Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches. Parts of the horizon observed, N. By E. And S. By W. Depth of the sea, 27 feet. Barometer 29 . 68 inches. Thermometer } Air 84º } Sea 83º Latitude 38º . 50' north. Longitude 118º . 00' east. No. 59. OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA. _August 10, 1816. _--2. 15. P. M. Index uppermost. Instrument inverted A + 15'. 10" B - 7'. 50" 15 . 10 8 . 10 15 . 10 8 . 05 --------- --------- Mean 15 . 13. 3 Mean 8 . 01. 7 B. Mean + 15 . 13. 3 A. --------- 4) 21 . 15 5 . 48. 7 Dip. 3 . 50 Tabular. 1 . 59 Difference. --------- Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches. Parts of the horizon observed, NW. By N. And SE. By S. Depth of the water, 27 feet. Barometer 29 . 68 inches. Thermometer { Air 84º { Sea 83º Latitude 38º. 50' north. Longitude 118º. 00' east. The vessels in all parts of the horizon have an inverted image underthem; this is very considerable, some having about a third of the sail, others only the hull. No. 110. OFF THE CAPE. _July 28, 1817. _--2. 30. P. M. Index uppermost. Instrument inverted. A + 6'. 35" B - 5'. 00" 6 . 35 4 . 55 6 . 40 5 . 00 -------- --------- Mean 6 . 36. 7 Mean 4 . 58. 3 B. Mean + 6 . 36. 7 A. --------- 4) 11 . 35 2 . 53. 7 Dip. 3 . 49 Tabular. 55 Difference - --------- Height of the eye, 15 feet. Parts of the horizon observed, SE. And NW. Thermometer { Air 64º { Sea 59º Depth of the sea, 222 feet. Latitude 34º. 57' south. Longitude 20º. 15' east. Cape Lagullus due north, distant 6 or 8 miles. Calm all day; sky clear, and weather hazy. On the 29th and 30th of July we were off the Cape, but the weather wasso bad as to prevent any sights being taken. [Transcriber's Note: The final column of each of the followingtables is transcribed beneath the table. ] --+--------+----+-----------+-----+-------+-------+-----+-------+------+------+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. |Then. |Differ. | | | | | | | of +-----------+--+--+---+---+---+---+ | | Long. |Sound-| No. Date. |eye. | Obs. |Tab. |+ |- |Sea|Air| + | - |Baro. | Lat. | East. | ings. | --+--------+----+------+----+--+--+---+---+---+---+-----+-------+------+------+ |1816. |f. I|' " |' "| "| "| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet | 18|June 16. |15 3|4 35. 0|3 50|45| |83 |82-|1/2| |29. 86| 5 11 S|106 3 | 60 | | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | 19|June 16. |15 3|4 33. 0|3 50|43| |83-|82 | 1-| |29. 86| 5 05 S|106 10| 56 | | | | | | | |1/2|sh. |1/2| | | | | | | | | | | | | |{85| | | | | | | 20|June 16. |14 0|3 59 |3 41|18| |84-|{sh|1/2| |29. 83| 5 05 S|106 10| 48 | | | | | | | |1/2|{95| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |{su| | | | | | | 21|June 16. |14 |4 01 |3 41|20| |83 |81 | 2 | |29. 85| 5 05 S|106 10| 57 | 22|June 27. |16 |4 21. 0|3 56|25| |84 |82 | 2 | |29. 81| 6 49 N|107 49| | 23|June 28. |16 |4 22. 2|3 56|26| |84 |82 | 2 | |29. 80| 8 00 |108 10| | 24|July 3. |16 |4 08. 2|3 56|12| |84-|81 | 3-| |29. 77|13 29 |112 59| | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | | 25|July 6. |16 |3 53 |3 56| | 3|84 |83-|1/4| |29. 75|20 00 |114 | | | | | | | | | |3/4| | | | | | | 27|July 7. |15 3|4 3 |3 50|13| |85 |85 | | |29. 79|21 11 |114 | | 28|July 8. |14 6|3 49 |3 45| 4| |84-|82 | 2-| |29. 72| | | | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | | 29|July 16. |15 3|3 27 |3 50| |23|79 |79 | | |29. 75|24 37 |118 56| | 30|July 21. |15 3|3 44 |3 50| | 6|77-|76 | 1-| |29. 78|34 |124 | 270 | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | | 31|July 23. |15 3|3 49 |3 50| | 1|77 |82 | |5 |29. 78|35 |124 | | 32|July 23. |15 3|3 49 |3 50| | 1|77 |82 | |5 |29. 78|35 |124 | | 33|July 23. |15 3|3 44 |3 50| | 6|77 |82 | |5 |29. 78|35 |124 | | 35|July 27. |15 3|4 02 |3 50|12| |76 |76 | | |29. 70|38 55 |118 50| 72 | 36|July 27. |13 |3 35 |3 33| 2| |76 |76 | | |29. 70|38 55 |118 50| 78 | 37|July 28. |15 3|4 21 |3 50|31| |83 |84 | |1 |29. 62|38 50 |118 00 20 | 38|July 28. |15 3|4 06 |3 50|16| |83 |84 | |1 |29. 62|38 50 |118 00| 20 | --+--------+----+------+----+--+--+---+---+---+---+-----+-------+------+------+ Remarks. ---+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ 18 |Weather hazy. The low land of Sumatra just visible. The land wind has | |been blowing gently for about four hours. | 19 |East and west parts of the horizon observed. Coast of Sumatra just | |visible. Hazy. The land-wind dying away. | 20 |The day has been extremely hot, and almost a calm. The sea-breeze not yet | |set in, only a few light flaws. | 24 |A fresh breeze from WNW. The sun set in fiery dirty red clouds. Weather | |squally, with occasional showers of rain. Parts of the horizon observed | |east and west. | 25 |Weather remarkably fine; sky clear; and a gentle breeze from the south. | |The sun set about five minutes after these observations were taken. | |Parts of the horizon observed east and west. | 27 |The forenoon has been extremely hot and oppressive. A rolling swell from | |the SW. | 28 |Parts of the horizon observed SSW and NNE, the first clear to seaward, | | the other clear horizon, but the mainland of China behind it, and | |various islands on each side of the NNE line. | 29 |Very hazy weather: sky fiery. | 30 |Clear weather, with a light breeze from the eastward. Sun set behind a | |low range of dark clouds: sky in that quarter was unusually red. A long | |swell from the northward. | 31 |Wind light from south; horizon uncommonly well defined and sharp; sky | |clear; and the sea perfectly smooth. These sights, and the two following, | |may be depended on, I think, within ten seconds. | 32 |Circumstances similar to No. 31. | 33 |Parts of the horizon observed were that immediately under the setting | |sun; viz. W 21º N, and the opposite E 21º S, the sun being about 4º high. | |Day has been remarkably clear, although the wind has been from the | |southward, which in these seas is said generally to bring fogs. | 35 |Weather somewhat hazy; wind easterly. | 36 |Wind easterly. | 37 |These sights were taken while at anchor off the mouth of the Pei-ho. The | |fort of Tung-coo, on the south bank of the river, bearing W 50º N, distant| |about four or five miles. | ---+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ --+--------+----+-----------+------+--------+------+-----+------+------+------+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. |Then. |Differ. | | | | | | | of +-----------+----+-+---+---+---+---+ | | Long. |Sound-| No. Date. |eye. | Obs. |Tab. | + |-|Sea|Air| + | - |Baro. | Lat. | East. | ings. | --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+ |1816. |f. I|' " |' "|' " |"| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet | 39|July 28. |15 3|3 46 |3 50| |4|82 |83-| | 1-|29. 61|38 50 |118 | 23 | | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | 40|July 29. |15 3|5 3 |3 50|1 13| |84 |81 | 3 | |29. 60|38 50 |118 | 18 | 41|July 29. |15 3|4 00. 9|3 50| 10| |84 |83 | 1 | |29. 58|38. 50 |118 | 20 | 42|Aug. 6. |15 3|5 09 |3 50|1 29| |80 |79 | 1 | |29. 64|38 50 |118 | 22-| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1/2| 43|Aug. 6. |15 6|4 54 |3 53|1 1| |81-|83-| | 2 |29. 64|38 50 |118 | 29 | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | | 44|Aug. 6. |15 3|4 47 |3 50 57| |81-|83-| | 2 |29. 64|38 50 |118 | 29 | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | | 45|Aug. 6. |15 3|4 59 |3 50|1 9| |81-|83-| | 1-|29. 64|38 50 |118 | 29-| | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| |1/2| | | | 1/2| 46|Aug. 6. | 3 9|2 39 |1 54| 45| |81 |84-| | 3-|29. 62|38 50 |118 | 30 | | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | 47|Aug. 6. | 6 |3 26 |2 25|1 1| |81 |84-| | 3-|29. 62|38 50 |118 | 30-| | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | 1/2| 48|Aug. 6. |15 3|4 59. 2|3 50|1 9| |82 |80 | 2 | |29. 59|38 50 |118 | 30 | 49|Aug. 8. |15 3|5 47 |3 50|1 57| |78 |69-| 8-| |29. 65|38 50 |118 | 26 | | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | 50|Aug. 8. |15 3|5 49 |3 59|1 59| |78 |69-| 8-| |29. 65|38 50 |118 | 26 | | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | 51|Aug. 8. |15 3|5 47 |3 50|1 57| |77-|73 | 4-| |29. 66|38 50 |118 | 24 | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | | 52|Aug. 9. |15 3|4 30. 4|3 59| 40| |79-|75 | 4-| |29. 72|38 50 |118 | | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | | 53|Aug. 10. | 5 6|5 18. 3|2 20|2 58| |77 |75 | 2 | |29. 69|38 50 |118 | 5 | 54|Aug. 10. | 5 6|4 28. 3|2 20|2 8| | | | | | |38 50 |117 55| | 55|Aug. 10. | 5 6|4 7 |2 20|1 47| |77 |75 | 2 | |29. 69|38 50 |117 55| 12 | 56|Aug. 10. | 5 6|3 55 |2 20|1 35| |77 |75 | 2 | |29. 69|38 50 |118 | 13 | --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+ Remarks. --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+ 39|The day has been exceedingly close with little wind. | 40|There has been little wind this morning, after a very close night. | 41|Nearly calm, there being only a very light air from the SE. --Day sultry. | 42|Weather hazy; sky clear overhead; sea remarkably smooth; wind north. | 43|Moderate breeze from SE by S; rather hazy; but the horizon sharp and | |distinct. And this together with the four following observations, may be | |taken as very accurate, every circumstance being most favourable. | 45|Parts of the horizon observed E by N and W by S. | 46|Parts of the horizon observed SSE and NNW. Wind SE. | 47|Wind SE. | 48|Parts of the horizon observed E and W. The day, which has been remarkably | |fine, has resumed towards sunset a wild, stormy aspect. Wind fresh at SE. | 49|Parts of the horizon observed E by S and W by N. This morning unusually | |clear; so that when the sun's semi-diameter only was above the horizon, | |it was painful to look at him. The horizon has a rugged appearance. | 50|Parts of the horizon observed NNE and SSW. Wind NNW, moderate. | 51|Weather remarkably clear; horizon still rugged; wind NNW, moderate. | 52|This morning cloudy, and looks rainy but the air seems clear. Parts of the | |horizon observed NW by W and SE by E. | 53|Parts of the horizon observed N by E and S by W. Instrument readjusted. | |Wind WNW. | 54|Parts of the horizon observed WSW and ENE. Wind NW. These observations | |were taken close to the low land, near the mouth of the Pei-ho. The night | |had been cold, and the morning was still keen; but unfortunately there | |was no thermometer in the boat; I suppose, however, that the air was | |about 66º At the time these sights were taken, I observed a vessel bearing | |N by W, the lower half of whose sail was inverted. | 55|Wind NW. | 56|Wind NW. Parts of the horizon observed NW and SE. During these | |observations, (53, 54, 55, 56) the vessels near the land had more or less | |an inverted image under them. | --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+ --+--------+----+-----------+------+--------+------+-----+------+------+------+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. |Then. |Differ. | | | | | | | of +-----------+----+-+---+---+---+---+ | | Long. |Sound-| No. Date. |eye. | Obs. |Tab. | + |-|Sea|Air| + | - |Baro. | Lat. | East. | ings. | --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+ |1816. |f. I| ' " |' "|' " |"| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet | 57|Aug. 10. |15 3| 5 37 |3 50|1 47| |78 |76-| 1-| |29. 70|38 50 |118 | 26 | | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | 58|Aug. 10. |15 3| 6 6 |3 50|2 16| |83 |84 | | 1 |29. 68|38 50 |118 | 27 | 59|Aug. 10. |15 3| 5 49 |3 50|1 59| |83 |84 | | 1 |29. 68|38 50 |118 | 27 | 60|Aug. 11. |15 3| 5 3 |3 50|1 13| |79 |76 | 3 | |29. 72|38 50 |118 | 26-| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1/2| 61|Aug. 11. |15 3| 5 13 |3 50|1 23| |80 |79 | 1 | |29. 73|38 50 |118 | 24 | 62|Aug. 12. |16 | 4 52 |3 56| 56| |80 |79 | 1 | |29. 79|38 50 |118 | 24 | 63|Aug. 12. |15 3| 4 35 |3 50| 45| |81 |79-| 1-| |29. 77|38 36 |117 56| 29-| | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | 1/2| 64|Aug. 13. |16 | 4 4 |3 56| 8| |79 |78 | 1 | |29. 80|38 31 |118 09| 42 | 65|Aug. 13. |16 | 4 6 |3 56| 10| |79 |78 | 1 | |29. 80|38 31 |118 09| 42 | 66|Aug. 13. |16 | 4 20 |3 56| 24| |81 |83 | | 2 |29. 80|38 21 |118 04| 44 | 67|Aug. 14. |15 3| 4 30 |3 30|1 | |78 |79 | | 1 |29. 71|38 30 |118 24| | 68|Aug. 14. |15 3| 4 25 |3 30| 55| |79-|80-| | 1 |29. 70|38 30 |118 35| 50 | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | | 69|Aug. 15. |15 3| 4 39 |3 30|1 9| |80 |79 | 1 | |29. 77|38 00 |118 35| 48 | 70|Aug. 15. |15 3| 4 53 |3 30|1 23| |81-|79 | 2-| |29. 76|38 00 |118 54| 44 | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | | 71|Aug. 15. |15 3| 5 4 |3 30|1 34| |82 |79 | 3 | |29. 70|37 54 |118 56| 40 | 72|Aug. 16. |15 3| 4 43 |3 30|1 13| |81 |76 | 5 | |29. 17|37 38 |118 57| 39 | 73|Aug. 17. |15 3| 4 38 |3 30|1 8| |80 |79-|1/2| |29. 73|37 21 |119 28| 30 | | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | 74|Aug. 17. |14 | 4 29 |3 41| 48| |81-|81 |1/2| |29. 75|37 19 |119 44| 33 | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | | 75|Aug. 17. |15 3| 4 42 |3 30|1 12| |81-|82 | |1/2|29. 70|37 21 |119 44| 30 | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | | 76|Aug. 18. |16 | 4 39 |3 56| 43| |80 |77 | 3 | |29. 76|37 29 |119 37| 48 | 77|Aug. 20. |16 | 4 20 |3 56| 24| |77 |72 | 5 | |29. 85|37 50 |120 16| | 79|Aug. 21. |15 3| 4 42 |3 50| 52| |77 |71 | 6 | |29. 80|37 52 |120 27| | 80|Aug. 21. | 4 | 2 37 |1 58| 39| |77 |79 | | 2 |29. 80|37 52 |120 27| 60 | 81|Aug. 21. |15 3| 4 6 |3 50| 18| |77 |76 | 1 | |29. 76| | | 60 | --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+ Remarks. --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+ 57|Weather very clear. Parts of the horizon observed ENE and WSW. | 58|Parts of the horizon observed N by E and S by W. | 59|The vessels in all parts of the horizon have an inverted image under them; | |this is very considerable, some having about one-third of the sail, others | |only the hull. | 60|Light wind from SE. Sky cloudy, somewhat hazy; but the horizon sharp and | |unbroken. | 61|The inversion of the vessels as conspicuous as before. Parts of the | |horizon observed ESE and WNW. | 62|A light breeze from the SE. Cloudy and close. --N. B. Instrument readjusted. | 63|Part of the horizon observed N and S. | 64|Part of the horizon observed E and W. A moderate breeze from the SW. Clear | |overhead; hazy in the horizon. | 65|Parts of the horizon observed N and S. | 66|Wind SE. Sky clear, and the horizon sharp. | 67|Light breeze from ESE. Parts observed NE and SW. | 68|Light breeze at ESE. Cloudy, with a haze in the horizon. Parts observed NE | |and SW. | 69|Parts of the horizon observed E and W. Moderate breeze from ENE. | |Remarkably clear weather. | 70|Steady moderate breeze at ENE. Very clear. Horizon sharp, and well defined. | 72|Wind at East. Sky cloudy and rather hazy. | 73|Light wind at SW. Hazy weather. | 74|Light breeze from the Northward. Weather hazy. Parts of the horizon | |observed SE and NW. | 75|Parts of the horizon observed NE by E and SW by W. | 76|Moderate breeze from East. Parts of the horizon observed WNW and ESE. | 77|The wind has been blowing hard for two days from NE; this evening it has | |lulled, and the weather has cleared off: there remains however a high | |swell. | 79|Land-wind South. Fine clear morning. | 80|Parts of the horizon observed SW by S and NE by N. | 81|The inversions which were so conspicuous this morning have been entirely | |removed since the sea breeze set in. In some distant islands there is a | |slight inversion at the ends, but very trifling. | --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+ --+--------+----+-----------+-------+-------+-------+-----+------+------+------+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. |Then. |Differ. | | | | | | | of +-----------+----+--+---+---+---+---+ | | Long. |Sound-| No. Date. |eye. | Obs. |Tab. | + | -|Sea|Air| + | - |Baro. | Lat. | East. | ings. | --+--------+----+------+----+----+--+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+ | 1816. |f. I| ' " |' "|' " | "| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet | 82|Aug. 21. |14 | 3 26 |3 41| |15|76 |75 | 1 | |29. 74| | | | 83|Aug. 21. |15 3| 3 29 |3 41| |12|76 |75 | 1 | |29. 74| | | | 84|Aug. 22. |16 | 3 52 |3 56| | 4|75 |76 | 1 | |29. 80| | | | 85|Sept. 4. |12 | 3 46 |3 25| 21| |81 |83 | | 2 |29. 86| 36 10|126 30| 56 | 86|Sept. 4. |12 | 3 42 |3 25| 17| |81 |83 | | 2 |29. 86| 36 8|126 35| 56 | 87|Sept. 5. |15 | 3 47 |3 49| | 2|79 |80 | | 1 |29. 80| 35 40|126 17| | 88|Sept. 7. |15 3| 3 33 |3 41| | 8|74 |80 | | 6 |29. 84| 34 32|126 34| | 89|Sept. 7. |15 3| 3 27 |3 41| |14|74 |80 | | 6 |29. 84| 34 32|126 34| | | 1817. | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 90|Mar. 3. |14 | 3 57 |3 41| 16| |82 |84-| | 2-|29. 74| 2 18|102 20| | | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | 91|Mar. 5. |14 8| 4 49 |3 46| 1 3| |83 |85 | | 2 |29. 73| 3 40|100 35| | 92|Mar. 5. |14 8| 4 50 |3 46| 1 4| |83 |85 | | 2 |29. 73| | | 165 | 93|Mar. 5. |14 8| 4 53 |3 46| 1 7| | | | | | | | | | 94|Mar. 8. |14 8| 4 33 |3 46| 47| |84 |84 | | |29. 86| 5 12|100 14| 120 | a)| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 94|Mar. 8. |14 8| 4 58 |3 46|1 12| |84 |82-| 1-| |29. 86| | | 120 | b)| | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | --+--------+----+------+----+----+--+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+ Remarks. --+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ 82|This and the following were observed towards sunset; they exhibit a | |considerable degree of refraction above what is usual. The sights on this | |morning in the same place gave upwards of 1' greater dip. | 83|All other circumstances the same as in No. 82. | 84|Fresh breeze from SE, with a remarkably clear sky. The horizon uncommonly | |sharp. | 85|Wind moderate from WNW. Clear weather. | 86|All other circumstances the same as in No. 85. Parts of the horizon | |observed SSW and NNE. | 87|Parts of the horizon observed WNW and ESE. | 88|The morning has been exceedingly hot before the breezes set in from sea at | |11 A. M. | 89|All other circumstances the same as in No. 89. | 90|After a very hot day. | 91|Parts of the horizon observed ESE and WNW. See further remarks under 93. | |Instruments readjusted. | 92|Parts of the horizon observed NE and SW. All other circumstances as in No. | |91. | 93|Parts of the horizon observed SSE and NNW. These three observations (Nos. | |91, 92, and 93) were made under the most favourable circumstances, and may | |be considered as shewing the accuracy which the instrument is capable of | |attaining. The sea was so perfectly smooth, that not the slightest motion | |could be detected. The horizon at all the parts observed was sharp, and | |better defined than I recollect to have seen it; and, what is not often the | |case, the opposite parts were alike in strength of light &c. The day has | |been hot, but not close, with a light breeze from the Southward. The dip is | |very great, but the observations were made with such care, that there can | |be no doubt of their accuracy. | 94|There had been a light breeze from the North in the morning, but for an | a)|hour before these sights were taken it had been calm. | 94|Nearly the same place as No. 94(a); but the other circumstances were | b)|changed, as the sea breeze at NW had set in about a quarter of an hour, | |whereas in the last instance it was calm. The above angles were taken with | |great care. The horizon sharp. Parts of the horizon observed NW and SE. | --+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ ---+--------+----+-----------+------+-------+-------+-----+------+------+------+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. | Then. |Differ. | | | | | | | of +-----------+--+---+---+---+---+---+ | | Long. |Sound-| No. | Date. |eye. | Obs. |Tab. | +| - |Sea|Air| + | - |Baro. | Lat. | East. | ings. | ---+--------+----+------+----+--+---+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+ | 1817. |f. I|' " |' "| "|' "| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet | 95|Mar. 19. |14 8| 3 51 |3 46| 5| |80 |82 | | 2 |29. 84| | | | 96|Mar. 19. |14 8| 3 48 |3 46| 2| |80 |82 | | 2 |29. 78|13 30 | 89 30| | 97|Mar. 20. |14 8| 3 48 |3 46| 2| |79-|82 | | 2-|29. 83|14 30 | 89 15| | | | | | | | |1/2| | |1/2| | | | | 98|Mar. 21. |14 8| 3 48 |3 46| 2| |80 |82 | | 2 |29. 84|15 00 | 89 00| | 99|Mar. 22. |14 8| 3 39 |3 46| | 7|79 |79-| |1/2|29. 84|16 00 | 88 30| | | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | 100|Mar. 23. |14 8| 3 47 |3 46| 1| |78-|79 | |1/2|29. 80|17 00 | 88 00| | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | | 101|Mar. 24. |14 8| 3 53 |3 46| 7| |78 |80 | | 2 |29. 78|17 30 | 88 15| | | | | | | | | | | | | |South. | | | 102|July 22 |15 | 3 36 |3 49| | 13|71 |72 | | 1 | |34 0 | 26 | 400 | 103|July 24. |15 | 3 16 |3 49| | 33|59 |62 | | 3 | |34 25 | 24 56| 372 | 104|July 25. |15 | 3 36 |3 49| | 13|62 |63 | | 1 | |35 S | 23 45| 462 | 105|July 26. |15 | 3 30 |3 49| | 19|58 |60 | | 2 | |35 S | 23 | 462 | 106|July 26. |15 | 3 30 |3 40| | 19|60 |63 | | 3 | |34 52 | 22 23| 420 | 107|July 27. |15 | 2 55 |3 49| | 54|56 |59 | | 3 | |35 | 21 | 24 | 108|July 27. |15 | 2 47 |3 49| |1 2|56 |59 | | 3 | |35 | 21 | 240 | 109|July 28. |15 | 3 17 |3 19| | 32|58 |64 | | 6 | |34 58 | 20 15| | 110|July 28. |15 | 2 54 |3 49| | 55|59 |64 | | 5 | |34 57 | 20 15| 222 | ---+--------+----+------+----+--+---+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+ Remarks. ---+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+ 95|The wind steady and moderate at NE; atmosphere clear; horizon well defined;| |a long swell from SW. This swell, which was not high, produced an obvious | |effect on the dip angle, as observed, the two horizons alternately | |separating and overlapping; this change was however so slight that I have | |not been able to measure it. | 96|All other circumstances as in Nov. 95. Parts of the horizon observed NE | |and SW. | 97|During the night there has been a light breeze from the East; at this | |moment it is freshening up a little. The atmosphere is clear; horizon | |sharp; a long low swell from SW, as yesterday. | 98|It has been calm, or nearly so, during the night; occasionally a light air | |from SE and S. All circumstances favorable. | 99|During the night there has been a light wind from SW. The weather is more | |hazy than when the wind was from the Eastward, and the horizon not so | |distinctly marked; but the above sights are good. There is still a swell | |from SW, which causes some little uncertainty as to the exact moment of | |taking the angle. | 100|In the night there has been a light breeze from W by S. Weather hazy; but | |the horizon sharper than yesterday morning. | 101|During the night almost calm; just now a light air from the NE. Parts of | |the horizon observed NE and SW. | 102|Fine fair clear weather, but with so high a swell as to render the | |observation difficult. Wind light from N, after having been blowing fresh. | 103|Light breezes from the North-eastward; smooth water, and a clear cool air; | |hazy about the land. The distance from the South cost of Africa was about | |8 or 9 leagues. All circumstances seem favourable. No current; we have | |probably been too near shore for it. | 104|Light breeze from the SW, with a long swell. Hazy weather. The wind has | |been from the West for 24 hours; at first blowing hard, but latterly | |moderate, the current setting us to the SW about a mile an hour. A very | |heavy dew falling this evening. Parts of the horizon observed East and | |West. | 105|Moderate breeze from the NE; air hazy; long high swell from the Westward. | |From observations by stars and chronometers, it has been ascertained that | |there is not the least current. Distance from the South coast of Africa | |about 50 miles. A high range in sight to the Northward. Parts of the | |horizon observed North and South. | 106|A light breeze from the NE; air hazy; a long swell from the Westward. | |About 50 miles distant from the land. | 107|The wind has been moderate from the land all night; air hazy; weather raw; | |a very heavy dew falling all night. The land in sight to the Northward, | |distant about 40 miles, is inverted from one end to the other. | 108|Parts of the horizon observed NNE and SSW. All other circumstances as in | |No. 107. | 109|Parts of the horizon observed NE and SW. Cape Lagullas North 2 or 3 | |leagues. A light breeze from the Eastward. Air hazy. | 110|Parts of the horizon observed SE and NW. Cape Lagullas due North, distant | |6 or 8 miles. Calm all day; sky clear; and weather hazy. | | | |N. B. On the 29th and 30th of July we were off the Cape, but the weather | |was so bad as to prevent any sights being taken. | ---+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+ METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL, FROM JULY TO NOVEMBER 1816, WHILE THE SHIPS WERE IN THE YELLOW AND JAPANSEAS. -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- | | Thermom. | | | | | +----+----+ | | | Hour. |Barom. |Air. |Sea. | Winds. | Lat. | Long. | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | South | | |_Sunday, July 14, 1816. _ 2 | | | | SSW | | | 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued quite 4 | | | | | | |light during the night, with 5 | | | | | | |one or two slight showers, but 6 | | | | | | |no squalls. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30i. 01h| | | SW | | |About 8 A. M. The wind 9 | | | | | | |hauled to about SW, from 10 | | | | | | |which quarter it blew a light 11 | | | | | N | E |breeze. Noon. |30 . 01 | 83º| 84º| |22º 07'|115º 26'| -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | | Coast of | 3 | | | | | China. | 4 |29 . 94 | | | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 98 | | | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | SW | | |_Monday, July 15, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |The same winds during the 4 | | | | | | |night. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 | | | | | | | 9 | | | | | | |Found that we had been 10 |29 . 89 | | |SW by W| | |driven by a current, 11 | | | | | N | E |setting about E by N, 2-1/2 Noon. |29 . 89 | 82 | 83 | WNW |22 . 43 |117 . 30 |miles an hour. -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | West | | 2 | | | | | SE Coast | 3 | | | | | of China. |About 3 o'clock it became 4 | | | | | |extremely hazy; the sun set 5 | | | | | |in fiery clouds, and a blood 6 | | | | WSW | |red tint was given to the low 7 | | | | | |clouds all round the horizon. 8 |29 . 76 | | | SW | | 9 | | | | | | 10 |29 . 80 | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | SW | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, July 16, 1816. _ 3 | | | | WSW | | | 4 | | | | | | |During this day there has 5 | | | | | | |been a moderate breeze from 6 | | | | West | | |the SSW, with a thick haze, 7 | | | | | | |and dew at night. 8 |29 . 74 | | | WSW | | | 9 | | | | | | |Soundings from 32 to 26 10 | | | | SW | | |fathoms: dark fine sand. 11 |29 . 83 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 74 | 83 | | |24 . 37 |118 . 50 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | | Straits of |We have seen no land all 3 | | | | | Formosa, |day, having ran along nearly 4 | | | | | China. |parallel with the coast 5 | | | | | |of about 30 or 40 about 6 |29 . 75 | | | | |Chusan, at the distance 7 | | | | | |leagues. 8 |29 . 78 | 80 | 79 | SW | | | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 76 | 80 | 79 | | | | | |-1/2| | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, July 17, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 74 | 80 | 80 | SSW | | |The weather is remarkably | | |-1/2| | | |hazy, and there is a very 5 | | | | | | |disagreeable sea coming after 6 |29 . 76 | | | | | |us. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 80 | 82 | 81 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 81 | | | SW | | | 11 |29 . 80 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 81 | 82 | 80 |SW by S| 26 . 1 |122 . 6 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 |29 . 80 | | | SSW | | 2 | | | | | Straits of |At night hazy with a heavy 3 | | | | | Formosa, |dew; soundings 52 fathoms. 4 |29 . 76 | 82 | 81 | | China. |To-day we quitted the Straits 5 |29 . 76 | | | | |of Formosa, and stood towards 6 | | | | | |the Yellow Sea. Last evening 7 |29 . 76 | | | | |we were among a cluster of 8 |29 . 79 | 82 | 80 | South | |large islands near the coast 9 | | | | | |of China, about two-thirds of 10 | | | | | |the way through the Straits 11 | | | | | |of Formosa. Mid. |29 . 80 | 81 | 80 |S by W | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | SW | | |_Thursday, July 18, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |The wind during all this day 4 | | | | | | |has been from the South 5 |29 . 78 | | | | | |Westward. 6 | | | | | | | From noon till midnight it 7 | | | | | | |continued fresh and steady, 8 |29 . 80 | 81 | 80 | WSW | | |after which it lulled. 9 | | | | | | |Weather very hazy, and at 10 |29 . 86 | | | SW | | |night a heavy dew falling. 11 | | | | | N | | Depth of water from 35 to Noon. |29 . 80 | 81 | 79 | SSW |26 . 21 | |37 fathoms. -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | SW | | 2 |29 . 80 | | | |To the northward| 3 | | | | |of the Straits | 4 |29 . 80 | 81 | 80 |SW by W|of Formosa. | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 76 | | | SW | |No land seen to-day, being 7 | | | | | |about 30 leagues off shore, 8 |29 . 76 | 81 | 79 | SSW | |to the Northward of the 9 | | | | | |Straits of Formosa. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, July 19, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 78 | 79 | 78 |S by W | | |During this day there has 5 | | | | | | |been a moderate breeze from 6 |29 . 75 | | | | | |the SSW, with a thick haze 7 | | | | | | |and dew at night. 8 |29 . 78 | 78 | 78 | SSW | | | 9 | | | | | | |Soundings from 32 to 26 10 |29 . 78 | | | SW | | |fathoms: fine dark sand. 11 |29 . 78 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 78 | 78 | 79 |SW by W|30 . 54 |123 . 50 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 75 | | | |Off the Islands | 3 | | | | |of Chusan 30 or | 4 |29 . 72 | 80 | 80 | SSW |40 leagues. | 5 | | | | | |We have seen no land this 6 |29 . 72 | | | | |day, having ran along nearly 7 | | | | | |parallel with the coast about 8 |29 . 72 | 79 | 80 | South | |Chusan, at the distance of 9 | | | | | |about 30 or 40 leagues. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 74 | 80 | 79 | | | -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | |S by W | | |_Saturday, July 20, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |Light SSW winds, with thick 4 |29 . 69 | 79 | 76 | | | |haze and dew at night. Regular 5 | | | | | | |soundings 20 fathoms: mud and 6 |29 . 70 | | | | | |black sand. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 79 | 77 | South | | | 9 | | |-1/2| | | | 10 |29 . 72 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 70 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 70 | 80 | 78 |S by W |32 . 35 |123 . 50 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | |To-day we are about halfway 2 |29 . 70 | | |SW by W| Entering the |between the SE part of 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |Corea and the Chusan islands, 4 |29 . 66 | 80 | 77 | WSW | |each being about 50 leagues 5 | | | | | |distant; the mouth of the 6 |29 . 68 | | | | |great river Yang-tse-kiang is 7 | | | | | |nearly W 50 leagues, and the 8 |29 . 66 | 79 | 77 |SW by W| |promontory of Shan-tung N by 9 | | | | | |W 100 leagues. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 69 | 78 | 77 | WSW | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | |W by N | | |_Sunday, July 21, 1816. _ 3 | | | | NNW | | | 4 | | | | | | |The wind after noon yesterday 5 | | | | | | |freshened up towards sunset 6 | | | | | | |from the WSW, and in the 7 | | | | | | |night it hauled to the NW 8 |29 . 76 | 75 | 76 |N by W | | |gradually, and so to North; 9 | | | | | | |about noon it became quite 10 |29 . 78 | | | | | |light as it drew to the 11 |29 . 79 | | | | N | E |northward. Noon. |29 . 79 | 76 | 77 | North |33 . 55 | 124 | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+The weather has become quite 1 |29 . 78 | | | | |clear since the change of the 2 |29 . 80 | | | | Yellow Sea. |wind. 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 78 | 77 | 77 | NNW | | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | |Land in sight to-day about 6 |29 . 79 | | |E by N | |East from us, supposed to be 7 | | | | | |the islands off the South end 8 |29 . 79 | 77 | 77 | East | |of Corea. | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | |E by S | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | SE | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | SSE | | |_Monday, July 22, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |In the night there was a 4 |9 . 69 | 75 | 77 |S by W | | |breeze from the SSW with 5 | | | | | | |very thick weather, and 6 |29 . 72 | | | | | |much lightning all round. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 71 | 77 | 76 |SW by W| | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 71 | | | SW | | | 11 |29 . 75 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 75 | 78 | 77 | SSW |34 . 44 |123 . 55 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 74 | | | SW | Yellow Sea. |After noon it fell calm till 3 | | | | | |about 6 P. M. When there came 4 |29 . 75 | 79 | 79 | Calm | |light breeze from the westward 5 | | | | | |which hauled to north, and 6 |29 . 73 | | | NNE | |about morning fell nearly calm. 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 73 | 76 | 77 |N by E | |Regular soundings from 44 to 9 | | | | | |43 fathoms: mud. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 74 | 75 | 76 | North | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | |N by W | | |_Tuesday, July 23, 1816. _ 2 | | | | West | | | 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 76 | 75 | 76 | Calm | | |About 8 this morning a 5 | | | | | | |breeze sprung at South, which 6 | | | | | | |lasted during the day, 7 | | | | | | |freshening very gradually--sky 8 |29 . 78 | 77 | 77 | SSE | | |clear. 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 80 | | | SE | | |Regular soundings 43 11 | | | | | N | E |fathoms: mud. Noon. |29 . 80 | 79 | 78 | South |35 . 06 |123 . 06 | -----+-------+----+--- +-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 79 | | | | Yellow Sea. | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 79 | 81 | 78 | SSW | | 5 | | | | | |A moderate breeze from the 6 |29 . 78 | | | | |Southward, and fine clear 7 | | | | | |weather. 8 |29 . 76 | 78 | 77 | SE | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | SSE | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 77 | 77 | 76 |S by E | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | SSE | | |_Wednesday, July 24, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |The wind during these 24 4 | | | | | | |hours has been moderate 5 | | | | | | |from the Southward. --Quite 6 | | | | | | |clear, not the least 7 | | | | | | |appearance of fog. 8 |29 . 75 | 77 | 76 |SE by S| | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 |29 . 77 | | | | | | 10 |29 . 82 | | |S by E | | | 11 |29 . 86 | | | NW | N | E | Noon. |29 . 88 | 75 | 78 |NW by W|36 . 27 |123 . 01 |A very curious assemblage -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+of clouds passed over us at 1 | | | | | |noon from the NW. 2 |29 . 70 | | |E by S | Yellow Sea. | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 69 | 76 | 74 |SE by E| | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 70 | | | SSE | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 75 | 72 |S by E | |Soundings 40, 38, and 37 9 | | | | | |fathoms: brown mud. 10 | | | |S by W | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | SW | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, July 25, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 70 | 70 | 71 | SSW | | |The wind during the night 5 | | | | | | |hung to the SW, with rain 6 | | | | | | |occasionally. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 71 | 66 | Calm | | |After daybreak the 9 | | | | WNW | | |weather cleared up, and the 10 |29 . 70 | | |NW by W| | |breeze fell gradually as we 11 |29 . 70 | | | NW | N | E |rounded the NE point of the Noon. |29 . 70 | 74 | 73 | |37 . 32 |122 . 37 |promontory of Shan-tung. -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 70 | | | East |Nearly on the | 3 | | | | |meridian of the | 4 |29 . 66 | 77 | 72 | SE |NE point of | 5 | | | | |Shan-tung | 6 |29 . 66 | | | SSE |promontory, | 7 | | | | |Yellow Sea. |In the forenoon it felt 8 |29 . 61 | 76 | 72 | | |calm, and towards sunset a 9 | | | | | |breeze sprung up from ESE 10 | | | | | |and SE which lasted during 11 | | | | | |the night. Mid |29 . 61 | 75 | 75 |S by W | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | |S by W | | |_Friday, July 26, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | South | | |As the day broke, the 4 |29 . 61 | 74 | 72 | SSE | | |breeze which had been light 5 | | | | | | |during the night, freshened 6 | | | | | | |up, and the weather, hitherto 7 | | | | South | | |clear, became suddenly quite 8 |29. 61 | 74 | 72 | SSW | | |foggy; this however lasted 9 | | | | | | |only half an hour, and we 10 |29. 62 | | | | | |enjoyed during the day the 11 |29. 62 | | | | N | E |same fine clear weather, Noon. |29. 62 | 74 | 72 |S by W |38 . 07 |122 . 00 |with the exception indeed of -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+one thunder squall, which 1 | | | | SSW | |lasted only a few minutes, 2 |29. 62 | | | SW | |and passed over, going towards 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |the SE. 4 |29. 59 | 76 | 66 | WNW | | 5 | | | | | |N. B. This was the only 6 |29. 60 | | |SE by S| |instance of fog during the 7 | | | | SE | |six weeks that the ships were 8 |29. 60 | 73 | 68 | | |in the Yellow Sea. | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29. 60 | 75 | 74 |SE by E| | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | South | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, July 27, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | SSE | | |During the whole of this 5 | | | | | | |day we had a fresh breeze 6 | | | | | | |from East and ESE, with dark 7 | | | | | | |cloudy weather. As we drew 8 |29. 69 | 77 | 77 | SE | | |across the Gulf of Petchelee | | |-1/2| | |we had the wind much stronger. 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29. 69 | | | East | | | 11 |29. 70 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29. 70 | 76 | 76 | ENE |38 . 52 |117 . 49 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29. 68 | | |E by S | | 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |We anchored at seven 4 |29. 61 | 76 | 77 |E by N | |o'clock in 3-1/2 fathoms water. 5 | | | | | | 6 |29. 61 | | | East | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29. 80 | 77 | 82 |E by N | | 9 | | | | | |In the night it blew hard 10 |29. 84 | | |SE by E| |from the East, and at sunrise 11 | | | | | |we had a violent thunder Mid. | | | | | |storm. -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+------------------------------ 1 | | | |SE by E| | |_Sunday, July 28, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |After the thunder storm had 4 |29 . 70 | 80 | 80 |SE by S| | |passed the weather cleared up, | | |-1/2| | | |and became quite fine. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 63 | 82 | 82 | SW | | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 61 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 62 | | | | N | | Noon. |29 . 60 | 83 | 82 |W by N |38. 52. 42| | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+ 1 | | | |N by E | | 2 |29 . 60 | | | North | Pei-ho, |During the day the breeze 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |has been moderate, with fine 4 |29 . 61 | 81 | 82 |E by S | |clear weather. 5 | | | | SSE | | 6 |29 . 62 | | |S by E | | 7 | | | | | | 8 | | | | | | 9 |29 . 61 | 83 | 82 | South | | 10 | | | |S by E | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 60 | 80 | 82 | SW | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | SW | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, July 29, 1816. _ 3 | | | | WSW | | | 4 |29 . 59 | 79 | 81 | NNW | | |Light breezes and cloudy | | |-1/2| | | |weather. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 60 | 82 | 82 |E by N | | | 9 | | | | | | |Towards noon it fell calm. 10 | | | | | | | 11 |29 . 62 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 60 | 82 | 84 | NE |38 . 56 |118 . 00 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 59 | | | SE | |At anchor off the mouth of the 3 | | | | | |Pei-ho river, Yellow Sea. 4 |29 . 53 | 83 | 84 | ESE | | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 55 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 55 | 82 | 82 | SE | |During the night a moderate | |-1/2| | | |breeze from the Eastward. 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 63 | 80 | 82 |SE by E| | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, July 30, 1816. _ 2 | | | |SE by E| | | 3 | | | | | | |During this day there has 4 | | | | | | |been a light air from the 5 | | | | | | |Eastward, and fine clear 6 | | | | East | | |weather. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 50 | 82 | 82 | ENE | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 63 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 63 | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 62 | 81 | |E by N | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 65 | | | |At anchor off | 3 | | | | |the mouth of the| 4 |29 . 68 | 81 | 84 |SE by E|Pei-ho, Yellow | 5 | | | | |Sea. | 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 61 | 82 | 83 | | | | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | |At midnight it fell calm. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 69 | 83 | 82 | Calm | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, July 31, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |This morning there is a 5 | | | | | | |light air from the eastward, 6 | | | | | | |inclining to calm. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 62 | 88 | 82 | SW | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 70 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 70 | 84 | 85 | WNW | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 70 | | | ESE |At anchor off | 3 | | | | |the mouth of the| 4 |29 . 61 | 83 | 86 SE |Pei-ho, Yellow | 5 | | | | |Sea. | 6 |29 . 71 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 72 | 82 | 82 | SSE | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | |Towards night the breeze 10 | | | | | |freshened up from the SE. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 84 | 83 | 82 | South | | | | |-1/2| | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 1, 1816. _ 2 | | | | SW | | | 3 | | | | | | |During the night there has 4 |29 . 69 | 83 | 84 | West | | |been a fresh breeze from the 5 | | | | | | |SW, with rain and lightning. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 81 | 82 |SW by S| | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 69 | | | SSW | | |Towards noon it became more 11 | | | | | | |moderate. Noon. |29 . 70 | 81 | 82 |SW by S| | | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 63 | | | |At anchor off | 3 | | | | |the mouth of the| 4 |29 . 66 | 82 | 82 |S by E |Pei-ho, Yellow | 5 | | | | |Sea. | 6 | | | | SE | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 66 | 80 | 82 |S by E | |And at night it was very 9 | | | | SSW | |squally, with rain. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 65 | 79 | 82 | SW | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | |W by S | | |_Friday, August 2, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |During the whole of the night 5 | | | | | | |it rained. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 62 | 78 | 82 | | | |Towards morning it blew fresh | |-1/2| | | | |from the Westward. 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 |29 . 68 | | | SSW | | | Noon. |29 . 67 | 79 | 82 | | | | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | |S by W | | 2 |29 . 63 | | | SE |At anchor off |During the whole of the day 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|it has been very hazy with 4 |29 . 68 | 78 | 83 | East |Pei-ho, Yellow |slight showers of rain. | |-1/2| | |Sea. | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 63 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 65 | 78 | 82 | SSE | | | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | |Midnight, fresh breezes and 10 | | | | | |clear. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 70 | 79 | 82 | East | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, August 3, 1816. _ 2 | | | |E by N | | | 3 | | | | | | |Fresh breezes and cloudy 4 |29 . 72 | 77 | 81 | NE | | |weather. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 84 | 77 | 81 | ENE | | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | |Strong breezes and cloudy, 10 | | | | | | |with slight showers of rain 11 |29 . 84 | | | NE | | |at intervals. Noon. |29 . 82 | 79 | 82 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 80 | | | |At anchor off | 3 | | | | |the mouth of the| 4 |29 . 80 | 76 | 82 |NE by N|Pei-ho, Yellow | 5 | | | | |Sea. | 6 |29 . 84 | | | | |Towards evening it cleared 7 | | | | | |up. 8 |29 . 90 | 76 | 80 | ENE | | 9 | | | | | |A short swell from the NE. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | |Moderate breezes and cloudy. Mid. | | 75 | 80 |NE by N| | | | |-1/2| | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | North | | |_Sunday, August 4, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |Light airs and fine weather. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | NW | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 69 | 78 | 80 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 70 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 70 | | | | | | Noon |29 . 70 | 78 | 81 | West | | | | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | NW | |Cloudy, with slight showers 2 |29 . 68 | | | WNW |At anchor off |of rain at intervals. 3 | | | | |the mouth of the| 4 |29 . 68 | 78 | 81 | WSW |Pei-ho, Yellow | 5 | | | | |Sea. | 6 |29 . 68 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 68 | 78 | 80 | West | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 68 | 77 | 81 | SW | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Monday, August 5, 1816. _ 2 | | | |W by S | | | 3 | | | | | | |Moderate breezes and cloudy. 4 |29 . 68 | 77 | 80 | WSW | | | 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 68 | 78 | 80 |W by N | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 69 | | | | | |In the forenoon we had a 11 | | | | | | |slight shower. Noon. |29 . 68 | 78 | 81 | SW | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 68 | | |W by S |At anchor off |Moderate breezes and cloudy. 3 | | | | |the mouth of the| 4 |29 . 66 | 81 | 81 | WSW |Pei-ho, Yellow | | | |-1/2| |Sea. | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 65 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 64 | 81 | 82 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | |Light breezes and cloudy. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 59 | | |W by S | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | SW | | |_Tuesday, August 6, 1816. _ 3 | | | | NE | | | 4 |29 . 65 | 71 | 79 | North | | |Alight breeze from the SW. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | |Towards 4 A. M. The wind 7 | | | | | | |shifted round to NW, and 8 |29 . 64 | 73 | 77 | NNW | | |freshened up. | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 64 | | | | | | 11 | | | | WSW | | | Noon. |29 . 63 | 76 | 81 |SW by W| | |Noon, a moderate breeze and | | | | | | |fine weather. -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 64 | 83 | 81 | SSE |At anchor off | | |-1/2|-1/2| |the mouth of the| 3 | | | | |Pei-ho, Yellow |After noon the breeze, which 4 |29 . 60 | 82 | 81 | |Sea. |had hauled round to SE, 5 | | | | | |freshened up considerably. 6 |29 . 62 | | | | | 7 | | | | | |Towards sunset dark slaty 8 |29 . 66 | 79 | 82 | SE | |clouds drew over us from the 9 | | | | | |land, moving in a contrary 10 | | | | | |direction from that of the wind 11 | | | | | |which we had. Mid. |29 . 66 | 80 | 81 |S by E | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, August 7, 1816. _ 2 | | | | South | | | 3 | | | | | | |At sunrise it was moderate, 4 | | | |E by N | | |but about nine o'clock the 5 | | | | | | |breeze freshened, and towards 6 | | | | | | |noon blew fresh from the 7 | | | | | | |Eastward. 8 |29 . 67 | 79 | 81 | East | | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 95 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |30 . 00 | 77 | 80 |E by N | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 00 | | | |At anchor off | 3 | | | |the mouth of the| 4 |29 . 92 | 76 | 80 | NE |Pei-ho, Yellow |Fresh breezes and cloudy. 5 | | | | |Sea. | 6 |29 . 82 | | | | |Towards night it moderated. 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 81 | 73 | 78 | | | | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | |At midnight a moderate breeze. 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 8, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 65 | 71 | 78 | North | | |Moderate and cloudy. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 66 | 73 | 77 | NNW | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 67 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 68 | 76 | 81 | | | |Moderate and fine. -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 66 | | | NNW |At anchor off | 3 | | | | |the mouth of the| 4 |29 . 65 | 81 | | |Pei-ho, Yellow | | |-1/2| | |Sea. | 5 | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 79 | 80 | NE | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | |Light airs. Mid. |29 . 71 | 77 | 79 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 9, 1816. _ 2 | | | |N by E | | | 3 | | | | | | |Light airs and cloudy. 4 |29 . 73 | 75 | 77 | NW | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 74 | 76 | 79 | | | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | |2 A. M. A moderate breeze 11 | | | | | | |sprung up at NW. Noon. |29 . 77 | 80 | 79 | ESE | | | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 76 | | | |At anchor off | 3 | | | | |the mouth of the| 4 |29 . 70 | 79 | 77 | SSE |Pei-ho, Yellow | | | |-1/2| |Sea. | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 70 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | | | | |Moderate breezes. 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 70 | 76 | 78 | NW | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | NW | | |_Saturday, August 10, 1816_ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | WNW | | |Moderate breezes and clear. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 60 | 75 | 77 | NW | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 70 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 70 | | | | | |Calm and fine weather. Noon. |29 . 70 | 81 | 79 | Calm | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 69 | | | |At anchor off | 3 | | | | |the mouth of the| 4 |29 . 67 | 79 | 78 | SSE |Pei-ho, Yellow | | | |-1/2| |Sea. | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 65 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 64 | 76 | 78 | SW | | 9 | | | | | | 10 |29 . 72 | | | | | Moderate and cloudy. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 74 | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, August 11, 1816. _ 3 | | | | SE | | | 4 |29 . 70 | 75 | 78 | | | | 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | |SE by S| | | 8 |29 . 70 | 76 | 79 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 75 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 74 | 79 | 80 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ Moderate and clear weather. 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 74 | | | SE |Off the River | 3 | | | | |Pei-ho, Yellow | 4 |29 . 72 | 79 | 78 | |Sea. | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 72 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 72 | | | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | 75 | 79 | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 75 | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, August 12, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | 75 | 78 | SE | | |Moderate breezes and cloudy. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 78 | 79 | 78 | | | | 9 | | | | | | |Moderate breezes from the 10 | | | | | | |SE, with fine clear weather: 11 | | | | | N | E |lightning at times. Noon. |29 . 79 | 79 | 79 |S by E |38 . 38 |117 . 44 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 79 | | | | Gulf of | 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. | 4 |29 . 78 | 81 | 82 | | | 5 | | | | | |Moderate and fine weather. 6 |29 . 78 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 78 | 79 | 81 | SE | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | |Moderate breezes and clear, 10 | | | | | |with lightning. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 80 | 79 | 80 |SE by S| | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, August 13, 1816. _ 3 | | | |S by W | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | |In the evening we had fresh 6 | | | | | | |breezes from the SE--sky 7 | | | | | | |assuming a threatening 8 |29 . 79 | 89 | 79 | SSW | | |appearance. Towards midnight 9 | | | | | | |it moderated, at which time it 10 |29 . 80 | | | | | |fell calm. 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 80 | 83 | 81 | SE | 38 . 34| 118 . 08| -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 74 | | | | Gulf of | 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. | 4 |29 . 77 | 80 | 80 | ESE | | | |-1/2| | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 80 | | | SE | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 79 | 79 | 78 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | |SE by S| | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | Calm | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | |SE by S| | |_Wednesday, August 14, 1816. _ 3 | | | | SE | | | 4 |29 . 70 | 77 | 78 | WSW | | |After midnight a moderate 5 | | | | | | |breeze sprung up from the SE. 6 |29 . 71 | 79 | 78 | South | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 72 | 79 | 78 | SSE | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 72 | | | | | |About 4 A. M. It shifted 11 | | | | | N | E |more to the Southward, and Noon. |29 . 74 | 79 | 78 | |38 . 29 |118. 20 |remained so the rest of the day. | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ Weather fine. 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 71 | | |S by E | Gulf of | 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. | 4 |29 . 74 | 80 | 80 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 70 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 72 | 79 | 80 |E by N | | 9 | | | |E by S | | 10 | | | | ESE | |At midnight the wind drew 11 | | | | | |round to the Eastward. Mid. |29 . 75 | 76 | 79 |E by S | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 15, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | 76 | 79 | SE | | |Moderate and fine weather. | | |-1/2| | | | 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | East | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 77 | 78 | 80 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 |29 . 79 | | | | N | E |During the day the wind Noon. |29 . 78 | 78 | 81 | | 37. 58 | 118. 49 |remained at East and ENE, | |-1/2| | | | ||blowing a moderate breeze. -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 76 | | | | Gulf of | 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. | 4 |29 . 74 | 80 | 82 | ENE | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 74 | | | | | 7 | | | | | |Towards night it freshened 8 |29 . 76 | 78 | | | |up, and remained quite steady. 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 86 | 77 | 80 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 16, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |To-day the wind continued at 5 | | | | | | |East, the same as yesterday. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 79 | 79 | 81 |E by N | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | |E by S | | | 11 |29 . 80 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 80 | 79 | 81 |E by N | 37 . 30| 118. 57 | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | |E by S | | 2 |29 . 74 | | | | Gulf of | 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |In the evening it became 4 |29 . 74 | 80 | 81 | ENE | |squally, with rain. 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 74 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 74 | 79 | 80 SE by S| | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | |Towards midnight the wind 10 | | | | | |hauled to the Southward. 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | |S by W | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | S by W| | | 2 | | | | SSW | | |_Saturday, August 17, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 74 | 78 | 80 |SW by S| | |To-day we have had a breeze | |-1/2| | | | |from the SW. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 |29 . 74 | | | | | | 8 | | | | | | | 9 |29 . 74 | 79 | 84 | SW | | | | |-1/2| | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 |29 . 74 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 75 | 81 | 81 | | 37 . 20| 119. 33 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 74 | | | | Gulf of | 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |During the afternoon the 4 | | | | | |wind shifted to the Eastward, 5 | | | | | |where it remained, and blew a 6 |29 . 70 | | | | |steady breeze. 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 79 | 80 | East | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 71 | 79 | 80 |E by S | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | East | | |_Sunday, August 18, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 72 | 79 | 80 |E by N | | |After midnight we had a | |-1/2| | | | |moderate breeze from the 5 | | | | | | |Eastward, and at 4 A. M. It 6 | | | | | | |freshened up at ENE, where it 7 | | | | | | |continued until the evening, at 8 |29 . 80 | 79 | 80 | | | |which time it shifted to the 9 | | | | | | |SE, with rain. 10 |29 . 81 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 80 | 79 | 79 | | 37 . 47| 119 . 37| | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | |NE by E| | 2 |29 . 82 | | | | Gulf of | 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |At eight it was nearly calm. 4 |29 . 88 | 78 | 79 | ENE | | | |-1/2| | | | 5 | | | | | |About nine a breeze sprung 6 |29 . 82 | | | | |up from the Eastward, 7 | | | |SE by S| |accompanied by rain. 8 |29 . 90 | 78 | 78 | Calm | | 9 | | | | | | 10 |29 . 98 | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 98 | 78 | 78 | East | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | NNE | | |_Monday, August 19, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |A light air. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 98 | 78 | 78 | ENE | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 94 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 92 | | | | N | E |Towards noon the breeze Noon. |29 . 92 | 74 | 77 | NE | 37. 40| 119. 44 |freshened up at North-easterly, | | |-1/2| | | |where it continued all day, and -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+blew rather fresh, with a short 1 | | | | | |swell. 2 |29 . 92 | | | | | 3 | | | | | Gulf of | 4 |29 . 92 | 75 | 77 | | Pe-che-lee. | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 94 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 99 | 74 | 76 |NE by N| | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, August 20, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 95 | 76 | 78 | N by E| | |During the night it blew a 5 | | | | | | |steady fresh breeze from NNE, 6 | | | | | | |in which quarter it continued 7 | | | | | | |all this day. 8 |30 . 00 | 76 | 77 | NNE | | | | | |-1/2| | | |The sky having a threatening 9 | | | | | | |appearance. 10 |30 . 02 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |30 . 03 | 75 | | | 37 . 46| 120 . 08| -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | |Towards the evening moderated. 2 |30 . 00 | | | | | 3 | | | | | Gulf of | 4 |29 . 90 | 74 | 78 | | Pe-che-lee. | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 90 | | | | | 7 | | | | | |Near midnight the wind came 8 |29 . 90 | 74 | 77 |NE by N| |round to the SW, and blew a | | |-1/2| | |moderate breeze. 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | SW | | |_Wednesday, August 21, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |The early part of the day the 4 | | | | | | |wind has been moderate from the 5 | | | | SSW | | |Southward. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 80 | 74 | 77 |S by W | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | |About noon it died away, but 11 |29 . 80 | | | | N | E |shortly after a breeze sprung Noon. |29 . 80 | 79 | 77 | Calm | 37 . 51| 120 . 33|up from the Eastward, and blew -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+pretty steady from that quarter 1 | | | | | |till the evening, when it 2 |29 . 78 | | | East | Gulf of |hauled round to the SE. 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. | 4 |29 . 76 | 76 | 77 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 76 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 74 | 75 | 77 |SE by S| | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 82 | 74 | 73 |S by E | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 22, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 80 | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | |During the early part of the 6 | | | | | | |day we had a moderate breeze 7 | | | | | | |from the SE. 8 |29 . 80 | 77 | 78 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 80 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 74 | 80 | 78 | SE | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 74 | | | | Off Cheatow, |After noon it hauled to the 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |Southward. 4 |29 . 74 | 78 | 78 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 72 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 72 | 77 | 78 | SSE | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 23, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind has 4 |29 . 70 | 78 | 78 | NE | | |been moderate, and steady 5 | | | | | | |from the Southward. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 80 | 78 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 72 | 81 | 78 | | | | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | |SE by E| At anchor in |In the forenoon it veered to 3 | | | | | Cheatow Bay, |the NE, and towards night to 4 |29 . 70 | 80 | 78 | SE | Yellow Sea. |the Southward. 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 68 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 66 | 79 | 78 | Calm | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 66 | 77 | 78 | South | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | South | | |_Saturday, August 24, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 70 | 77 | 78 | | | |During the morning the wind 5 | | | | | | |was steady from the Southward. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 68 | 78 | 78 | S by E| | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 70 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 68 | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 68 | 79 | 78 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 |29 . 68 | | | | | 2 |29 . 66 | | | | Che-a-tow, | 3 |29 . 66 | | | | Yellow Sea. | 4 |29 . 66 | 79 | 78 | | |Towards night the wind hauled 5 |29 . 64 | | | | |to the Eastward, blowing a 6 |29 . 64 | | | | |moderate breeze, and steady. 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 62 | 78 | 78 | East | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 62 | 78 | 77 | E by S| | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Sunday, August 25, 1816. _ 2 | | | | E by S| | | 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued to blow 4 |29 . 74 | | | | | |from the NE quarter all the 5 | | | | | | |forenoon. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 64 | 78 | 78 | N by E| | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | NE | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 66 | 79 | 78 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | NE | Che-a-tow, | 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |In the afternoon it hauled 4 | | | | N by E| |more to the Northward. 5 | | | | | | 6 | | | | E by S| | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 64 | 78 | 77 | | |At midnight it hauled to the | | |-1/2| | |SW, with fine clear weather. 9 | | | | | |A heavy dew falling. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | SW | | |_Monday, August 26, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 56 | 77 | 77 | WNW | | |After midnight it continued | | |-1/2| | | |to blow a moderate breeze from 5 | | | | | | |the SW. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 56 | 78 | 77 |W by N | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 |29 . 56 | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 56 | 79 | 78 | | | | | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | |About 4 A. M. It shifted to 2 |29 . 64 | | | | Che-a-tow, |the NW, from which quarter it 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |blew the whole of the day. 4 |29 . 52 | 79 | 78 | NW | | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 52 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 54 | 79 | 78 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 56 | 78 | 78 | | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, August 27, 1816. _ 2 | | | | NW | | | 3 | | | | | | |Towards noon the wind hauled 4 |29 . 58 | 77 | 77 | North | | |more to the Westward, with 5 | | | | | | |rain, thunder, and lightning. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 62 | | | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 64 | 78 | 78 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 62 | | |S by W | At anchor in | 3 | | | | | Oie-hai-oie | 4 |29 . 62 | 76 | 77 | | harbour, | 5 | | | | | Yellow Sea. | 6 |29 . 62 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 61 | 76 | 77 | NNE | |In the evening the wind came 9 | | | | | |to the NNE. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 64 | 75 | 77 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, August 28, 1816. _ 3 | | | |NE by N| | | 4 | | | | | | |To-day the wind has been 5 | | | | | | |moderate and steady from the 6 | | | | | | |North-eastward. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 75 | 77 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 72 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 72 | 77 | 76 | | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | NE | Oie-hai-oie | 3 | | | | | harbour, | 4 |29 . 70 | 77 | 76 | ENE | Yellow Sea. | | |-1/2| | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | |Towards night the breeze 8 |29 . 70 | 77 | 76 | NE | |freshened, and the sky became 9 | | | | | |cloudy, assuming a threatening 10 | | | | | |appearance. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 74 | 79 | 76 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 29, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind hauled 4 |29 . 78 | 77 | 76 |E by N | | |to the Eastward, blowing fresh, 5 | | | | | | |the weather still looking very 6 | | | | | | |black. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 78 | 78 | 76 |S by E | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 80 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 80 | 81 | 77 | South | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 92 | | | | Oie-hai-oie |After 4 it moderated, and the 3 | | | | | harbour, |weather cleared up and became 4 |29 . 90 | 81 | 78 | SSE | Yellow Sea. |quite fine. 5 | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | |About 8 P. M. The wind came 8 |29 . 92 | 78 | 77 | SW | |to the Southward. Towards 9 | | | | | |midnight it drew round to the 10 | | | | | |SW, and then to South again. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 94 | 79 | 77 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 30, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 96 | 78 | 77 |S by W | | |All the forenoon the wind 5 | | | | | | |has been light from the 6 | | | | | | |Southward and SW. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 98 | 78 | 77 | SW | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 98 | | | West | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 96 | 80 | 76 | Calm |37 . 58 |122 . 58 |About noon it fell calm. -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 94 | |Calm| | Yellow Sea. | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 92 | 80 | 81 | NNE | | 5 | | | | | |At 2 a breeze sprung up from 6 |29 . 90 | | | | |the NE, with small drizzling 7 | | | | | |rain, and thick weather. 8 |29 . 90 | 79 | 79 | ENE | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------ 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, August 31, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 |29 . 90 | 79 | 79 |W by N | | |After midnight a light breeze 6 | | | | | | |from the Eastward, inclining 7 | | | | | | |to calm. 8 |29 . 92 | 80 | 79 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 94 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 96 | 80 | 79 |NW by N|37 . 55 |123 . 37 |About noon a breeze sprung up -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+from the Westward; weather 1 | | | | | |cloudy. 2 |29 . 94 | | | NW | Yellow Sea. | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 94 | 80 | 79 | | | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | |In the afternoon it died away 6 |29 . 92 | | | | |quite light. 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 92 | 79 | 79 | Calm | | | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | |Towards midnight a moderate 11 | | | | | |breeze from the Northward. Mid. | | | | NW | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | |NE by N| | | 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 1, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 |29 . 90 | 76 | 78 | N by E| | |During this day there has been 6 | | | | | | |a steady breeze at North and 7 | | | | | | |North by East. 8 |29 . 90 | 76 | 76 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 92 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 90 | 76 | 76 | |37 . 45 | 124 . 48| -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | North | | 2 |29 . 98 | | | | Yellow Sea. |Towards night the wind 3 | | | | | |freshened up. 4 | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 98 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 98 | 75 | 75 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Monday, September 2, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |About 2 A. M. The wind shifted 4 | | | | | | |to the Eastward, where it 5 | | | | | | |freshened. 6 | 29. 82 | 78 | 79 | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 | 29. 82 | 80 | 79 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | 29. 82 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. | 29. 82 | 81 | 80 |NW by N|36 . 45 |124 . 51 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | |S by W | West Coast of | 2 | 29. 96 | | | | Corea. | 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon it freshened 4 | 29. 98 | 80 | 80 | SSE | |and shifted to the Southward, 5 | | | | | |accompanied by a slight shower 6 | 29. 98 | | | | |of rain. 7 | | | | | | 8 | 30. 04 | 80 | 80 |S by W | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | South | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 3, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | 30. 02 | | | South | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | |The wind during all the night 6 | | | | | | |has been steady from the 7 | | | | | | |Southward, and remained so all 8 | 30. 04 | 77 | 79 |S by W | | |day until the evening, when it 9 | | | | | | |shifted to the Westward. 10 | 30. 04 | | | SSW | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. | 30. 00 | 79 | 78 | |36 . 18 |126 . 09 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | 29. 98 | | | SW | | 3 | | | | WSW | | 4 | 29. 95 | 81 | 78 | West | |About sunset it fell calm. 5 | | | | | | 6 | 29. 94 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 | 29. 92 | 80 | 77 | Calm | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, September 4, 1816. _ 2 | | | | Calm | | | 3 | | | | | | |It continued calm all night. 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | | 6 |29 . 95 | 78 | 78 | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 95 | 79 | 78 | West | | |About 8 A. M. A light breeze 9 | | | | | | |from the Westward. 10 |29 . 95 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 92 | 80 | 82 | NW |36 . 13 | 126 . 34| -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+At noon it freshened, hauling 1 | | | | | |from W to NW. 2 |29 . 85 | | | West | West Coast of | 3 | | | | | Corea. | 4 |29 . 84 | 81 | 82 | WSW | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 84 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 84 | 79 | 80 |N by E | |Towards night the wind shifted 9 | | | | | |to the Northward, and 10 | | | | | |continued to blow steady. 11 | | | | N | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | N | | |_Thursday, September 5, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | | 6 |29 . 82 | 78 | 79 | | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | 7 | | | | | | |About 7 it fell calm. 8 |29 . 82 | 80 | 79 | Calm | | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 82 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 82 | 80 | 80 | WNW |36 . 05 |126 . 42 |Towards noon a breeze sprung | | |-1/2| | | |up from WNW, with fine clear -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+weather. 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 82 | | | WNW | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 80 | 80 | 79 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 80 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 80 | 80 | 79 | | | 9 | | | | | |Towards midnight the wind came 10 | | | | | |to the Northward. 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, September 6, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | |N by E | | | 4 | | | | | | |The most part of this day the 5 | | | | | | |wind has been from the 6 |29 . 86 | 78 | 78 | NNE | | |Northward, blowing a steady | |-1/2| | | | |moderate breeze. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 86 | 79 | 78 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 88 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 88 | 79 | 78 | |35 . 17 |126 . 24 | | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | |North | | 2 |29 . 89 | | | | West Coast of | 3 | | | | | Corea. | 4 |29 . 90 | 79 | 77 | | |Towards night the wind drew | | |-1/2| | Corea. |round to ENE, and became quite 5 | | | |N by E | |light. 6 |29 . 90 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 88 | 77 | 74 | ENE | |At midnight it fell calm. | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | Calm | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | |NNW | | |_Saturday, September 7, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |After midnight a light breeze 4 | | | | | | |sprung up from NNW. 5 | | | | | | | 6 |29 . 82 | | |N by E | | |About 4 it hauled round to NE, 7 | | | | | | |and at noon it was at North. 8 |29 . 82 | 76 | 75 | | | | 9 | | | |ENE | | | 10 |29 . 82 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N. | E. | Noon |29 . 88 | 79 | 78 | |34 . 32 |125 . 50 | | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | N | | 2 |29 . 80 | | | | | 3 | | | | NNE | |At 2 the wind shifted to NE, 4 |29 . 82 |80 | 72 | Calm | |and by 4 it fell calm. 5 | | | | | | 6 | | | | | |Towards 8 P. M. A breeze sprung 7 | | | | | |up from the Northward, and 8 |29 . 82 |78 | 82 | N | |continued so the remainder of 9 | | | | | |the night. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | Calm | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Sunday, September 8, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | North | | |Shortly after midnight it fell 4 | | | | | | |calm; this did not last above 5 | | | | Calm | | |half an hour, before a breeze 6 | | | | NNW | | |sprung up from the Northward, 7 | | | | | | |which continued so all day. In 8 |29 . 86 | 74 | 70 | North | | |the night a heavy dew fell; and 9 | | | | | | |much lightning was observed in 10 |29 . 82 | | | | | |the NE quarter. 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon |29 . 81 | 78 | 71 | |34. 22. 30|126 . 03| -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+ 1 | | | |N by E | | 2 |29 . 80 | | | |Moored in | 3 | | | | |Murray's Sound, | 4 |29 . 80 | 76 | 70 | |among the | 5 | | | | |islands which | 6 |29 . 80 | | | |lie off the SW | 7 | | | | |extreme of | 8 |29 . 79 | 74 | 70 | NNE |Corea. | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+------------------------------ 1 | | | |N by W | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, September 9, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |In the forenoon the wind came 5 | | | | | | |to NW, and continued so all 6 |29 . 78 | 74 | 70 | | | |day, with a steady moderate 7 | | | | | | |breeze, and fine clear weather. 8 |29 . 78 | 76 | 70 | NNW | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 |29 . 80 | | | | N | E | Noon |29 . 80 | 75 | 78 | |34. 22. 30|126 . 03| -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | NW | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 80 | 74 | 71 | NNW | |A heavy dew fell during the 5 | | | | | |night. 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 78 | 74 | 70 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 78 | 73 | 69 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 10, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |The breeze continued at NW 4 |29 . 76 | 72 | 68 | NW | | |until the afternoon, when it 5 | | | | | | |drew round to the Northward, 6 | | | | | | |and freshened up from that 7 | | | | | | |quarter, looking threatening 8 |29 . 76 | 73 | 68 | | | |and squally. 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29. 77 | | | | | | 11 |29. 76 | 73 | 68 | | N | E | Noon. | | | | |34 . 19 |126 . 05 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29. 74 | 72 | 68 |North |Got under weigh | 3 | | | | |from Murray's | 4 |29. 78 | 76 | 80 |N by W |Sound, and stood|Midnight, strong breezes with 5 |29. 90 | | | |to the Southward|occasional showers of rain, and 6 |29. 90 | | | |into the Japan |a very high irregular swell from 7 | | | | |Sea. Saw |the NE. This seems to be the 8 |29. 74 | 76 | 80 | |Quelpaert. |NE monsoon, which sets in to 9 | | | | | |the Northward much earlier than 10 | | | | | |in lower latitudes. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29. 76 | 76 | 80 | North | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | _Wednesday, September 11, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |To-day we have had a strong 4 | | | | | | |breeze from the N by W, with 5 | | | | | | |a high irregular swell setting 6 | | | | | | |after us. In the afternoon the 7 | | | | | | |wind hauled round to NW. 8 |29. 73 | 80 | 80 |N by W | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29. 72 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |29. 71 | 81 | 83 | NNW |31 . 41 |126 . 44 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29. 71 | | | | Japan Sea. | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29. 71 | 82 | 82 | NW | | 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight it 6 |29. 71 | | | | |moderated: weather cloudy. 7 | | | | | | 8 |29. 73 | 79 | 82 | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29. 80 | | |North | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, September 12, 1816. _ 2 | | | | North | | | 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind 4 | | | | | | |shifted to the Northward, with 5 | | | | | | |a moderate breeze, and fine 6 |29 . 74 | 80 | 82 | | | |clear weather. 7 |29. 75 | | | | | | 8 |29. 75 | 82 | 82 | | | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 75 | 82 | 83 | |29 . 38 |127 . 56 | | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | |In the afternoon it became 2 | | | | | Japan Sea. |squally, with a heavy shower 3 | | | | | |of rain. 4 |29. 70 | 83 | 83 |N by E | | 5 | | | |NE by N| |This wind, though not fixed, 6 |29. 72 | | | NE | |has much the appearance of 7 | | | | | |the monsoon. 8 |29. 78 | 83 | 83 | | | 9 | | | | | |Latitude by Polaris 30º 3 min. 10 | | | | | |30 in. At 2 h. 57 min. A. M. 11 | | | | | |13th. Mid. |29. 78 | 82 | 82 | | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, September 13, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | |The wind continued at NE, 3 | | | | | | |with a steady fresh breeze; 4 | | | | | | |which towards noon freshened 5 | | | | | | |considerably, and a swell got 6 |29. 72 | | | N by E| | |up from the NE. At noon 7 | | | | | | |observed in 27º 48' N latitude. 8 |29. 70 | 83 | 84 | | | |stormy 2º 30' it became dark 9 | | | | | | |and in the NE, and the signal 10 |29. 70 | | | | | |being made to shorten sail, we 11 |29. 76 | | | | N | E |brought the ship under the main Noon. |29. 78 | 84 | 84 | |27 . 48 |128 . 20 |topsail and foresail, and made -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+preparations for a gale. At 4 1 |29. 60 | | | NE | |we saw the Loo-choo Islands SW 2 |29. 74 | | | | Off Sulphur |by S 20 miles. At 5 the wind 3 |29. 75 | | | | Island, Japan |shifted from N to NE, and the 4 |29. 80 | | | | Sea. |mountainous swell which we had 5 |29. 90 | | | | |experienced during the day 6 |29. 95 | | | | |rose still higher. The wind did 7 |29. 94 | | | | |not blow fresh except in short 8 | | | | | |rainy squalls. After 8 P. M. It 9 | | | | | |blew at times very fresh, and 10 | | | | | |also in the night, but when the 11 | | | | | |moon got up it became clear. Mid. |29. 52 | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 14, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind 4 | | | | | | |shifted from NE to NW, and 5 | | | | | | |continued to blow fresh with a 6 |29 . 52 | | | | | |high irregular swell. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 52 | 83 | 82 | NW | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 |29 . 54 | | | | | | 10 |29 . 54 | | |NW by W| | | 11 |29 . 56 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 60 | 83 | 82 | |27 . 44 |127 . 35 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 |29 . 58 | | | | | 2 |29 . 60 | | | | Off Loo-Choo, |Towards evening it became 3 |29 . 64 | | | | Japan Sea. |moderate and clear. 4 |29 . 52 | 83 | 82 |NW by N| | 5 |29 . 54 | | | | | 6 |29 . 66 | | | NW | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 82 | 82 |NW by N| | 9 | | | | | |In the night fine clear 10 | | | | | |weather. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 74 | 81 | | NW | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------ 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 15, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |A moderate breeze from NNW, 5 | | | | | | |with a clear sky; the swell 6 |29 . 80 | | | NNW | | |much less, though still 7 | | | | | | |considerable. 8 |29 . 78 | 80 |83 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 76 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 71 | | |NW by N| N | E | Noon. |29 . 75 | 83 |84 | |26 . 44 |127 . 32 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 75 | | | | Off Loo-Choo, | 3 | | | | | Japan Sea. | 4 |29 . 75 | 83 | 88 |N by W | | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | |Towards night the wind veered 6 |29 . 75 | | | | |to NNE. 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 80 | 81 | |North | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 |29 . 81 | | | NNE | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 80 | 81 | 84 |NE by N| | -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 16, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued at NNE. 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | |About 4 A. M. We had several 6 |29 . 84 | | | NNE | | |showers of rain, but soon 7 | | | | | | |cleared off. 8 |29 . 84 | 81 | 83 |N by E | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 90 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E |About noon the breeze Noon. |29 . 90 | 82 | 83 | |26. 13. 39|127 . 38|freshened. -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 80 | | | | At anchor in | 3 | | | | | Napakiang | 4 |29 . 80 | 82 | 83 | NE |harbour, Great |In the afternoon we had a 5 | | | | |Loo-choo Island. |shower. 6 |29 . 80 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 80 | 80 | 83 | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | |Midnight, clear weather, with 11 | | | | | |lightning in the SW. Mid. | 2 9. 8 | 80 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 17, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |The wind continued at NE, with 5 | | | | | | |a moderate breeze. At 4 there 6 | | | | | | |was a slight shower of rain 7 | | | | | | |but it cleared up again in a 8 |29 . 79 | 81 | 82 |NE by E| | |short time. | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 82 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 82 | 83 | 82 |E by N | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 78 | | | | Moored in |After noon the wind shifted 3 | | | | | Napakiang |to the Eastward: squally with 4 |29 . 77 | 82 | 82 | | harbour. |showers of rain. 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 78 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 80 | 81 | 82 | ESE | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | |Midnight, clear: moderate 11 | | | | | |weather. Mid. |29 . 78 | 81 | 82 |E by N | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | _Wednesday, September 18, 1816. _ 2 | | | | ENE | | | 3 | | | | | | |To-day the wind has been at NNE. 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | |After 4 A. M. We had several 7 | | | | | | |showers of rain. 8 |29 . 72 | 80 | 82 |NE by E| | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29. 75 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | |Towards noon the breeze Noon. |29. 75 | 82 | 82 | ENE | | |freshened. | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29. 70 | | | | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |29. 72 | 82 | 82 |NE by E| | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29. 74 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 | | 82 |82 | NE | | 9 | | | | | |At night squally, with rain. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29. 72 | | | NNE | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------ 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, September 19, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |After midnight it continued to 5 | | | | | | |rain, with occasional squalls. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29. 63 | 81 |82 | NNE | | |As the day advanced it cleared 9 | | | | | | |up. 10 |29. 62 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29. 62 | 82 |83 | | | |At noon quite moderate. | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29. 50 | | | | | 3 | | | | | |In the evening it looked very 4 |29. 58 | 82 | 83 | NE | |black all round, and fell calm. | | |-1/2| | |About 7 a breeze sprung up from 5 | | | | | |the Eastward, and it commenced 6 |29. 56 | | | Calm | |lightning. About 8 the wind 7 | | | | | |shifted to SSE, and freshened, 8 |29. 54 | | | East | |with squalls. 9 | | | | | | 10 |29. 54 | | | SSE | |Towards midnight heavy squalls, 11 | | | | | |with rain: thunder and Mid. |29. 54 | | | | |lightning. -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, September 20, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |After midnight the same 4 | | | | | | |squally weather continued. As 5 | | | | | | |the day advanced it cleared up. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 60 | 80 | 83 | SSE | | |In the afternoon it became | |-1/2| | | | |squally, with slight showers 9 | | | | | | |of rain. Towards evening it 10 | | | | | | |looked very black all round. 11 |29 . 62 | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 63 | 84 | 83 |S by E | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |29 . 63 | | | SSE | | 5 | | | | | |It seems probable that this 6 |29 . 64 | | | | |is the breaking up of the 7 | | | | | |monsoon. We were so completely 8 |29 . 69 |82 | 82 |E by S | |sheltered by the land, that we | | |-1/2| | |did not feel the wind much; 9 | | | | | |but it was evidently blowing 10 | | | | | |hard outside. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 69 | 81 | 82 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 21, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 68 | | | | | |During the day the wind has 5 | | | | | | |been South-easterly, with 6 | | | | | | |occasional squalls and showers 7 | | | | | | |of rain, and lightning. 8 |29 . 69 |80 |82 | SE | | | 9 | | | | | | |In the forenoon the wind 10 |29 . 70 | | | | | |hauled to the Eastward, and 11 | | | | | | |cleared up. Noon. |29 . 70 | 83 | 83 |E by S | | | | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 70 | | | ESE | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 70 | 83 | 83 | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 70 | | |E by S | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 81 | 82 | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 70 | 80 | 82 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 22, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |After midnight squally, with 5 | | | | | | |rain and lightning. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 70 | 81 | 82 | ENE | | |About 7 the wind hauled to the 9 | | | | | | |ENE, and cleared up, and 10 |29 . 70 | | | | | |continued fine all day. 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 70 | 83 | 82 |E by N | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |29 . 68 | 82 | 82 | ENE | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 66 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 66 | 81 | 82 | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 66 | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Monday, September 23, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |To-day the wind has been about 4 | | | | | | |NE; squally at times, with 5 | | | | | | |showers of rain, and every 6 | | | | | | |appearance of approaching bad 7 | | | | | | |weather. 8 |29 . 62 | 80 | 82 |NE by E| | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 62 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 62 | 81 | 82 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | | 2 |29 . 60 | | | ENE | | | 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 58 | 81 | 82 | | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | 5 | | | | | | |During all this day the 6 |29 . 50 | | | | | |barometer continued falling, 7 | | | | | | |in the evening it had reached 8 |29 . 50 | | |NE by N| | |29. 50. The wind in the early 9 | | | | | | |part of the night hauled to 10 | | | | | | |NNE, and towards morning to 11 | | | | | | |the Northward. Mid. | | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 24, 1816. _ 2 | | | | NNE | | | 3 | | | | | | |In the night the wind has been 4 | | | |NE by N| | |about NNE. About 4 A. M. It 5 | | | | | | |began to blow very fresh, with 6 |29 . 43 | | | | | |squalls. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 42 | | | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | |About noon the wind shifted 11 | | | | | | |to NNW, and increased in Noon. |29 . 40 | 81 | 81 | | | |strength. | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 40 | | | NNW | Napakiang |During the afternoon it blew 3 | | | | | harbour. |hard, and gradually shifted to 4 |29 . 44 | 81 | 81 | | |the North-westward, with fresh | | |-1/2| | |squalls of short duration. At 5 |29 . 50 | | | | |3 30 P. M. The mercury began 6 |29 . 55 | | |NW by N| |to rise, and continued rising 7 |29 . 56 | | | | |very rapidly. 8 |29 . 63 | 79 | 81 | | | 9 |29 . 65 | | | |The weather at sunset assumed 10 | | | | | |a very stormy appearance. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 66 | 78 | 80 | NW | | | | |-1/2| | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, September 25, 1816. 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |Shortly after midnight it 5 | | | | | | |cleared up and moderated. 6 |29 . 72 | | |NW by W| | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 80 | 78 | 80 | NW | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 86 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 86 | 79 | 80 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | |During the day it has been 2 |29 . 84 | | | | |blowing a steady moderate 3 | | | | | |breeze from the NW. 4 |29 . 84 | 78 | 80 |NW by W| | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 86 | | | NW | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 92 | 77 | 79 | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | |Midnight, moderate and cloudy. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 95 | 77 | 78 |NW by N| | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, September 26, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued about NNW 4 | | | | | | |all day, blowing a moderate 5 | | | | | | |breeze, with fine weather. 6 |29 . 96 | | | NNW | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 96 | 78 | 80 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 99 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |30 . 00 | 79 | 81 |NW by W| | | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | 30. 00 | | | | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |29 . 99 | 83 | 81 | | |8 P. M. It fell calm. | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 99 | | | Calm | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 99 | 79 | 81 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | |Towards midnight a light 11 | | | | | |breeze sprung up from NNE. Mid. |29 . 99 | 79 | 80 | NNE | | | | |-1/2| | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | NNE | | |Friday, September 27, 1816. 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind died 5 | | | | | | |away. 6 |29 . 99 | 70 | | Calm | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 99 | 76 | 81 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 99 | | | | | |Towards noon a breeze sprung 11 |29 . 99 | | | | | |up from the Northward. Noon. |29 . 99 | 80 | 81 | North | | | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 98 | | | | | 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon it shifted to 4 |29 . 96 | 79 | 80 | ENE | |ENE. | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 96 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 94 | 78 | 80 | NE | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | |Midnight, calm and cloudy 11 | | | | | |weather. Mid. |29 . 94 | 77 | 79 | Calm | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 28, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |All the early part of the 4 | | | | | | |morning it was quite calm. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 90 | 76 | 79 | Calm | | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | |About 8 A. M. A breeze sprung 11 |29 . 94 | | | | | |up about ESE; in the afternoon Noon. |29 . 94 | 81 | 81 | | | |it hauled round to East. | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 90 | | | ESE | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |29 . 92 | 81 | 81 | | | 5 | |-1/2| | | | 6 |29 . 90 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 90 | 80 | 81 | East | | 9 | | |-1/2| | | 10 | | | | | |Midnight, the breeze shifted 11 | | | | | |to NE, and was moderate. Mid. |29 . 90 | 76 | 79 | NE | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 29, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 90 | 75 | 79 | NE | | |During this day the wind 5 | | | | | | |shifted occasionally from NE to 6 | | | | | | |ENE, blowing a moderate breeze, 7 | | | | | | |with fine clear weather. 8 |29 . 90 | 80 | 81 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 92 | | | ENE | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 92 | 82 | 81 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 94 | | |NE by E| | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 94 | 81 | 81 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 95 | | | | |Towards night it became cloudy. 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 95 | 80 | 80 | NE | | | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 95 | 78 | 80 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | |NE by E| | |_Monday, September 30, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |During the forenoon the wind 5 | | | | | | |has been light from the NE. 6 |29 . 96 | 79 | 80 | | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 96 | | | | | | 9 | | | | | | |Towards noon it freshened up. 10 |29 . 97 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 98 | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 98 | 82 | 81 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | |NE by N| | 2 |29 . 91 | | | | Napkiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |29 . 96 | 81 | 81 | | | | |-1/2| | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 95 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 95 | 80 | 80 | | | | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | |Midnight, cloudy weather. Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, October 1, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind drew 5 | | | | | | |more to the Eastward, and the 6 |29 . 95 | | | | | |sky became very black all 7 | | | | | | |round: squally, with rain at 8 |30 . 02 | 79 | 80 | East | | |intervals. | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | |We got under weigh at daylight, 10 |30 . 07 | | | | | |and proceeded along shore to 11 | | | | | N | E |the Northward. Noon. |30 . 07 | 80 | 80 | ESE | 26 . 34| 127 . 38| | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 |30 . 00 | | | | | 2 |29 . 94 | | | | Sugar Loaf |The wind continued to the 3 | | | | |Point. N . 24º E. |Eastward. 4 |29 . 94 | 79 | 80 |E by S | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 94 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 94 | 78 | 80 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 92 | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 2, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | | 4 |29 . 91 | | | | | |The whole of this day the wind 5 | | | | | | |has been from the Eastward, 6 | | | | | | |blowing a moderate breeze, 7 | | | | | | |with fine weather. 8 |29 . 91 | 78 | 80 |E by S | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 94 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 96 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 96 | 79 | 80 | | 26 . 25| 127 . 38| -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 92 | | | | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 89 | 80 | 81 | East | |Towards night cloudy weather. 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 88 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 99 | 79 | 81 | | | | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 90 | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | | |_Thursday, October 3, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | 4 | | | | | |During the night the wind 5 | | | | | |shifted to NE by E. 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | |Towards noon it shifted to 8 |29 . 87 | 78 | 81 |NE by E| |East, and in the evening to 9 | | | | | |ENE again. 10 |29 . 87 | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 87 | 81 | 81 |E by S | | | | |-1/2| | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | East | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |20 . 86 | 80 | 81 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 | | | | ENE | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 86 | 78 | 81 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 86 | 78 | 80 |E by N | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, October 4, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |To-day we had a light breeze 5 | | | | | | |from the NE, until the 6 | | | | | | |afternoon, when it shifted to 7 | | | | | | |SE by E, but only remained a 8 |29 . 87 | 78 | 81 | NE | | |short time, coming back to NE 9 | | | | | | |again, where it continued until 10 | | | | | | |near midnight, when it fell 11 | | | | | | |calm. Noon. |29. 87 | 79 | 84 | | | | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 86 | | | ENE | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |29 . 86 | 79 | 80 |SE by E| | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 85 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 85 | 79 | 80 | NE | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 85 | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, October 5, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |In the morning a breeze sprung 5 | | | | | | |up from the Eastward, where it 6 | | | | | | |remained until noon; then 7 | | | | | | |shifted to NE, and continued 8 |29 . 86 | 78 | 80 | E by N| | |to blow from that quarter all | | |-1/2| | | |the rest of the day. 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 87 | | | | | | 11 |29 . 87 | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 85 | 81 | 81 |NE by E| | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 84 | | | | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 82 | 81 | 81 | N by E| | | |-1/2| | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 82 | | | NE | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 83 | 79 | | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 83 | 78 | 80 | | | | | |-1/2| | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, October 6, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |The early part of the day from 5 | | | | | | |wind has been moderate from the 6 | | | | | | |NE. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 83 | 78 | 80 |NE by N| | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 84 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | |About noon the wind shifted to Noon. |29 . 84 | 80 | 81 | North | | |the Northward. -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |29 . 83 | | | | |At night it came back to NE, 5 | | | | | |with rain. 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 83 | 79 | 80 | NE | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 86 | | | NNE | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | |NE by E| | |_Monday, October 7, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind 6 | | | | | | |continued at NE by E, with 7 | | | | | | |showers of rain. 8 |29 . 80 | 78 | 80 | North | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 |29 . 94 | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 95 | 79 | 80 |N by E | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 92 | | | N by E| |At 4 A. M. The wind came to 3 | | | | | |north, and the weather cleared 4 |29 . 93 | 79 | 80 | | |up: it blew a fresh breeze from 5 | | | | | |that quarter all day. 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 93 | 78 | 80 | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | |Towards midnight it moderated. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 96 | 78 | 79 | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, October 8, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |To-day we have had a moderate 5 | | | | | | |breeze at NE by N. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 00 | 78 | 79 |NE by N| | |Squally at times. | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 02 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |30 . 02 | 78 | 79 | NNE | | | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30. 00 | | | | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |30. 00 | 78 | 79 |NE by N| | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight fine clear 6 | | | | | |weather. 7 | | | | | | 8 |30. 00 | 76 | 78 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |30 00 | 75 | 78 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 9, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |During the morning a moderate 5 | | | | | | |breeze from NE by E. 6 |30 . 00 | | |NE by E| | | 7 | | | | | | |About 6 A. M. We got underweigh, 8 |30 . 04 | 75 | 78 | | | |and stood to the Northward. | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 10 | | | ENE | | | 11 |30 . 10 | | | | N | E | Noon. |30 . 10 | 77 | 78 | | 26 . 34| 127 . 26| | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 06 | | | | | 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon the wind 4 |30 . 00 | 78 | 78 | East | |shifted to the Eastward, and 5 | | | | | |continued so the remainder of 6 |30 . 06 | | | | |the day. 7 | | | | | | 8 |30 . 13 | 77 | 78 | E by S| | 9 | | | | | |At night, cloudy weather. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 10, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | |During this day the wind has 6 |30 . 00 | | | | |been moderate from the 7 | | | | | | |Eastward. 8 |30 . 00 | 77 | 79 | ESE | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 01 | | | | | | 11 | | | | East | N | E | Noon. |30 . 01 | 78 | 79 | E by N| 26 . 50| 127 . 50| -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 98 | | | ENE | Off the Great | 3 | | | | |Loo-choo Island. | 4 |29 . 98 | 79 | 79 | | | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 98 | | | NE | | 7 | | | | | |At night fine clear weather. 8 |29 . 98 | | | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |29 . 96 | 78 | 79 | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | NE | | |_Friday, October 11, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind 6 |29 . 98 | | | | | |shifted from NE to SE, with a 7 | | | | | | |light air. 8 |29 . 97 | 78 | 79 | SE | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |29 . 97 | | | | | |Ten A. M. It fell calm. 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 97 | 80 | 80 | | 26 . 42| 127 . 53| -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 96 | | | | Off Port | 3 | | | | | Melville. | 4 |29 . 96 | 80 | 80 | West | | 5 | | | | | |In the afternoon a breeze 6 |29 . 96 | | | N by E| |sprung up from the Westward; 7 | | | | | |about 8 it looked very dark all 8 |29 . 94 | | | NNE | |round, and shortly afterwards 9 | | | | | |began to blow fresh from N by 10 | | | | | |E, and continued so all night. 11 |30 . 00 | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, October 12, 1816. _ 2 | | | |NE by E| | | 3 | | | | NE | | |During the night the wind came 4 | | | | | | |to NE with a fresh breeze, and 5 | | | | | | |rain at intervals. 6 |30 . 30 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 26 | 76 | 79 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 26 | | | | | | 11 |30 . 22 | | | | N | E | Noon. |30 . 22 | 76 | 79 | |25 . 33 |127 . 50 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 20 | | | |Off Loo-choo. | 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon a swell got up 4 |30 . 20 | 76 | 79 | ENE | |from the NE; the wind 5 | | | | | |moderated, and drew round to 6 |30 . 30 | | | | |ENE. 7 | | | | | | 8 |30 . 34 | 76 | 79 | | | 9 | | | | | |Midnight, fresh breezes and 10 | | | | | |cloudy. 11 | | | | | | Mid. |30 . 20 | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | ENE | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, October 13, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |After midnight it became quite 5 | | | | | | |moderate, with rain at times. 6 |30 . 10 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 06 | 75 | 78 | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 04 | | | | | |In the forenoon it fell calm. 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |30 . 04 | 75 | 78 | Calm |27 . 00 |128 . 03 | | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 00 | | | | | 3 | | | | | |During the afternoon a breeze 4 |30 . 00 | 75 | 78 | NE | |sprung up at NE. 5 | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |30 . 00 | | | | | 7 | | | | | |Towards midnight it freshened 8 |30 . 02 | 75 | 78 |NE by E| |considerably. 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |30 . 02 | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | |NE by N| | |_Monday, October 14, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind 5 | | | | | | |moderated. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 04 | 75 | 79 | | | |About 8 A. M. It fell nearly | | |-1/2| | | |calm, but shortly after it 9 | | | | | | |freshened at NNE. 10 |30 . 02 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |30 . 00 | 75 | 79 | NNE |26 . 36 |127 . 56 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 94 | | | North |Off Loo-choo. | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 97 | 75 | 79 | NNW | | | |-1/2| | | | 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight the wind 6 |29 . 98 | | | | |shifted to NNW, and continued 7 | | | | | |to blow fresh. 8 |30 . 02 | 75 | 79 | N by W| | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |30 . 18 | | | NNW | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, October 15, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |During this day the wind has 5 | | | | | | |been from the N by W, blowing 6 | | | | | | |a fresh breeze, with occasional 7 | | | | | | |squalls. 8 |30 . 10 | | 78 |N by W | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |30 . 10 | 74 | 78 | North |26 . 02 |127 . 35 | | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 08 | | | | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |30 . 08 | 74 | 78 | | |At midnight it moderated. | |-1/2| | | | 5 | | | | North | | 6 |30 . 08 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |30 . 10 | 74 |79 | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 16, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |During the night the wind drew 6 | | | | | | |round to N by E, with a 7 | | | | | | |moderate breeze. About 7 A. M. 8 |30 . 20 | 73 | 77 |N by E | | |we weighed and stood to the 9 | | | | | | |NW, shortly after the breeze 10 |30 . 20 | | | | | |freshened, with squalls; at 11 | | | | | N | E |2 P. M. Anchored in Napakiang Noon. |30 . 10 | 74 | 77 | |26 . 11 |127 . 30 |harbour. | | |-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 00 | | | | Off Loo-choo. | 3 | | | | | | 4 |30 . 00 | 74 | 77 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |30 . 00 | | | | |Towards midnight the breeze 7 | | | | | |freshened. 8 |30 . 00 | 74 | 77 | N by W| | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 17, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | |The whole of this day we have 6 | | | | | | |had a breeze from the NNE, with 7 | | | | | | |fine clear weather. 8 |30 . 00 | 71 | 76 | NNE | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 00 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |30 . 00 | 75 | 77 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 00 | | |NE by N| Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |30 . 00 | 75 | 77 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |30 . 01 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |30 . 02 | 75 | 76 | | | | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. |30 . 00 | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, October 18, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued about NE by 4 | | | | | | |N. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 00 | 73 | 76 |NE by N| | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 00 | | | E by N| | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |30 . 02 | 74 | 75 | | | |Towards noon it came to the | | |-1/2| | | |eastward with a moderate -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+breeze. 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 02 | | | | Moored in | 3 | | | | | Napakiang | 4 | | | | | harbour. | 5 | | | | | | 6 |30 . 00 | | |NE by E| |At night it shifted to the NE. 7 | | | | | | 8 |30 . 00 | 71 | 75 | NE | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | NE | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, October 19, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 98 | | | | | |During all this day the wind 9 | | | | | | |has been moderate and steady 10 | | | | | | |at NE, with fine clear weather. 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 98 |76 | 76 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | NE | | 2 | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 98 |73 | 75 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 98 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 98 |73 | 75 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Sunday, October 20, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |29 . 98 | 72 | 75 | NE | | |The breeze still continues at | | | | | | | 9 | | | | | | |NE, with the same fine clear 10 |29 . 98 | | | | | |weather as yesterday. 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |29 . 98 | 73 | 75 | | | | | |-1/2|-1/2| | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 98 | | | | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |29 . 98 | 73 |75 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |29 . 98 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 98 | 72 |75 |NE by N| | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, October 21, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind 5 | | | | | | |shifted to the N by E, with a 6 | | | | | | |moderate breeze. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 00 | 73 | 75 |N by E | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 00 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |30 . 00 | 74 | 75 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |30 . 00 | 73 |75 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |30 . 00 | | | | | 7 | | | | | |Towards night it fell almost 8 |30 . 04 | 72 | 74 | NNE | |calm. | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------ 1 | | | | NNE | | |_Tuesday, October 22, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |After midnight the breeze 4 | | | | | | |freshened up at NNE, and 5 | | | | | | |continued so all day, with 6 | | | | | | |fine clear weather. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 06 | 72 | 74 | | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 |30 . 06 | | | | | | Noon. |30 . 06 | 73 | 75 |NE by N| | | | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 00 | | | | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |30 . 08 | 73 | 74 | | | | | |-1/2| | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |30 . 08 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |30 . 08 | 72 | 74 | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | |NE by N| | | 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 23, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |The wind continued steady at 5 | | | | | | |NNE, with the same fine weather 6 | | | | | | |as yesterday. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 08 | 73 |75 | NNE | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |30 . 10 | 74 |75 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 10 | | | | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |30 . 10 | 73 |74 |N by E | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |30 . 12 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |30 . 12 | 72 | 73 | | | 7 | | |-1/2| | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 24, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |After midnight we had a 4 | | | | | | |moderate breeze at NNE. 5 | | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 04 | | |N by E | | | 9 | | | | | | |Towards noon it shifted to 10 | | | | | | |north, and freshened up in 11 | | | | | | |that quarter. Noon. |30 . 00 | 72 | 75 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 99 | | |North | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. |After noon we had a slight 4 |29 . 98 | | | | |shower of rain, but soon after 5 | | | | | |it cleared up. 6 |29 . 98 | 72 | 74 | | | | | |-1/2| | | 7 | | | | | | 8 | | | | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | |North | | |_Friday, October 25, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |At daylight the breeze 5 | | | | | | |freshened. 6 |30 . 05 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 08 | 74 | 75 | | | | | | | | | | | 9 | | | | | | |At 9 the weather became 10 |30 . 00 | | | | | |squally, with a shower of rain. 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |30 . 00 | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 00 | | | NNW | | 3 | | | | | |After noon the wind hauled 4 |30 . 00 | 74 | 74 | | |to NNW, and continued to blow | |-1/2|-1/2| | |a fresh breeze all day. 5 | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 96 | 73 | 74 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Saturday, October 26, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |During this day the wind has 4 | | | | | | |been at north, blowing a fresh 5 | | | | | | |breeze, with occasional 6 | | | | | | |squalls. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 04 | 74 | 74 | North | | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. |30 . 00 | 74 |75 | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 99 | | | | Napakiang | 3 | | | | | harbour. | 4 |29 . 98 | | 74 | | | 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight it moderated. 6 |29 . 98 | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 | | | 74 | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | Calm | | |_Sunday, October 27, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |After midnight it fell calm. 5 | | | | | | | 6 |30 . 05 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 08 | 68 |73 | NNE | | | 9 | | | | | | |About 9 A. M. A breeze sprung up 10 |30 . 00 | | | | | |from NNE. Weighed and stood out 11 | | | | | | |of the harbour. Noon. |30 . 00 | 70 | 74 |N by E | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 00 | | | | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |30 . 00 | 71 |74 | NNE | | 5 | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 |29 . 96 | 72 |74 | | |Towards night the breeze 9 | | | | | |freshened. 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Monday, October 28, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |During all this day the wind 4 | | | | | | |has been at NNE, blowing a 5 | | | | | | |steady fresh breeze. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 10 | 72 | 77 | North | | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 08 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. | | | | |24 . 41 |126 . 00| -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 99 | | | | Japan Sea. | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 98 |74 | 79 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |30 . 00 | | | | | 7 | | | | | |Towards night it shifted to NE. 8 |30 . 05 | 74 | 79 | | | 9 | |-1/2| | | | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | Calm | | |_Tuesday, October 29, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |The wind has been from the NE, 5 | | | | | | |and a swell rising from that 6 | | | | | | |quarter. 7 | | | | | | | 8 |30 . 02 | 76 | 79 | NNE | | | | |-1/2| | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 02 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | N | E | Noon. |30 . 02 | 76 | 79 |N by E |23 . 24 |124 . 01 | | |-1/2| | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |29 . 95 | | | | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |29 . 99 | 76 | 79 | NNE | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |30 . 00 | | | | |Towards night the sky 7 | | | | | |assumed a threatening 8 |30 . 00 | 76 | 79 | | |appearance. 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Wednesday, October 30, 1816. _ 2 | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind 4 | | | | | | |shifted to the Northward, and 5 | | | | | | |continued to blow fresh, with 6 | | | | | | |a heavy swell. Saw the islands 7 | | | | | | |of Botel-Tobago-Zima, and 8 |30 . 50 | 72 | 77 | North | | |Formosa. | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 |30 . 30 | | | | | | 11 |30 . 00 | | | | N | E | Noon. |29 . 92 | | | |24 . 41 |126 . 00 | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 |30 . 50 | | | | | 3 | | | | | | 4 |30 . 85 |74 | 79 | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 |31 . 10 | | | | | 7 | | | | | |Towards night it shifted to NE. 8 |31 . 00 | 74 | 79 | | | | |-1/2| | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- 1 | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 31, 1816. _ 3 | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | |Passed Formosa, and entered 5 | | | | | | |the China sea. 6 | | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | | 8 | | | | | | | 9 | | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | Noon. | | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ 1 | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | 5 | | | | | | 6 | | | | | | 7 | | | | | | 8 | | | | | | 9 | | | | | | 10 | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | Mid. | | | | | | -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------- ABSTRACT OF THE LYRA'S VOYAGE, FROM LEAVING ENGLAND TILL HER RETURN; SHEWING THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE DIFFERENT PLACES AT WHICH SHE TOUCHED, AND THETIME TAKEN IN PERFORMING EACH PASSAGE. ABSTRACTOF THEVOYAGES OF HIS MAJESTY'S SHIP LYRA, In 1816 and 1817. The Lyra, in the short space of twenty months, viz. From the 9th ofFebruary 1816, to the 14th of October 1817, visited Madeira, the Cape, Java, Macao, the Yellow Sea, the West Coast of Corea, the Great Loo-chooIsland, Canton, Manilla, Prince of Wales's Island, Calcutta, Madras, theMauritius, and St. Helena; having run, in direct courses, a distance of11, 940 nautic leagues, or 41, 490 statute miles. An abstract of the various passages, from place to place, during thisvoyage, illustrated by brief remarks on the particular circumstances ofeach, will probably be considered interesting. * * * * * [Sidenote: England to Madeira and Cape, 2520 leagues. ] 1. Sailed through the Needles passage on the 9th of February, 1816. Arrived at Madeira, 18th of February 9 days Crossed the equator in longitude 25º 20' west, 4th March 15 Reached the Cape of Good Hope, 14th April 41 --- From England to the Cape, in 9 weeks, 2 days, or 65 days. This is not a very good passage, considering that we carried thenorth-east trade wind to the latitude of 4º north, and longitude 23ºwest, where we got the south-east trade, without any interval of calms. * * * * * 2. [Sidenote: Cape to Java, 1800 leagues. ] Sailed from the Cape on the 26th April 1816. Arrived at Anjier Point, Java, 7th June. 42 days. --- Six weeks. After leaving the Cape we had strong westerly winds, with which we ranthe longitude down, in the parallel of 38º and 39º south, till inlongitude 57º east, where the weather being very stormy, we hauled tothe north-east till in 35º south latitude, and then ran east till in 90ºeast, when we steered to the east-north-east, and crossed the tropic in102º east, which was probably too far west. The south-east trade hungfar to the eastward, and made it difficult to fetch Java Head, which hadwe not succeeded in doing at first, might have caused considerabledelay, as the wind still blew out of the Straits of Sunda. * * * * * 3. [Sidenote: Java to China, 600 leagues. ] Sailed from Anjier Point, Java, on the 12th June, 1816. Reached Gaspar Straits on the 17th June 1816 5 days. Arrived off Macao, 8th July 21 --- From Java to Macao in 3 weeks 5 days, or 26 days. This passage was unusually bad, it being nearly a week before we reachedGaspar Straits, an ordinary run of one day: in the south part of theChina sea the south-west monsoon was very light. An American brig, whichsailed only one day before us from Anjier Point, carried the breezealong with her, and reached Macao twelve days before us. * * * * * 4. [Sidenote: Ladrone Islands to the Yellow Sea, 520 leagues. ] Sailed from the Ladrone Islands off Macao, on the 13th July 1816. Rounded the promontory of Shantung and entered the Yellow Sea, 25th July 12 days. From thence to the anchorage off the Pei-ho or Pekin River, 27th July 2 --- Macao to Pekin River, in 2 weeks, or 14 days. This voyage can be compared only with that of the Lion on the occasionof the former embassy. The Lion was nearly three weeks, exclusive of thetime at anchor at Chusan. We had fine weather and steady south-westwinds, with very heavy dews at night. When nearly abreast of the southpoint of Corea, the wind became variable from the south-east andsouthward. In the Yellow Sea we had easterly winds and no fogs. * * * * * 5. [Sidenote: Pei-ho to Oei-hai-oei in the Yellow Sea, 90 leagues. ] Sailed from the anchorage off the Pei-ho on the 11th August, 1816. Arrived at Cheatow Bay, after having coasted from the anchorage along the south side of the Gulf of Pe-che-lee, 22d August 11 days. From thence to the harbour of Oei-hai-oei, 23d August 1 --- From Pekin River to harbour of Oei-hai-oei, 1 week 5 days, or 12 days. In this cruise round the Gulf of Pe-che-lee we had constant easterlywinds, which obliged us to tide the whole way. It blew a gale of wind onthe 19th from the north-east, with a high short sea. With thisexception, and a fresh breeze on the 3d and 6th, the weather wasuniformly fine during our stay in the Yellow Sea, and we neverexperienced any fogs. * * * * * 6. [Sidenote: Yellow Sea to Corea, 40 leagues. ] Sailed from Oei-hai-oei, in China, on the 29th August, 1816. Made the islands off the coast of Corea, 1st September 3 days. Running along the coast of Corea till the 10th September 9 ---- 12 days. On the coast of Corea the winds were mostly from the northward, and theweather uniformly fine, with heavy dews at night. * * * * * 7. [Sidenote: Corea to Loo-choo, 240 leagues. ] From the south-west end of Corea to the Great Loo-choo Island, on the 14th September, 1816, 4 days. From Corea to the Great Loo-choo Island we had northeasterly andnortherly winds, with one gale from the northward. * * * * * 8. [Sidenote: Loo-choo to China, 320 leagues. ] From Loo-choo to Lintin, off Canton. 27th October to the 2d November, 1816 6 days. As the north-east monsoon was blowing fresh, this quick passage was tobe expected. * * * * * 9. [Sidenote: China to Manilla, 200 leagues. ] From Lemma Islands to Manilla. 2d February to the 5th February, 1817 3 days. A good passage for this season of the year. * * * * * 10. [Sidenote: Manilla to Penang, 600 leagues. ] From Manilla to Prince of Wales's Island. 21st February to 8th March, 1817 15 days. In the north-east monsoon this is somewhat under the average passage. * * * * * 11. [Sidenote: Penang to Bengal, 400 leagues. ] From Prince of Wales's Island to Saugor Roads, Bengal. 13th March to the 27th March, 1817 14 days. The average at this season is twenty-one days, consequently this passageis very good. At this season of the year the north-east monsoon hasentirely ceased in the centre of the Bay of Bengal; so that a ship whichsteers well out between the Nicobars and Andamans need not apprehendnortherly winds; whereas in the north-eastern parts of the bay, themonsoon still blows faintly, with long intervals of calm. A merchantbrig, reputed a good sailer, left Prince of Wales's Island 6 days beforeus, and followed the inner route, while we went outside, and arrived 10days before her at Calcutta. * * * * * 12. [Sidenote: Calcutta to Madras, 300 leagues. ] Sand Heads off Calcutta to Madras, against the south-west monsoon. From 19th April to the 7th May, 1817 18-1/2 days. Three weeks is said to be a good passage. We beat down as far as thelatitude 11º north, and longitude 87º east, before we hauled across. Wehad fine weather all the way. * * * * * 13. [Sidenote: Madras to Mauritius, 1140 leagues. ] From Madras to the Mauritius. 1st June to the 1st July, 1817 30 days. We were driven by the south-west monsoon as far as longitude 92º east, before crossing the equator; here we had a constant high swell. We weremuch baffled, and did not get the steady south-east trade till in 7ºsouth, and longitude 88º east. The average passage is between five andsix weeks at this season of the year. * * * * * 14. [Sidenote: Mauritius to rounding the Cape, 800 leagues. ] From Mauritius to making the land of Africa, about Algoa Bay. 8th July to the 22d July, 1817 14 days. Thence to rounding the Cape on the 30th July 8 --- Mauritius till round the Cape, 3 weeks 1 day, or 22 days. The average from the Mauritius to rounding the Cape, is twenty-eightdays; on this occasion we kept close in-shore: we had no current, andthough in the depth of winter, the weather was invariably fine, and thewater smooth. At night a breeze generally blew off shore. There was aheavy dew every night. * * * * * 15. [Sidenote: Cape to St. Helena, 570 leagues. ] From off the Cape to St. Helena on the 11th August 12 days. Mauritius to the Cape (see above) 22 days. --- From Mauritius to St. Helena in 4 weeks 6 days, or 34 days. [Sidenote: Mauritius to St. Helena, 1370 leagues. ] This is an excellent passage. It appears to be a great object in makinga passage from India to England, to pass the Cape without going in; forit is often easy to round the Cape and go to St. Helena, when it isdifficult and tedious either to go to Simon's or Table Bay, and muchdelay is produced by the difficulty of getting out of the formeranchorage. * * * * * 16. [Sidenote: St. Helena to Ireland, 1800 leagues. ] From St. Helena to Bantry Bay in Ireland. Sailed from St. Helena on the 14th August, 1817. Arrived off Bantry Bay, 14th October, 1817 61 days. This passage was unusually long, owing to a succession of hard galesfrom north-east to south-east, which we encountered in latitude 47ºnorth, longitude 13º west, beginning on the 27th of September, andcontinuing, with little intermission, till the 8th of October; afterwhich period the weather became fine, but the wind hung constantly tothe eastward, so as to render it difficult to fetch Ireland. GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM;BEINGA DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIMENS OF ROCKSCOLLECTED ATMACAO AND THE LADRONE ISLANDS, AND ON THE SHORES OFTHE YELLOW SEA, THE WEST COAST OF COREA, AND THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM. It is greatly to be regretted, that, during this voyage, our means ofgaining information on this interesting subject were so limited. InChina we were restrained, sometimes by the jealousy of the Chinese, andsometimes by an apprehension on our part of giving offence, or ofexciting suspicion, by following up enquiries, the nature of which itwas impossible to explain when interrogated by the inhabitants. On thecoast of Corea, the still greater jealousy of the natives rendered itimpossible to prosecute geological investigations beyond the beach. Bothin China and on the coast of Corea our stay at each place was veryshort, and our time being often necessarily occupied by avocationsforeign to such enquiries, many opportunities were lost merely for wantof time. Even at the Great Loo-choo Island, where we remained muchlonger, our researches were confined to a coast which offered nothinginteresting. Having therefore nothing of a general or striking nature to offer to thescientific world on this subject, I shall merely give an account of thespecimens collected at the various places which we touched at duringthis voyage, accompanied by brief explanations from memorandums made onthe spot. The geologist will be struck with the resemblance which the rocks inthis remote quarter of the globe bear to those with which he has beenfamiliarly acquainted. SPECIMENS FROM CHINA. MACAO. 1. Granite, composed of white quartz, porcelain clay, and greenishsteatite, with veins of white quartz intersecting each other. 2. Fine-grained granite, composed of yellowish feldspar, white quartz, and black mica. Quartz dykes of great magnitude traverse the granite which forms thispeninsula. HONG-KONG, ONE OF THE LADRONE ISLANDS, OFF MACAO. 3. Lead-coloured compact quartz rock, with imbedded crystals offlesh-coloured feldspar. GREAT LEMMA, ONE OF THE LADRONE ISLANDS, OFF MACAO. 4. Coarse-grained granite, with distinct crystals of feldspar. SOUTHERN SHORE OF THE YELLOW SEA. CHE-A-TOW. 5. Fine-grained gneiss, composed of white quartz, white feldspar, andblack mica, with a vein containing hornblend and crystals of feldspar. 6. The strata are here very much contorted; the cliffs at some placesbeing folded up like webs of cloth. 7. Granular primitive lime-stone, containing greenish steatite. 8. Quartz rock, alternating with gneiss. 9. A specimen containing amorphous pieces of iron. CUNG-CUNG-CHEEN ISLANDS. 10. Very fine-grained gneiss, composed of white quartz, flesh-colouredfeldspar, and black mica. 11. Coarser variety of the same. 12. Compact blueish-grey feldspar, with grains of quartz. OEI-HAI-OEI. 13. Gneiss, composed of yellowish feldspar, white quartz, and blackmica. LUNG-CUNG-TAO ISLANDS. 14. Coarser variety of the rock described above. WEST COAST OF COREA. From an Island in Latitude 37º 45' North. 1. Compact stratified pale-pink lime-stone; variegated in colour; stratahighly inclined. 2. Very compact slaty light-grey rock; strata inclined at an angle of75º, dipping towards the north-east. 3. Dark olive steatitic rock, containing fragments of granular marble. 4. Very fine-grained greenish hornblend rock. 5. Vine-grained purplish slate; the strata highly inclined. 6. Greenish-grey slate, containing crystals of white feldspar and specksof hornblend: strata highly inclined, dipping towards the north-east. SPECIMENS FROM HUTTON'S ISLAND, COAST OF COREA. Latitude 36º 10' north, longitude 126º 13' east. The following note is taken from the narrative at page 8. We found the north-east end composed of a fine-grained granite[19]; themiddle of the island of a brittle micaceous schistus of a deep bluecolour[20]; the strata are nearly horizontal, but dip a little to thesouth-west. This body of strata is cut across by a granite dyke[21], atsome places forty feet wide, at others not above ten; the strata in thevicinity of the dyke are broken and bent in a remarkable manner: thisdislocation and contortion does not extend far from the walls of thedyke, though veins of granite branch out from it to a great distance, varying in width from three feet to the hundredth part of an inch: thedyke is visible from the top of the cliff to the water's edge, but doesnot re-appear on the corresponding cliff of an island opposite to it, though distant only thirty yards. This island is composed of the sameschistus, and is cut in a vertical direction by a whin dyke[22], fourfeet wide, the planes of whose sides lie north-east and south-west, being at right angles to those of the great granite dyke in theneighbourhood, which run south-east and north-west. The stratacontiguous to the whin dyke are a good deal twisted and broken, but notin the same degree as at their contact with the granite dyke. The whindyke is formed of five layers or sets of prisms laid across in the usualway. Beyond the small island cut by the whin dyke, at the distance of onlyforty or fifty feet, we came to an island rising abruptly out of thesea, and presenting a high rugged cliff of breccia[23], fronting that onwhich the granite dyke is so conspicuous: the junction of this rock withthe schistus cut by the granite and the whin would have beeninteresting; but although we must have been at times within a few yardsof it, the actual contact was every where hid by the sea. The whole of the south-west end of this island is formed of breccia, being an assemblage of angular and water-worn pieces of schistus, quartz, and some other rocks, the whole having the appearance of agreat shingle beach and cliffs. The fragments of the schistus in thisrock are similar to that which forms the cliff first spoken of. (Specimen 8. ) The theory which presented itself to us on the spot was, that the lowerpart of the great mass of strata which now forms the centre of theisland was formerly at the bottom of the ocean; and that the westernpart, now a firm breccia, had been a beach of shingle produced by theaction of the waves on the upper strata, which may have formed a coastabove the sea: the granite of the eastern end of the island had beenforced into its present situation from beneath the strata, withsufficient violence to dislocate and contort the beds nearest to it, andto inject the liquid granite into the rents formed by the heaving actionof the strata as they were raised up. It is natural to suppose that theragged edges of the strata forming the sides of these cracks would besubjected to a grinding action, from which the strata more remote mightbe exempted; and in this way we may account for the extraordinarytwisting, and separation of masses along the whole course of the granitedyke. In the dyke, as well as in the veins which branch from it, thereare numerous insulated portions of schistus. That this last wassoftened, seems to follow from the frequent instances which occur of itsbeing bent back upon itself without producing cracks. The same heat, generated by the melted granite in the neighbourhood, and which appearsto have been just sufficient to soften the schistus, may be supposed tohave reduced the shingle beach to a state of semi fusion by the aid ofsome flux contained in the sand scattered amongst the fragments. Wecould not discover any circumstance by which the relative antiquity ofthe two dykes mentioned above could be inferred. The junction of the granite and schistus above described, resembles verymuch the well known junction at the Lowrin mountain, in Galloway, described by my father, Sir James Hall, in the 7th vol. Of the EdinburghTransactions. It is also very like the junctions at the Cape of GoodHope, described in the same volume. The same theory has been found toexplain them all. Specimen 7. Fine-grained granite, composed of white quartz, whitefeldspar, and olive-green mica. This rock (7) forms the eastern end ofthe island; the schistus next described (8) the centre, and the brecciamentioned immediately afterwards (9) the western end. 8. Fine-grained compact micaceous schistus: some of the specimens appearto contain plumbago. The strata lie north-west and south-east, dippingonly a few degrees from the horizontal line. 9. Breccia, composed of angular and contorted fragments of micaceousschistus, and angular pieces of feldspar and quartz. This rock forms thewestern end of Hutton's Island[24]: it rises in high rugged cliffs. Theangular pieces of schistus are of a similar rock to that described above(8). 10. Dyke, porphyritic granite, composed of white quartz, white feldspar, and bronze-coloured mica. This dyke cuts across the schistus lastmentioned, in a direction north-east and south-west. It is nearlyvertical, and varies in breadth from nine to forty feet, with numerousramifications. 11. Dyke of compact whin stone. This dyke is composed of five layers ofprisms, whose length is at right angles to the walls of the dyke. It isnearly vertical. Its direction north and south, and is about five feetthick. MAIN LAND OF COREA. 12. Lead-coloured, fine-grained, micaceous schistus. From the main landof Corea, latitude 36º 10' north, longitude 126º 48' east. The stratalie north-west and south-east, and are nearly vertical; the nativesobjected to our examining the cliffs, though distant less than a quarterof a mile from the beach. ANOTHER ISLAND OFF THE COAST OF COREA. Latitude 34º 23' north, longitude 126º east. 13. Decomposing fine-grained rock; composed of flesh-coloured feldspar, white quartz, and porcelain clay. ANOTHER ISLAND NEAR THE ABOVE. 14. Rock composed of white feldspar and quartz. The strata of this rockwere very much contorted. This rock is the most general of any in this range of islands, at leastas far as we had opportunities of examining them. The islands on thiscoast are very numerous; they lie in great clusters along a line ofthree degrees and a half of latitude. The islands vary in length fromfive or six miles to as many yards, and are of all forms. We saw nonethat were remarkably high, and none which seemed volcanic. As our stayon the coast was only nine days, and as the ships were almost alwaysunder weigh except at night, it was quite impossible to make any carefulor valuable geological observations. It offers a splendid field tofuture voyagers. GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND. 1. Grey stratified lime-stone without shells. This specimen was takenfrom the north end of the island, where the ranges of hills were mostlycomposed of it: the strata being highly inclined. The hills rise to theheight of four or five hundred feet, and present nothing interesting. 2. Fawn-coloured, cellular, granular lime-stone. The cliffs at Napakiangare composed of this rock; it also appears to stretch along the whole ofthe south-west and south parts of the coast. In the narrative, this rockhas been erroneously called coral. These cliffs are curiously hollowedout into horizontal caves, which have all the appearance of having beenworn by the dashing of the waves; but as it is obvious, that in theirpresent situation the sea can never have reached the face of the cliffs, it seems probable that the whole coast may have been raised up, by agentle movement, without dislocating the strata, or disturbing thehorizontal position, in which it seems probable that these caves wereformed. The variety of coralines which girt the shores of this island was verygreat, and large collections were made, as well of these as of thenumerous zoophites which filled up every part of the reefs belowhigh-water mark. This collection, of which unfortunately no duplicateswere kept, was afterwards lost. SULPHUR ISLAND Lies in latitude 27º 5' north, and longitude 128º 25' east. An accuraterepresentation of it is given as a frontispiece. We attempted to land, but the surf broke every where so high against therock that this was impossible. There is a crater on the left side withwhite smoke issuing from it; this has a strong sulphuric smell. Thesides of the crater are stratified. The south end of the island is aboutfour or five hundred feet high, and is formed of a dark dingy red rockdistinctly stratified; at several places it is cut vertically by greatdykes, which being more durable than the strata which they intersect, stand out from the face of the cliffs to a considerable distance. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 19: Specimen 7, infra. ] [Footnote 20: Specimen 8. ] [Footnote 21: Specimen 10. ] [Footnote 22: Specimen 11, infra. ] [Footnote 23: Specimen 9. ] [Footnote 24: The island above described was so named by CaptainMaxwell, in compliment to the memory of the distinguished philosopherwhose theory has been used to explain the curious phenomena which itexhibits. ] END OF THE APPENDIX. VOCABULARY OF THE LANGUAGESPOKEN ATTHE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND, IN THEJAPAN SEA. COMPILED BYHERBERT JOHN CLIFFORD, ESQ. LIEUTENANT, ROYAL NAVY. IN TWO PARTS. OBSERVATIONSONTHE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE. Of the grammar of this language I pretend to little knowledge, but thefollowing observations upon some points may perhaps be worth attendingto. The most striking circumstance, is the frequent use of the words_noo_ and _ka_; the former of which seems to signify _of_, or the _'s_of the English language, as will appear in _choo noo ka_, a man's skin, or the skin of a man; _oóshee noo stínnoo_, the bullock's horn, or thehorn of the bullock; and in _moo noo kee saw'teeyoong_, to dig potatoesout of the ground, or, literally, potatoes of the earth to dig out. _Ka_, it will be observed, is used to denote skin, and also seems tosignify a receiver or enclosure, as is expressed in the words _meézeeka_, a well of water, _meézee_ being water, and _ka_, the placecontaining the water; and in _ya ka saut eéchoong_, to go out of aplace, _ka_ in this instance expressing the enclosure, _ya_ you, and_sawt eéchoong_ to go out from, as _eéchoong_ signifies to go. The adjective is for the most part placed before the substantive, as_teeshoóee íckkeega_, an old man; _wúsa ya_, a mean house; and _wóckkainnágo_, a young woman. There is little variety in the termination of the verb, the tenses beingexpressed by other means. I have throughout the vocabulary consideredthe termination _oong_ to denote the infinitive, and have translated itas such, even when the sense points to another mood, merely to preserveconsistency; there are, however, a few exceptions to this, and some ofthe verbs will be found to terminate in _ang_, _ing_, _awng_, _ong_, and_ung_. Those ending in _oong_ seem generally to make the participleterminate in _ee_, as _wóckkayoong_, to separate, makes the participle_wóckkatee_, separated. The negative termination of the verb isgenerally _nang_ or _rang_, as _noómang_, not to drink, is the negativeof _noómoong_, to drink; _meérang_, the negative of _meéoong_, to see;and _noóboorang_, the negative of _noóbooyoong_, to climb or ascend. _Na_ is also used as a negative, _coónsoona_, not to rub out, being thenegative of _coónshoong_, to rub out. _Nang_, _nárang_, and _náshee_ are negatives used with a substantive, and are always placed after it, as _koómoo nang_, no clouds; _meézeenárang_, no water; and _feéjee náshee_, no beard. Some peculiarities will be found by referring to the following words:deaf; the sole of the foot; head-ache; palm of the hand; the toe; andthe wrist. PART I. VOCABULARY OF ENGLISH AND LOO-CHOO WORDS ALPHABETICALLY ARRANGED, WITHNOTES, AND OCCASIONAL REFERENCES TO THE SENTENCES IN THE SECOND PART. VOCABULARYOF THELOO-CHOO LANGUAGE. Note on the orthography used in the following vocabulary. --The sounds inthe Loo-Choo words are expressed by the letters which in Englishcorrespond nearest to those sounds. There are no mute vowels. The letter_a_ is invariably sounded as in the English word _far_. The emphasis ismarked by an accent over the last vowel of the accented syllable. _Ee_and _oo_, whether accented or not, always express one syllable. _English. _ _Loo-Choo. _ Above, or the top of a thing Wee. Alive Itch-it´chee. Alive, to be It´ch-chawng. All (every one) Eénea, or I´gnea (Italian gn[25]. ) All drink, every one drinks I´gnea noódung. Anchor Eéki. Angry Neétsa. Ankle Shánna go oóshee. Answer, to Aree ga aányoong. Arm Teénoo. Arrow Eéa. Awake, to Oóking. Awaking Oócatee. Bad Neésha. Bad man Yáwna moon, or Yánna choo. Bad building Wása ya. Bailer of a canoe Yoo-toóee. Baize, red Moóshung. Bake, to I´rreechang. Bake bread, to Quáshee soókooyoong. Bamboo-cane Dákee. Bamboo (instrument of punishment) Boóchee. Basket Teéroo. Beads Támma. Beard Feéjee. Beardless Feéjee náshee. Beat, to Soó-go-yoong. ----, as the heart Nácoo-choong. ---- on the gong Tánna óchoong (lit. To play on the gong. ) ---- to, with the bamboo Chíbbee oótchoong. Bed Coócha. Bell St´chee-gánnee. Belly Wátta. Belly, big Wátta mágesa. Below, or the bottom of a thing Stcha. Bend to, a thing Támmeeoong. Bird Hótoo. Birdcage Hótoo-coo. Bishop at chess (lit. Priest) B[=o]dsee, or B[=o]dzee[26]. Bite to, as a dog Coóyoong[27]. Bitter Injássa. Black Korósa. Bleed, to, (lit. To draw blood) Chee-hoóga-choong. Blind Meégua. Blind man Akee meégua. Block Kooroóma. Blood Chee[28]. Blow up, to, or light a fire Foó-tchoong. Blowing (through a musical instrument) Gácoo. Blue (colour) Táma-eeroo. Blue (light colour) Meéz-eeroo. Blunt Chírrarung. Blush (lit. Red) Akássa. Boat Tímma, or Sabánnee, Boat, the bottom of a Nakámma. Boil, to Tájeeing. Book Sheémootsee[29]. Bone Coótsee. Bonnet, or head-dress worn by the natives Hat´chee Mat´chee. Both alike, or all the same Neéchawng, or Yoónoomoong. Bow to, to a person passing Deéshoong. Bow Yoómee. Bow, to pull a Yoómee feétchoong. Bower Tánnan. Boy (lit. A man child) Ic´kkeega wárrabee. Brass Cheéjackko, or Toong. Bread Quáshee. Bread-basket, or tray Quáshee boong. Breadth Hábba. Break, to, a stick Oóyoong[30]. ---------- a tea-cup Wy´oong. Breakers Námee. Breast Moónee. Breathe, to It´chee shoong[31]. Bridge Háshee[32]. Bring here Moot´chee coo. Bring fire here Feetoótee coo. Brinjal (an Indian vegetable) Nasíbbee. Broke Oótee, Chírreetee. Brother Weékee. Bucket Tágoo. Bull Woo Oóshee. Burn, to Yáddee, or A´kka. Butterfly Habároo. Button Hogánnee, or kánnee. By and by A´tookára[33]. Cake, a sweet flowered Magía quáshee. Calf Oóshee gua. Calf of the leg Koónda. Candle Daw. Candlestick Soócoo[34]. Candle and stick together Daw´secoo. Cannon I´shee-beéa. Cap Cammoódee, Maw´tsee. Carpenter's black line box Stínseeboo. [35]Carry to, or take away Moótchee eéchoong. ------------, a basket on the head Téeroo kámmeetong[35]. ------------, a child in the arms Dáchoong. ------------, with a bar on the shoulders[35] Katam´meeoong. Carrying a basket on the arm Téeroo tenakíkakíttee. Cask Soócoo. Castle Eegoósecoo, or Gooseécoo. Cat Mía, or My´a (Chinese). Cat, to mew as a Náchoong deéoong. Catch, to Kaoótoochung. Catch, to, a butterfly Kabároo skéhdang. Chair Ee (Chinese). Charcoal Chácheejing. Cheeks Hoo. Cheese (literally cow's milk and fat) Oóshee noo[36] chee quátee. Chessmen Choónjee. Child (infant) Wórrabee. Child, male (literally man-child) I´ckkeega wórrabee. Child, female (literally woman-child) Innágo wórrabee. Children Qua. Chin Oootoóga. Chin, the beard of the (lit. Lower beard) Stcha feéjee. Chopsticks Fáshay, or May´shung. Climb, to, a pine-tree Mátsee kee noóbooyoong. Cloth, or clothes Ching. Cloth, red Akássa nónoo. Clouds Koómoo. Cock Toóee. Cocoa-nut tree Nash´ikee. Cocoa-nuts Náee. Cold Feésa. Cold water Feézeeroo Meézee. Colours Eéroo eéroo. Come, to Choong[37]. Come here Cung coo. Come, to, down a hill Oódeeyoong. --------- on board Choó-oong. Coming up from below Nooboóteecoo. Compass Kárahigh, or Kássee toóee[38]. Conk shell Neénya goóroo. Cool Seedásha. Copper Acoógannee. Coral Oóroo Cover, to, over with sand Sínna sheeóstang. Cough, to Sáck-quee. Count, to Oohaw´koo-oong[39]. Country A´whfee. Cow Mee Oóshee. Crab Gaánnee. Crab, to crawl as a Hóyoong. Creep, to Haw´yoong. Crow, to O´tayoong. Crow Gárrasee. Cry, to Nachoong. Curlew U´nguainan. Cut, to Cheéoong, or feéoong, or feéjoong. Dance Oodoóee, or Makátta. Dark Coórasing. Daughter Innágo oóngua, or úngua. Day (at Napakiang) Nit´chee[40]. ---- (in the north of the island) I´sheeree. ---- after to-morrow Asáttee. ---- the following Asá tínnacha. Daylight Heéroo. Dead Sheénoong, or gang. Deaf (literally, ear not to hear) Mímmee chee karung. Deep Fookássa. Deity (the Indian God Boudha) Boósa (Chinese). Dice Sheégo roócoo. Dice, to play with Sheégo roócoo ochoong. Die, to Níntoong. Dig, to, up the ground Oóchoong. ----, potatoes Moo noo kee saúteeyoong. Directly (by and by) Atookar´ree, or Atookára. Dive, to, under water Seénoong. Dog Ing. Dog barks I´nnoo nachoong. Don't stir (said to a person rising to Wfay´sa[41]. Depart) Door Hasbírree. Draw, to, a picture Eé-katchoong[42]. --------- blood Chee na by´oong. Dress, to Ching cheéoong. Drink Noómoo. Drink, to Noómoong[43]. --------- wine Sack´kee noómoong. -----, not to, wine Sack´kee noómang. Drop, to, a thing Oocheérooshoong. Drunk Weétee[44]. -----, to get Weéoong. Dry, to Karacháoong. -------, powder Eénshoo foóshoong. Dung, cow, for manure Oóshee noo coósoo. Duck, a tame A´feeroo. Eagle Hack´ka. Ear Mímmee. ---, left Feéjeeree noo mímmee. ---, right Meéjeree noo mímmee. Ears, to pull the Mímmee feéoong, or feétchoong. Earth Jee. East Fingássee. Eat, to Kámoong[45]. ---, I Moónoo kámoong. ---, to, boiled rice Méeshee kámoong, or kánoung. Eggs Coóga. Eight [46]Kwat´chee, or fat´chee (Loo-Choo); Eeyat´see (Japan. ) Eighteen Kwat´chee joo, or fat´chee joo. Eighty Hapáck coo, or Habbáck coo. Elbow Teénoo feéjee. Eleven Too. Empty, to, or pour out Hárashoong. Ends of a thing Yoókoo. Every thing A´dee-coódee[47]? Exchange, to, fans Káyra. Exclamation of surprise Yeéah, or Cheé-oo-oo. ----------------------- I´yi-yi-yi-yi. Expression of respect, or salutation Taw. ------------- thanks in returning How. Any thing Eye Mee. Eyebrows Maí-oh. Eyelashes Matsídjee. Eyes, to open the Mee hoóra choong. ----, closing the Neeboóee. Face Steéra, or Skeéra[48]. Fall, to Taw´shoong, or Taw´ring[49]. Fan O´jee. ---, to, one's self O´jeeshoong. ---, to offer a O´jee kára. Fat Quaítee. Father Shoo. Feathers of a fowl Toóee noo han´nee. Female Mee. Fence of bamboo Dack´kee gat´chee. Fiddle Neéshing. ------, to play on the Feétchoong (lit. To pull. ) ------ strings Cheéroo. Fifteen Goónjoo. Fifty Gooshácoo, or gooyácoo. Fill, to I´ddeecoong. Find, to Toómatung[50]. Finger Eébee. ------, fore Choo sháshee. ------, little Eébeegwaw. ------, middle Nack´ka eébee. ------ ring Nanna shee. ------ nail Thímmee. Fire Fee. ----, to put out Fee cha-chee. ----, to, a gun Narashoong. Fish Eeo[51]. ----, a small Coosa eeo. ------------- blueish Tamung eeo. ----, a large red Matchee eeo. ----, the back of a Kánjee. ----, the fin of a Hannay. ----, the gills of a Ajee. ----, the head of a Chee-boo-soo. ----, the tail of a Dzoo. ----, to catch Eéo kákeeoong. ---- hook and line Cheéna. ---- spear Eéo stit´chee. Five Goo (Loo-Choo); Ittítsee (Japan)[52]. ---- sided figure Roo-ka-coo. Flag Háta. Flail[53] Coóra ma baw[53]. Flesh Shíshee. Flesh, no Shíshee ning. Flower, a red, the name of A´ckka hanna. Flower of a plant Fánna. Flute, to play on the Hánshaw. Fly Háyeh. Fly, to, as a bird Toóbeeoong. Foot Shánna. ----, the sole of the Shánna watta (lit. Belly of the foot). ----, of a bird Físha. Forehead Fitcháyeh. Forty Speéakoo, or Sábacoo. Four [54]Shee (Loo-Choo); Eéots see, or joo (Japan). Four-sided figure Sícca Coódair. Fourteen Sheénjoo. Friend Eedoóshee. Frog A´tta beétsee. Full Meetchíttee. ----, half Ham´boong. Get up Tá-tee. Girdle O´bee. Girl Tack´kee. Give, to Queéoong[55]. Glass Kágung. Go, to Eéchoong[56]. ------, away Haddee. ------, in a boat Tímma ki eéchoong. Go, to, fast Háyee sit´choong. ------, up a hill Noóbooyoong (lit. To climb, ). --, not to, up a hill Noóboorang. --, to, slow Yaw´na eéchoong. ------, on shore Amáki eéchoong, or moódoeéong. Goat Feéja. ----, he Woo Feéja. ----, she Mee Feéja. Going down below Oórittee coo. Gold Ching. Good (for eating) Mása. ---- (proper) Choorása. ---- man Yoókachoo, or Eéchoo. ---- bye (taking leave) Wóckkatee. ---- for nothing Máconárang. ----, not Worroósa. Grand-children Soong mága. Grass Goosit´chee, or Coosá. -----, to cut Coosá cheéoong. Grasshopper Sheéto, or Sáyeh. Grave Háka. Greybeard Feéjee sheerájee. Great coat (made of straw, worn also New. By the Chinese) Great man (Chinese Tajin) A´jee, or Páychin. ----- many Oowhóko. Green O´sa. Grind, to, the teeth Ha gíssee gíssee. Groaning Doónee. Hair Kurrázzee[57]. Hammer Goóshung. ------ of a stone-cutter Oónoo. Hand Kee[58]. ----, right Meéjeeree. ----, left Feéjeeree. Handkerchief Tee-sádjee[59]. Handsome Choorása. Harp San´gshing. Hat, worn by the natives Kássa. ---------------- English Kamoóree. Have not got Nang[60], or Nárang. ------------ water Meézee[61] nárang. Head, human Boósee. Head-ache (lit. Sick head) Seeboóroo yádong. Head, of a bird Tseeboóroo. Hear, to Sit´choong, or Skit´choong. ----, I Moónoo sit´choong[62]. ----, I cannot (or understand) Sit´cheerang, or Sit´cheekárang. Heart Nácoo. Heaven Ting. ------, praying to Ting oóneewhfa[63]. Heavy Boósa. Heel of the foot Shánna-a-roo. Here Coo. Hide, to, or cover (lit. Cannot see) Meérang. ---- of a bullock Oóshee noo ka. Him (a third person) A´ree (meéchay)[64]. Hips Gammácoo. Hissing Seésee. Hoe Quáya. Hold, to take, of a person Kat´sameéoong. Holding a thing (a butterfly) Meecháwree[65]. (Letting a thing escape) Oótoo Batch[65]. Hole A´nna. ---- to make in the ground A´nna hoóyoong. ---- in the jeeshee, or urn Mee hoojíttee[66]. Hoop of a cask Obee[67] Horn of a bullock Oóshee noo stínnoo. Horse Ma[68] (Chinese). Hot A´tteesa. Hour Twit´chee[69]. House Ya, or Kat´chee. House where salt is made Máshoo ya. Hundred Sing. Hungry Yása. I, or me (a first person) Wang[70] (choóee). Jar, a large earthen Kámee. ---, its top or cover Hoóta. Inch, one Eésing. Inches, ten; Eesháckkoo. Infant Wórrabee. Ink Sim´mee. Inkstand Sim´mee shee. Inside Oóchee. ----, or soft of bread Mee. Iron Títzee. Jump, to Móyoong. Key Quaw. Kick, to, with the foot King. Kid (lit. Small goat) Feéja água. Kill, to Sheémoong, or Koórashoong[71] ----, birds Hótoo eéchung. ----, by the fire of a gun Doogaítee sheénoung. King, or monarch Kówung (Chinese). King's palace Oogoós-coo. Kiss, to, (lit. Kissing the mouth) Coóchee spoótee[72]. Kiss Sheemir´ree. Knee Stínsee. Kneel, to Shúmma git´cheeoong. Kneeling Shúmma git´chee. Knife, crooked, for cutting grass Eeránna. -----, small (a penknife) Seégo. Knight, at chess Samoóree. Knot Coónja coótchee. ----, to tie a Coónjoong. Knuckles Foóshee. Lacker, to Noóyoong. Ladder Háshee. Lake, or light purple Coonmoóla sat´chee. Land, or shore Amáki. Lantern Tíndoo. -------, folding Cháwching. Lantern, glass Támma-doóroo. Large Weésa. Laugh, to Wárrayoong. Laughing Wárratee. Lead (metal) Meéjee kan´nee. Leaf (of a tree) Wha. ----, green (lit. The leaf of a tree) Kee noo wha. ----, withered (lit. A dried leaf) Kárree wha. Lean (not fat) Yaítee. ----, to, against a thing Yookátatoong[73]. Learning, or studying Cootooba[74]. Let, to, fall a thing Nágeeoong. Letter, or character Jee. ------, to seal a Ing sit´choong. ------, to write a Jee kátchoong. Letting go a thing O´too batch. [75] Loo-Choo song Loóchoo, or Doóchoo oóta. Lift, to, a thing Moóchoong. Light, not dark (daylight) Feéroo, or Heéroo. -----, not heavy Gása. -----, to, a pipe Sheéoong. Lips Seéba. Lip, lower Stit´cha seéba. ---, upper Quaw seéba. ---, the beard on the lower Coofeéjee. Liquor Sac´kkeedia, or Sam´tchoo (Chinese). Live, or reside, to Sim´matong[76]. Lizard U´ndlecha. Look, or see, to Meéoong, or Meéing[77]. ----, to, at, or see the sun Teéda meéing. ----, at a distance Han´na-rat´chee. Look, to, closely Teétsheeoong. Looking-glass Kágung. Long, or length Nagása. Lose, to Oótoochung. Make, to, clothes Ching náwyoong[78]. Make, a noise Hábbeecoong. Make, a rope Cheéna oótchoong[79]. Make, salt Máshoo tátchoong. Make, sugar Sáta skóyoong[80]. Make, a tea-pot Tácoo soókooyoong[80]. Making a false step Koonsínda dakat´chee. Male Woo. Mallet, wooden Cheé-chee. Man (homo) Choo. Man (vir) I´ckkeega[81]. Man, medical I´shsha. Man, of rank Páychin, or Quángning (Chinese). Man, short Injása. Man, sick I´ckkeega yádong. Man, the skin of a Choo-noo-ka. Man, small Feecoósa. Mast of a ship, or boat Hásseeda. Mat Mooshoóroo, or Hátung. Match, or fire-stick used in the temples Kaw[82]. Me, or I Wang. Meal, 1st (at sunrise) Stim´mee teémoong. Meal, 2nd (two hours after) A´ssa bung. Meal, 3rd (at noon) Feéra moómoong. ----, 4th (at sunset) Yoó bung. Measure, to Gáwjee háckkiyoong. Melon Toóqua. Men, a great many Oowhóko Ickkeega. Mew, to, as a cat Nachoong deeoong. Midday, or noon Teéda mátchoo. Milk Chee. ----, to draw Chee háyoong. Million Chaw. Mine Coóra wa moong. Mixed Bátee. Moon, the Stchay. ----, or month, one It´chee stit´chee, or gwaútsee[83]. ----, full Oostit´chee, or Mároo. ----, half Mécasit´chee. Monkey Sároo. More Gnáfing. Morrow A´cha. Mother Um´ma. Mud Doóroo. Musical instrument, to play on a Koótoo feétchoong. Mustachios Wa feéjee. Nail to hang things on Coójee. Naked Harráka. Name Na. ----, my Wa na. ----, your Ya na. ----, his A´rree ga na. Navel Whoósoo[84]. Neck Coóbee. ----, short (lit. No neck) Coóbee nang[85]. Needle Háyee skíttee. Net, fishing Sheébee. Night Yoóroo. -----, one It´chee yoóroo. Nine Coo[86] (Loo-Choo), Koónitsee (Japan). Nineteen Coónjoo. Ninety Coohácoo, or Queeshácoo. Nipples Chee. No Oóngba, or Oomba[87]. Nod, to Nájeechoong. North Cheéta. Nose Hónna. Nostrils Hónnakee. Octagon Hacac´koo. Offer, to Ozágadee. -----, wine Ozágadee sac´kkee. -----, more, or again Mátta ozágadee. Old Teeshoóee. --- man Teeshoóee ic´kkeega. Olives Kárang. One It´chee (Loo-Choo), Teétesee, or ta (Japan[88]. ) Onions Dehchaw. Open, to, or unlock A´keeoong[89]. Open it Akírree[2]. Orange, fruit Koóneeboo. ------, the rind of an Koóneeboo noo ka. ------, divisions Mee. ------, the seed of an Tánee. Overturn, to, or upset Koóroobáshoong. Outside Foóca. -------, of bread (lit. Skin) Ka. Paddle of a canoe Wayácoo. Paint, to Oóroo[90] sheenoóstang. Palanquin chair Kágoo. Palm of the hand (lit. Belly of the hand) Tee noo wátta[91]. Pant, to Eétchee hoótoong. Panting Eétchee. Paper of any kind Kábee. Path Yamána meetchee. Paupaw apple Wangshoóee. Pawns at chess Toómoo. Pencil Hoódee. Perspiration Ac´kkaddee[92]. Pepper pod Quáda coósha. Pick up any thing, to Moóchoong. Picture Keé-ee, or Kackkeé-ee. Pig Boóta. Pin worn in the hair of boys Jeépha, or Jeéwa. --- flower head worn by men Kam´mashíshee. ---, ladle head, do. Oósheethúshee. Pinch, to Kátcheemeéoong[93]. Pine, the wild Adánnee. ----, leaves of the Wha. ----, fruit of the Adánnee nay. ---- tree Mátesee kee. Pipe Shírree. ----, the mouth-piece of a Quee coótchee. ----, wooden part of a Saw. ----, bowl of a Sárra. ----, case of a Shírree bookoóroo. Pitchfork Feéra. Pivot on which the scull of a boat traverses Jeéco[94]. Place Skáta. Plank of a boat Fánna[95]. Plant Mee boósha. Plantain, leaf of a Woo noo fa. Play, to, at chess Choónjee óchoong. ----, with dice Sheégo roócoo óchoong. ----, on a musical instrument Koótoo feétchoong[96]. ----, on the flute Hánshaw. ----, on the violin Feétchoong. Pleased Oósha. Plough Sit´chee. ------, to Sit´choong. Point, to, with the finger Noóchoong. Potatoes, sweet Moo, or Moóndee. Pour in, to I´rreeing. ---- out, to Cheéjoong. Pouring Cheéjee. Praying to the Deity Boósa, or Bósa meéwhfa[97]. ------- to Heaven Ting oóneewhfa. Powder Eéenshoo. ------, to dry or air Eénshoo foóshoong. Pregnant Kássee jeétawng. Press, to, or squeeze Sheétskeeoong. Prick, to, with a knife Hoogáshoong[98]. Pricking Yátee. Prickly pear bush Cooroójee. Priest (Bonzes of China) Bódzee. ------, the silk dress of a Eéchoo coóroom. ------, the cotton dress of a Básha coóroom. ------, the belt of silk of a Quára. Pull, to, or draw out Injat´chee. ----, out of the ground Noójoong. ----, a person Feétchoong, or fit´choong. Purple Moóla sat´chee. Push, to, with the hand Koóroo báshoong[99]. Put, to, a thing above or upright I´sheeoong. -------, up a thing above, high Injáshoong. -------, on the hat Kánjoong. -------, or lay a thing down Oócheeking. -------, a thing in I´ttee. ---------------- under Kásseemeéoong. -------, on clothes Ching cheéoong. -------, out fire Fee cháchee. -------, a ring on the finger Eébee gánnee sáshoong. Quack, to, like a duck Náchoong. Quarrel, to Títskoong. Queen, also at chess Oónajerra. Quick Háyee. Quick, to be Yooháoong Rain A´mee. ----, to A´mee foóyoong. ----, heavy Sheejeékoo foóyoong. ----, lightly Koókoo foóyong. Rainbow Noo-oójee. Rat A´ck-a-sa. Read, to Yoómoong, or Yoóno-oong. Red Akása. Rind of a shaddock Pow noo ka. ------- an orange Koóneeboo noo ka. ---- (lit. Skin) Ka. Ribbon, silk Eéchoo. Ribs Sáwkee. Rice Coómee. ----, boiled U´mbang, or bang, or oómbang[100]. Ride, to, a horse Man´ayoong. Right, in writing characters Kátchee yánjee. Ring Coósayee. ---- for the finger Eébee gánnee. ----, to put on a Eébee gánnee sáshoong. Rise, to, from a chair Tátchoong. Road Meéchee. Rock See, or Weésa is´hee. Root (bulb) Weé-ee. Rope Chínna. ----, to make Chínna oóchoong. Rough Soóroo soóroo. Round Morroósa. -----, a circle Maroódair. Round, all round Maroóee. Rowing in a boat Coójee. Rub, to Soósooing, or soósootee oótooshung. ---, out Seéree oótooshoong, or Soósootee; oóteetung, or coónshoong. ---, not out Coónsoona. Rubber, Indian Neéka. Rum, or spirits Káraboo. Run, to Háyay sit´choong[101]. Running Háyay. Sail of a ship or boat Foo. Sail, to, in a boat Hárashoong. Salt Máshoo. ---- water Spookarása Meézee. ---- to the taste Spookarása Salute, to, a person Kámeeoong. Sand Sínna. Say it, I can Ang. ------, I cannot Nárang[102]. Sea Námmee. ---, the, or ocean Oóshoo. ---, shore Háma, or Oómee. --- weed Moo[103]. ---, high Oonámmee. Seal of a watch Ing, or Fang. Seam between two planks Nágo. Scrape, to Sájoong. Scratching Weégosa. Screw, to Meégoorashoong[104]. Screw Jírree. Scull of a boat Doo. Scull, to, a boat Meégoorashoong. See to, or look, (lit. To eye) Meéoong[105]. See, I cannot Meérang. Seed Nigh. Separate, to Wóckkayoong. Seven Sit´chee(Loo-Choo); Nánnatsee (Japan). Seventeen Sit´chee joo. Seventy Sit´chee hácoo. Servant Toómoo, or Eéree, or Sad´ge-ee. Sew, to Náwyoong, or No-á-yoong. Shade, or shady Kájee. Shake, to Kátcheeming. Shaking a thing Yoótoo yoótoo. Shallow Asássa. Sharp Aka, or chírraring? Shave, to Soóyoong. Shell Oósheemaw. Shell fish (like a crab) A´mang. Shield Timbáyee. Ship Hoónee[106]. ----, large Hooboónee, or Wesára Hoónee. ----, small Hoónee gua, or Coosára Hoónee. ---- goes away Hoónee eéchoong. ---- returns Moóchee eéchoong. Shoes, or sandals Sábock, or Sabaugh. Short Injása. Shoulders Kútta. Shrub, with leaves resembling a Sootítsee. Palm tree, probably sago tree Shut, to Meecheéoong. Shut it Mechírree. Skin Ka. Skin, of a bullock Oóshee noo ka. ----, of a man Choo noo ka. Sick Yádong. ---- man Ic´kkeega yádong. ---- belly Wátta éddee. Side, of a person Hárraga. ----, of a thing Táttee. Sigh, to Hoóee eéchee. Silk Eéchoo. Silver Jing. Sing, to Oótashoong, or oótayooshoong, or oótayoong. Sister O'nigh. Sit down, to Eéoong. --------, in a chair Eéchawng, or Eeree. --------, on the ground Eémeesháwdee, or Eédee. --------, or be seated Yoocoótee. Six Roócoo (Loo-Choo); Moótsee (Japan). Sixteen Roócoojoo. Sixty Rookpáckcoo. Sleep, to Nínjoong. Sleeping Níntee. Slow Yoóna, or Yáwna. Small Coósa. Smell, to Kánnoong, or Kasháshoong. Smell Kabbásha[107]. Smoke, to Foótchoong, or koótchoong. Smoke Kínsee. Smoking tobacco Tobácco foókee. Smooth Nándooroosa. Smooth down, to Nádeeyoong. Snake Háboo. Snake stings Háboo coótee. Snatch, to Kátayoong. Sneeze, to Hónna feéoong. Snore, to Níntoong. Snuff (lit. Nose tobacco) Spáchee, or Hónna Tobácco. Sole of the foot (lit. Belly of the foot) Shánna wátta. Son Ic'kkeega oóngua. Song Oóta[108]. Sore from riding Náutee. Sorry Natskásha. Sour Seésa. South Whfa or fa. Speak, to Moónooyoong[109]. Spear to catch fish with Toóga oóyoong. Spectacles (lit. Eye-glass) Mee kágung. Spider Coóba. Spider's web Coóba mang. Spit, to Simpáy-oong. Spittle Simpáyee. Spoon Káa. Spy glass Toómee kágung. Square Káckkoo. ------, of a stone mason Bánjaw gaúnnee. Squeeze, to Mímmeejoong. Stab, to Choong. Stand up, to Tátteeoong. Stand back to back Coósee noóchasa. Stars Foóshee. Stay on board ship Hoónee oótee. Stem of a boat Oomoótee. Stern of a boat Coóma toómo. Stone Is´hee. ----- cutter's hammer Oong. -----, carved Káwroo[110]. Stop Mátee[111]. Straw Wárra. Strike, to Réjeecoong. String Ko-eéroo. Strong Choósa. ------ wine Choozáckkee, or Sáckkeechoo. Sucking Noódee[112]. Sugar Sáta. ----- cane Oójee. -----, to make Sáta skóyoong. Sulky Hárradat´chee. -----, not Hárradat´chee soóna. Sun Teéda. Sunset Teéda ságayoong[113]. Sunshine Teéda téttee. Sunrise Teéda ágayoong. Swallowing Noónootoósha. Sweet Amása. ----- wine A´mazac´kkee[114]. ----- potatoes Moo, or Moóndee. Swim, to Weéjoong. Swimming Weéjee. Sword Tat´chee. A flight of stone steps Keesíee. A single step Coodámmee. To stick a thing in the ground Táteeing. Table, round Mádooee. Tail of a bird Dzoo. Take off the hat, to Hásseeoong. [115] Tattoo marks on the right arm Oódeemaw. --------------- on the left arm Toóga. Tea cup Cháwung. -------, to break a Wy´oong. --- pot Tácoo. ---, in an octagon bucket Tácoo cee. ---, the metal pot in the inside of Tácoo mee. The bucket ---, the cover of a Tácoo whfoóta. ---, the handle of a Tácoo tee. ---, the ears of the bucket of a Tácoo toódee. Tear, to Yáyoong. ---- a thing in pieces Cheéreetawng. Tears Náda. Teeth Há (an aspirate). -----, to set on edge Ha gíshee gish. Temple Meéa (Chinese). ------ yard Tírra. Temples, human Koómeegung. Ten Joo (Loo-Choo); Too (Japan). Thank you Ka foóshee. That A´ddee. There Ic´kkee. Thigh Moómoo. Thirteen Sanjoo. Thirty Sangbácoo. This Coódee. Thousand Mang. --------, ten O´koo. Three Sang (Loo-Choo); Meétesee (Japan). Three sided figure Sang cac´kkoo. Thread, sewing Eéchoo[116]. Thresh, to Oótchoong[117]. Throat Noódee[118]. Throw to, a stone at a mark Náging. --------, away any thing Oóchung-ging. Thumb Hoóee Eébee. Tie to, a knot Coónjoong. Tide Kádezee. Tin Sheédookánnee. Tired, or fatigued Amus´heenoo. Tobacco Tobácco[119] (as in England). ------- pouch Coóshee sat´chee, or foósa. To-day A´choo. To-morrow A´cha. Toe Shánna eébee (lit. Foot finger). Toe-nail Shánna thímmee. Tomb Háka. Tomb-stone Coóroo ishee. Tongue Stcha. Torn, part of any thing Yádee tung. Touch, to Sáyoong, or sit´choong. Town Meéattoo, or Métto. Tray, or waiter Chírreedeh. Tread, to Koóraming. Tremble to, with cold Koórooyoong. Tree Kee. ----, branch of a Eéda. ----, Banyan Gádesee mároo kee. ----, with red and white flowers Hoóyoo. Tree, with large red flowers, which Dee-eégo-kee. Are called _acka banna_ Trowsers Coo, or Hackkáma. Turban worn by the lower order of the Sájee. Natives Turn round to Meégoyoong. Two Nee (Loo-Choo); tátesee (Japan). Twelve Neéjoo. Twenty Hácoo. ------ one Hácoo it´cheejoo. ------ two Hácoo neéjoo. ------ three Hácoo sánjoo. ------ four Hácoo sheénjoo, or sheehácoo. ------ five Hácoo goónjoo, or goohacoo. ------ six Hácoo roócoojoo. ------ seven Hácoo sit´cheejoo. ------ eight Hácoo fat´cheejoo. ------ nine Hácoo coójoo. Tyger Toóra. Vase, or urn Jeéshee. Veins Kájee. Very well (speaking of health) Oogánjoo. --------- (well done, good) Eétshang. Victual or dinner box Píntaw. -------, the drawers in it Joobáckkoo. Ugly Ootooroósa. Umbrella Shássee kássa. Undress, to Ching hájeeing. Untie, to, a knot Hoótoochoong. Upper garment Eéshaw, or Hoónta. Water Meézee, or Meésee. -----, hot A´tsee meézee, or átcheeroo. -----, cold Feésa meézee, or feézeeroo meézee. -----, salt Spookoorása meézee. -----, a large jar containing Tookoóee. Water tub Meez-ofwhókee (cont. Of meézee and ofoowookee). Walk, to At´choong. ----, or crawl as a butterfly Seégatong. ----, slow Yáwna eéchoong. ----, quick Háyee sit´choong. Walking hand in hand, as the natives Teefeécha. Wash, to A´rayoong. ----, or bathe Indeetáwoong. ----, clothes Ching árayoong. Washing clothes Ching áratee. Watch Kárahigh. ----- key Sásee noo quaw. We, or a fourth person Yoótay. Weather Tínsee, or tínchee. -------, fine Yetínsee[120], or tínchee. -------, foul or bad Yánna tínsee, or tínchee. Web-footed bird Itchoóma. ---------------, beak of a Coóchee (lit. Mouth). --------------- head Makarájjee. --------------- leg Sha. --------------- two legs Shándee. --------------- tail Májoo. --------------- wing Hónnee. Well (lit. Water's skin) Meézee ka. West Neéshee. Wet Inneétee. Wet, to I´ndeetáoong. What do you call this? Noóndeega. Wheel of a ship Cooroóma. Whiskers Bínta. Whisper, to Mónotitchoong. Whistling Feéfee. ---------, as a bird Hoósa. White Sheeroósa. Wick of a candle Skeecoótshee. Will you give me Wang yee quírree[121]. Wind Kássee, or Kázzee. ---- to come in Kássee noóchoong. ---- to go out Kássee eéchoong. ----, little Kássee gua. ----, great Weésa kássee, or táychfoo[122]. Wind, to, up a watch Feénoyoong. --------, a string round the finger Káramachoong. Winking Mee oóchee. Wine Sáckkee. ---- glass Támma sáckka sit´chee. ---- kettle Dáckkeezitza. ----, sweet Amazack´kee, compounded of amása and sackee. ----, strong Choozáckkee, or sáckkeechoo. ----, weak Eéawzáckkee, or sáckkee ya. Wing of a bird Hánnay. ---- feathers of a bird Kee. Wipe, to, the face Soósooyoong. Wish, to, or bid good bye Wóckkayoong. Wrist (lit. Neck of the arm) Tee noo coóbee. Write, to Kátchoong[123]. Writing-desk Sheékoo. Wrong in writing characters Náwshoong. Woman Innágo. -----, plain Ootooroósa innágo. -----, old Teeshoóee innágo. -----, handsome Choorása innágo. -----, young Wóckka innágo. Wood of any kind Támoong. Yawning A´coobee. Year[124] Ning. ----, one It´chee ning. Years, eighteen, of age Joo hat´chee. -----, fourteen Joó shee. -----, thirty Sánjoo. -----, twenty-five Neéjoo goo. Yellow Cheéroo. ------, dark Kássa cheéroo, or áka cheéroo. ------, dirty or dingy Cheéroo díngee. Yes Oo. Yesterday Cheénoo. Yoke, across the shoulders of porters Baw. You (a second person) Ya (tay). Young Wock´ka. ----- woman Wock´ka innágo. Yours Coóra ya moong. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 25: This sound is the same as the Italian _gn_, and will befound in the words _Gnafing_, signifying more; _Quangning_, a man ofrank; and also in _Neesa_, bad, and _Nee_, two, which are most commonlypronounced as if a _g_ were prefixed to the _n_. ] [Footnote 26: The _o_ in this word is sounded as in the English word_Bode_. ] [Footnote 27: See sentence No. 101, Part II. ] [Footnote 28: This word also signifies milk, and the female breast. ] [Footnote 29: In speaking of books with reference to their number, theysay _teetsee sheemootsee_, one book; _tatsee sheemootsee_, two books;but of a single book they only say _sheemootsee;_ and we never foundthat they had any plural termination. ] [Footnote 30: See sentence No. 111. ] [Footnote 31: There is a great similarity between this word and thatwhich signifies _to be alive_, (Itch-chawng). ] [Footnote 32: This word signifies both a ladder and a bridge. ] [Footnote 33: See Sentences Nos. 25 and 41. ] [Footnote 34: This word signifies both a cask and a candlestick. ] [Footnote 35: See Sentence No. 70. ] [Footnote 36: _Noo_ seems to express _of_, or the _'s_ used in theEnglish language: as _Ooshee noo chee_, the cow's milk, or the milk ofthe cow; _Ooshee noo ka_, the bullock's skin, or the skin of thebullock; _Doochoo noo choe_, Loo-choo's people, or the people ofLoo-choo; and will be found in a variety of other instances. ] [Footnote 37: See Sentences Nos. 18, 19, and 21. ] [Footnote 38: The compass was generally called _Kassee tooee_, which twowords signify wind and a cock or fowl; but the landsmen called it_Karahigh_, which signifies a watch. ] [Footnote 39: This is probably _Oowhoko_, signifying a great manypersons. ] [Footnote 40: The day at Loo-Choo is divided into six hours, as also thenight. In counting a number of days they apply the numerals in a similarmanner to that which will be found in a note on _Twitchee_, an hour; butthey did not seem to have any names to denote the days of the week. ] [Footnote 41: This word is generally used by the master of the housewhen his guest announces his intended departure, by saying, _Cung, cung_. ] [Footnote 42: See Sentences Nos. 74 and 76. ] [Footnote 43: See Sentences Nos. 29, 32, 33, and 37. ] [Footnote 44: See Sentences Nos. 24 and 107. ] [Footnote 45: See Sentences Nos. 31, 36, and 27. ] [Footnote 46: See Numerals, Loo-Choo and Japan, Part II. After theSentences. ] [Footnote 47: This word, which is composed of _addee_, this, and_coodee_, that, I am not positive of, and I have therefore affixed aquery against it. ] [Footnote 48: This is a very difficult word to pronounce, and I am notcertain of having conveyed its true sound. ] [Footnote 49: See Sentence No. 111. ] [Footnote 50: See Sentence No. 55. ] [Footnote 51: See Sentence No. 20. ] [Footnote 52: See note on Numerals. ] [Footnote 53: The nearest sound to that of _flail_ which a native ofLoo-Choo could utter was that of _Freyroo_; generally speaking theyfound great difficulty in pronouncing English words. The nearest soundto that of our _l_ was _Airoo_, and to that of _vil_ was _Bayroo_. ] [Footnote 54: See note on Numerals. ] [Footnote 55: See Sentences Nos. 45, 47, and 48. ] [Footnote 56: The intention of departing from a house is generallyannounced by _Cung, cung_. ] [Footnote 57: The hair of the natives is formed into a knot on the crownof the head, and fastened by two pins of silver or brass, the oneornamented by a flowered head, called _kamma-shishee_, and the other_ooshee-thushee_. That worn by the children is called _jeefa_. ] [Footnote 58: This word is used to denote a _tree_ as well as a _hand_;this probably arises from the similarity; considering the _hand_ as thetrunk, and the fingers the branches of the _tree_. ] [Footnote 59: A piece of China crape, or very fine paper, is used as ahandkerchief by the superior classes of the natives, and is generallyworn in the bosom: the lower orders substitute a coarser kind of paper. ] [Footnote 60: A negative in frequent use. ] [Footnote 61: This word may be applied to being in want of water. ] [Footnote 62: See Sentence No. 2. ] [Footnote 63: A strong aspirate. ] [Footnote 64: See note on _I_ or _me_ (first person) next page. ] [Footnote 65: These two expressions were obtained by catching abutterfly and then letting it go. ] [Footnote 66: The _jeeshee_, or _vase_, is a stone jar in which thebones of the dead are deposited at the expiration of seven years afterburial. ] [Footnote 67: The same word (_obee_) signifies both the hoop of a caskand the girdle worn round the waist; this probably originated in thegirdle being substituted for the hoop, which appears to have been wornformerly. ] [Footnote 68: _Ma_, signifying a horse, is a Chinese word, and wasprobably introduced into Loo-Choo with that animal. ] [Footnote 69: The names of the hours will be found in the second part;the divisions of time will be found under their different heads ofday, month, year, &c. ] [Footnote 70: While seeking to obtain from the natives the pronouns _I_, _you_, and _him_, I at first got _chooee, lay_, and _meechay;_ but onfurther enquiry I found that these had not that meaning, they weresuperseded by _wang_, _ya_, and _aree_, for _I_, _you_, and _him;_ butas I heard _chooee_, _lay_, and _meechay_ repeated in enumeratingpersons, I have set them down as first, second, and third persons, thatbeing the sense which they seem to bear. The word _chooee_, or _choo_, it would seem signifies man (homo) in a general sense. ] [Footnote 71: See Sentence No. 96. ] [Footnote 72: See Sentence No. 99. ] [Footnote 73: See Sentence No. 101. ] [Footnote 74: See Sentence No. 6. ] [Footnote 75: See note, "Holding a thing. "] [Footnote 76: See Sentences Nos. 81 and 82. ] [Footnote 77: See Sentences Nos. 38 to 44. ] [Footnote 78: Literally to sew clothes. ] [Footnote 79: Literally to work rope. ] [Footnote 80: _Skoyoong_, or _Sookooyoong_, signifies to bake. ] [Footnote 81: This word, which is composed of _ickkee_ and _ya_(_ickkee_ signifying _there_, and _ga_, which may possibly have beenoriginally _ya, you_), appeared to me to bear a similar meaning to our_you, sir_, or _you, there_, as the natives invariably called out_ickkeega_, when wishing to attract the attention of any one. ] [Footnote 82: See note on the _kawroo_. The _kaw_ is also burned when anoffering of rice is made on the _kawroo_. ] [Footnote 83: The following are the names of the months or moons. January Shaw gwautsee. February Nee gwautsee (lit. 2d month). March Sang gwautsee (lit. 3d). April Shee gwautsee (lit. 4th). May Goo gwautsee (lit. 5th). June Roocoo gwautsee (lit. 6th). July Sitchee gwautsee (lit. 7th). August Fatchee gwautsee (lit. 8th). September Coo gwautsee (lit. 9th). October Joo gwautsee (lit. 10th). November Shee moo stitchee, or joo itchee gwautsee. December Shee wasee, or joo nee gwautsee. The twentieth day of the tenth month (October), _Joo gwautsee, neejoonitchee_, was, according to Loo-Choo time, the second day of the tenthmonth, _joo gwautsee, nee nitchee_. ] [Footnote 84: A strong aspirate on the first syllable. ] [Footnote 85: The negative is almost invariably placed after the word. ] [Footnote 86: See note on numerals. ] [Footnote 87: The sound of the _oong_, or _oomb_, is very difficult, andcan only be approximated by closing the teeth firmly and compressing thesound of _oong_. ] [Footnote 88: See note on Numerals. ] [Footnote 89: See Sentences Nos. 49 to 53. ] [Footnote 90: _Sheenoostang_ signifies to _cover over_, and possibly_ooroo_ should have been written _eeroo_, which is _colour_; and thisword, signifying _painting_, would then be literally _to cover over withcolour_. ] [Footnote 91: This is literally the _belly of the hand_, or the _hand'sbelly_. For an explanation of the _noo_ see observations on the Loo-Choolanguage at the beginning. ] [Footnote 92: This word seems to derive its origin from _ackka_, _burning_. ] [Footnote 93: This word, _Katcheemeeoong_, to pinch, appears to beformed of the words _Ka_, skin, _chee_, blood, and _meeoong_, to see;and may be translated to _see the blood through the skin_, or _in theskin_. ] [Footnote 94: This sound is not unlike that which the screwing about thescull of a boat on the pivot causes. ] [Footnote 95: The same word signifies a flower. ] [Footnote 96: _Feetchoong_ signifies to pull, so that it may with morepropriety be applied to the harp, or touching the strings of the violinwith the fingers. ] [Footnote 97: A strong aspirate on the last syllable. ] [Footnote 98: See Sentence No. 105. ] [Footnote 99: Literally, to upset. ] [Footnote 100: For the sound of this word see note on the English word_no_. ] [Footnote 101: See Sentence No. 8. ] [Footnote 102: _Narang_, or _nang_, is used on most occasions as thenegative. ] [Footnote 103: The same word signifies _sweet potatoes_. ] [Footnote 104: This word it will be observed signifies both _to screw_and _to scull;_ this may originate in the screwing motion of the oarfrom side to side of the boat. ] [Footnote 105: See Sentences No. 38 to 44. ] [Footnote 106: The similarity in sound of this word to that of acharacter (_Hoonatee_) written on a piece of paper in the hats of themen employed working for the ships, has suggested the idea that themeaning of the character may have some reference to a ship. ] [Footnote 107: See Sentences Nos. 102 and 103. ] [Footnote 108: Words of Loo-Choo songs: "Sasa sangcoomeh sangcoomeah kadee yooshee daw, tantoong tantoong tang. " A boat song: "Whee yo ee. --Whee yo ee. " The steersman gave "Whee, " andwas followed by the other men with a repetition of "Whee yo ee. " Another boat song: "Quee yay hanno ha. --Quee yay hanno ha. " To boththese airs the rowers kept very good time. ] [Footnote 109: See Sentences Nos. 1 to 7. ] [Footnote 110: The _kawroo_ is a small square stone excavated a littleon the upper part, in which an offering of rice is made. On the face ofthis stone is carved a variety of characters denoting the rank, &c. Ofthe person who makes the offering. ] [Footnote 111: See Sentences in Part II. ] [Footnote 112: See Sentences Nos. 29, 32, 33, and 37. ] [Footnote 113: See Sentences Nos. 108, 109, and 110. ] [Footnote 114: _Amazackkee_ is a contraction of the words _amasa_, sweet, and _sackkee_, wine; the latter always changing _s_ into _z_ whenpreceded by any other word. See _wine_, _strong_, _weak_, &c. ] [Footnote 115: Tattoo marks will be found in Part II. ] [Footnote 116: _Eechoo. _ This word is used to denote _thread_, silk_, and _ribbon. _] [Footnote 117: _Ootchoong_, or _oochoong_, signifies _to work_, _toplay_, and _to make_. ] [Footnote 118: Possibly this word implies the act of swallowing. ] [Footnote 119: The sound of this word is precisely the same as that ofour _tobacco_. I have, therefore, spelt it in the same manner. ] [Footnote 120: See Sentence No. 109. ] [Footnote 121: See Sentences Nos. 45, 47, and 48. ] [Footnote 122: This is probably the _tae fung_ (great wind of theChinese, called by us _tyfoon_), a severe gale of wind in the ChinaSea. ] [Footnote 123: See Sentence No. 73. ] [Footnote 124: The year at Loo-Choo, according to Jeeroo's account, isdivided into twelve months of thirty days each, making in all 360 days, and every sixth year one month is intercalated. ] NOTE. In the following Sentences the English is given before the Loo-Choo. NoSentence has been inserted the meaning of which was not distinctlyascertained; but it happened frequently that the precise import of somewords in a Sentence was not made out, and in order to enable the readerto judge to what extent this took place, a literal translation of thewords in each Sentence is given in the last column; and where a wordoccurs, the meaning of which is doubtful, an asterisk is put in itsplace. In the last column it will be observed that every verb having thetermination _oong_, _ung_, &c. Is translated as if it were theinfinitive, although the sense, as denoted in the first column, pointsto another mood. SENTENCES, ENGLISH AND LOO-CHOO. _Of Speaking. _ No. _English. _ _Loo-Choo. _ _Literal Translation. _ 1. I speak Moónooyoong I to speak. 2. I speak, you hear Moónooyoong, ya sit´choong, I speak, you to hear, or Chickkee or hearing. 3. I speak to you Ya, or ea moónooyoong, or You to speak, or I. Wang. Ya too moónooyoong You * to speak. 4. I speak Chinese Wang Quántoong I Chinese to speak. Moónooyoong 5. I cannot speak Chinese Wang Quántoong moónoorang I Chinese cannot speak. 6. I am learning to speak Wang Doóchoo cootoóba I Loo-Choo learning or Loo-Choo yoóshoong[125] studying to *. 7. Mádera speaks English I´ngere Mádera moónooyoong English Mádera to speak. _Of Going and Coming. _ 8. A man running to the Háyay tímma ic´kkeega Running boat man. Boat 9. I am going on shore Wang amáki eéchoong I shore to go. 10. To-morrow I will return A´cha choó-oong To-morrow to come. 11. To come back again A´mma ka choong[126] * * to come. 12. I am going on board Timma ki eéchoong Boat * to go. 13. I came yesterday Cheénoo chung Yesterday came. 14. Go down there Amúnka ic´kkee * there. 15. Come up here Nooboótee coo Ascend here. 16. You go below Yá oódee meéshawdee You * *. 17. To go out of a place Yá ka saut eéchoong * * * to go. 18. To come into a place Yá ka saut choong * * * to come. 19. Tayin[127] returns Tayin[127] choo-oong The great man to come. 20. To go in a boat to Doóchoo timma eéchoong Loo-Choo boat to go Loo-Choo to carry fish eéo katámmeeoong fish to carry. 21. To go to sea in a Timma eéchoong oóshoo Boat to go sea fish to boat to catch fish eéo cheéoong catch 22. Where is Tayin gone Táyin makáyee ga ímjara Tayin * * *. 23. Tayin has gone to Táyin eéchoong hooboónee Tayin to go large ship the other ship to meéyoong Sheenoóma to see *. Pay his respects 24. When all are drunk I´gnea weétee amáki All drunk shore * we shall be permitted moótotee yoótoosha *. To go on shore 25. I am going now, he Atookárra wang eéchoong By and by I to go, by will come presently atookárra eéchoong and by to go. 26. I am going on shore Wang amáki eéchoong I shore to go I to to dinner moónookámoong eat. 27. I am going on board Wang hoónee ki eéchoong I ship * to go I to to dinner moónoo kámoong eat. 28. When the ships depart A´cha hoónee níttee Doóchoo To-morrow ship * to-morrow all the mang hoónee Loo-Choo thousand Loo-Choo people will oócooyoong ship *. Pray _Of Eating and Drinking. _ 29. To drink wine Sac´kkee noómoong Wine to drink. 30. Sweet wine Amazac´kkee Sweet wine. 31. I eat Moónoo kámoong I to eat. 32. I never drink tea Cha noódee nárang Tea drinking never. 33. Tayin and you never Táyin ya sac´kkee noódee Tayin you wine drink drink wine nárang never. 34. The parting glass Wóckkarittee Departing. 35. It is good (to eat) Coódee mása This good (to eat). 36. It is bad, throw it Neésba is´kung Bad *. Away 37. It is tea, to drink Meézee tájeeing cha noódee Water to boil tea drinking. _Of Looking and Seeing. _ 38. To look at the sun Teéda meéoong kágung Sun to see glass. Through a glass 39. I look, or I see Moónoomeéoong I to see. 40. The English gentleman I´ngere táyin meésheeoong English great man to is looking look at. 41. Stop, you shall look Mátee*, atookárra ya Stop, by and by you presently meésheeoong to look at. 42. Clouds obscure the Koómoo teéda oósooóstang Clouds sun to cover sun over. 43. The branches of the Toómee kágung kee noo Spy-glass trees tree obstruct the káttakáshee meérang branches to hide. Sight 44. If a Loo-Choo woman Doóchoo innágo I´ngere Loo-Choo woman English should see you she meéoong náchoong to see, to cry. Will be alarmed _Of Giving. _ 45. Will you give me that Wang yee quírree I * giving. 46. Give me that pencil Hoódee moot´choo Pencil bring. 47. I gave him some paper A´ree nee queétang Him * giving. 48. By and by I will give Atookárra qua gnee queéoong By and by children * it to my children to give. _Of Opening and Shutting. _ 49. Shut this, or it Akíttee nínjoong Shutting to sleep. 50. Open this, or it Akíttee mírree, or Opening it. Akátindee 51. Do you open this, Akátindee, or ya akírree Opening, or you or it opening. 52. Open this book Ya sheémootsee akírree You book opening. 53. Open your watch that Akátindee kárahigh meéoong Opening watch to see. I may look at it _Of Losing and Finding. _ 54. To lose a pencil Hoódee oótoochung Pencil to lose. 55. To find a pencil Hoódee toómatung Pencil to find. _Of Quantity. _ 56. Two small suns Tátsee teéda gua Two suns small. 57. A few boys Coósa wárrabee Few boys. 58. A few Men Ic´kkeekoósa Men few. 59. A great many men Ic´kkeerássa Men many. 60. A few books Sheémootsee sánsatche Books few. 61. A great many books Sheémootsee tóro Books many. 62. Six kinds of wine Moóeeyroo noo sáckkee * of wine. _Of Making. _ 63. Making a false step Koónsinda dákatchee * *. 64. Vases made at Napa Nápa jeéshee scoótee Napa vases made. 65. Sand spread on a level Sínna oóshoo sháee máshoo Sand sea * salt plain on which water tátchoong to make. Is sprinkled for making salt 66. Sing a song Ya oóta yoóshoong You song to sing. 67. Jeeroo sings well, Jeéroo oóta yoóshoong Jeeroo song to sing * or with good taste cheécheegoótoo * *. _Of Bringing and Carrying. _ 68. Bring your children Ya qua saúteecoo You children bring. 69. Bring fire here Fee toóteecoo Fire bring. 70. This vessel carries Hoónee jeéshee káttamittee Ship vases * Oonting. Vases to Oonting Oónting 71. Boy, bring fire to I´rree fee toóteecoo tobácco Boy fire bring, light my pipe foókee tobacco smoke. 72. Bring a cup of water Cháwung náki meézee eéteecoo Teacup * water * here here. _Of Writing and Sketching_ 73. To write a letter Jee kátchoong A character to write. 74. Tayin is sketching Táyin háshee noo Tayin bridge of to the bridge eékatchoong sketch. 75. Tayin sketches very Táyin yoókatchee choorása Tayin * sketches well handsome. 76. To sketch a Loo-Choo Doóchoo meéa eékatchoong Loo-Choo temple to temple sketch. _Of Compliment. _ 77. Thank you Ká foóshee * * *. 78. How do you do Yoo ky´moong * * *. 79. Very well Oogánjoo * * *. 80. I am very sorry Oomoótee shangcoómeh * * *. _Of Living or Residing. _ 81. Tayin lives here Táyin simmájoo coo Tayin lives here. 82. A man living in the Ickkeegá simmá áwhfee A man living country. Country 83. I live on board the Wang hoónee gua ímmatong I ship small to live. Brigs _Of Burning and Scalding. _ 84. Fire will burn you Fee yáddee Fire burns. 85. Water will scald you Meésee yáddee Water burns. 86. Scalding oneself with Meézee fidgeroósa yoo Water hot * burns. Hot water yáddee _Of Enquiry and Reply. _ 87. What is the name of Noóndeega coóra na What is this name. This 88. The name of this is Coóra ga na ya This * name *. 89. How many children Qui eecootiéga * * *. Have you 90. How old are you or Eecoótseega * * *. They 91. I am fourteen years Joóshee Fourteen. Of age 92. I am eighteen years Joohatc´hee Eighteen. Of age 93. ---- twenty-five, &c. Neéjoogoo Twenty-five. _Miscellaneous. _ 94. To boil potatoes Mootájeeing Potatoes to boil. 95. I am very busy Yoo joónatan * * *. 96. The sting of a snake Háboo coótee sheénoong Snake sting to kill. Will kill 97. Sucking milk at the Chee noóma chee Milk * breast. Breast 98. A child drinking milk Chee noódee wárrabee Milk drinking child. At the breast 99. A child kissing its Wárrabee úmma coóchee Child mother mouth mother spoótee kissing. 100. A woman leaning Innágo kákatong eéki Woman to lean anchor. On an anchor 101. A live shell-fish Amang it´chchawng Shell-fish to be alive will bite coóyoong to bite. 102. This flower has a Fánna mása kabásha Flower sweet smell. Pleasant smell 103. This flower has no Fánna nang kabásha Flower no smell. Smell 104. Loo-Choo women Doóchoo innágo fwhoóco Loo-choo woman great are not very ooórung many *. Handsome 105. The sootitsee (sago Sootítsee wang tseéchoong Sootitsee I * *. Tree) pricked me yátee 106. To plant potatoes Moo jee hoótee céyoong Potatoes ground * *. 107. Drunk, I vomit Weétee moónoo háchoong Drunk I vomit. 108. After sunset it is Teéda ságatee seedásha Sun setting cool. Cool 109. When the sun Teéda téttee, koómoo nang, Sunshine, clouds none, shines, and there yaytínchee fine weather. Are no clouds, it is fine weather 110. The sun sets at six Roócoo twit´chee teéda Six hours sun to set. O'clock ságayoong 111. The horse fell down, Ma táwrittee táyin noo Horse fell down, and the tayin eébee oótee tayin's finger broke. Broke his finger 112. After seven years Sítchee ning, coótsee Seven years' bones we wash the bones arátee jeéshee ittee washing vase putting and put them into in. A vase 113. Without any flesh Shíshee ning Flesh none. 114. The people of Doóchoo noo choo sibíttee Loo-choo people Loo-Choo I shall yoótoosha remember * *. Never forget 115. You will soon Sibíttee wása Remember bad. Forget them 116. Twelve hours make Joo nee twit´chee, it´chee Ten two hours, one one day nit´chee day. 117. Thirty days make one Sánjoo nit´chee, it´chee Thirty days one month moon, or month gwaútsee 118. One year consists of It´chee ning, joo nee One year, ten two twelve months gwaútsee months. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 125: _Yooshoong_ probably signifies _to recite_, as it is used inrequesting a person to sing as well as in this instance. ] [Footnote 126: Probably instead of _amma ka_, this should have been _amaki_(shore), which would makeit coming to the shore, which was the case. ] [Footnote 127: _Ta-jin_, in Chinese, signifies a _great man;_ it is translated by Mr. Morrison _his excellency_. ] [Transcriber's Note: Japanese characters in the table below are denoted as such. ] NUMERALS. _English. _ _Loo-Choo. _ _Characters. _ _Japan. _ 1 One It´chee [Japanese character] Teétsee, or te 1. 2 Two Nee, or gnee [Japanese character] Tátsee, or ta 2. 3 Three Sang [Japanese character] Meétsee, or mee 3. 4 Four Shee [Japanese character] Eéotsee[128], or yoo 4. 5 Five Goo, or go [Japanese character] I´ttitsee 5. 6 Six Roóko [Japanese character] Moótsee 6. 7 Seven St´chee [Japanese character] Nánnatsee 7. 8 Eight Fat´chee, or [Japanese character] Eeyátsee 8. Kwat´chee 9 Nine Coo [Japanese character] Koónnitsee 9. 10 Ten Joo, or dzoo [Japanese character] Too 10. Both sets of these numerals are in common use at Loo-Choo, though itwould not perhaps be correct to apply them to the same word, as I neverrecollect having heard a native say "itchee sheemootsee, " one book, or"teétsee twit´chee, " one hour, but always "teétsee sheémootsee, " onebook, and "itchee twitchee, " one hour. I at first imagined "teetsee, tatsee, " &c. Were ordinals, but I have since found from CaptainBroughton's Voyage that they bear a great resemblance to the numerals ofJapan, and as such I have inserted them. The characters, of which the above are copies, were written by a native. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 128: The _o_ in this word is to be pronounced as the diphthong_oa_ in boat. ] NAMES OF PERSONS. The Kowung, or King - Sháng fwee. The Pochin ta foo, or Prince - Shang pung-fwee. The Chief of the Paychins who attended the ship - Oókooma Mowchowshoóa. The second Paychin - Madáyra Sháyoon. The third do. - I´ssacha Sándoo. The fourth do. - Jeéma Tsí-se-eu. His eldest son - Maátsee Tsí-chee. His friend (an elderly man) - Oóhoomee Chínchawhee. The fifth Paychin - I´ssecha Háckkeeboócoo. The sixth do. - Jeéroo Jeéda. The first Linguist - Mádera Káwsheeoong. The second Linguist - A´nya Toónshoonfa. His wife - Oóshee. One of the junior Paychins - Yáma Too. The teacher (an old man) - Yáckkabee Oómeejeéroo. His eldest son - Yáckkabee Oómee-nee whaw. A boy - O´seejee. One of the principal attendants of the} Pochin ta foo } - Mádam Báshee. Another - Eévaroo. NAMES OF PLACES. Corea - Córay. Pekin - Péking. Fokien - Fótchien. China - Quántoong. Chusan - Choósan. England - I´ngeree. The island of Loo-Choo - Loo-Choo, or Doó-Choo. The town of Napakiang - Nápa ummeátto. The high distant islands seen from Napa - A´makírreema. The Sugar Loaf Island - Eégoos eécoondee. Japan - Níphon. Canton - Cánton. NAMES OF THE DAYS OF THE MOON FROM NEW TO FULL. 1. Chee tátchee. 2. Hádjee mee nitchee. 3. Hádjee mee san nit´chee. 4. Hádjee mee noo ka. 5. Hádjee mee goo nit´chee. 6. Hádjee mee roócoo nit´chee. 7. Hádjee mee sit´chee nit´chee. 8. Hádjee mee fatchee nit´chee. 9. Hádjee mee coo nit´chee. 10. Yoóka. 11. Joo it´chee nit´chee. 12. Joo nee nit´chee. 13. Joo san nit´chee. 14. Joo yoóka. 15. Joo goo nit´chee. THE NINE ORDERS OF RANK OF PAYCHINS, OR CHIEFS, WHO ARE DISTINGUISHED BY THECOLOUR OF THEIR BONNETS, CALLED HATCHEE MATCHEE. { A pink ground with spots, circles, 1st. Ching neéstchoo noo Hat´chee { and diamonds, of black, yellow, blue, mat´chee { white, and green. 2nd. A´cadjee noo Hat´chee mat´chee { A pink ground with spots, &c. Of red { and yellow, blue and black. 3rd. O´jee noo Hat´chee mat´chee { A green ground with spots, &c. Of { red, yellow, blue, and black. 4th. Moóla sat´chee noo Hat´chee { A pink or light purple ground, with mat´chee { spots of the same colour. 5th. Cheéroo dínjee noo Hat´chee { A dingy yellow ground, with spots of mat´chee { the same colour. 6th. Cheéroo sy ya noo Hat´chee { A bright yellow ground without mat´chee { spots. 7th. Chíddeeming noo Hat´chee { A red ground without spots. Mat´chee 8th. Akása noo Hat´chee mat´chee - A red ground without spots. 9th. O´sa noo Hat´chee mat´chee - A green ground without spots. The attendants of the chiefs wear a red Hatchee matchee of a coarsertexture. TATTOO MARKS ON THE ARMS OF SOME OF THE NATIVES OF THE GREAT LOO-CHOOISLAND. 1. 3. Right arm. Right arm. Left arm. This man had [Illustration: [Illustration: [Illustration: not any mark Oódeemaw. ] Oódeemaw. ] toóga. ] on the left arm. 2. 4. Right arm. Right arm. Left arm. [Illustration: [Illustration] [Illustration: Coódee Oódemaw. ] toóga. ] The four men, whose arms were marked in the above manner, were young andof the lower order, probably fishermen. It appeared to have been done bypuncturing the skin, and staining it with Indian ink in the mannerpractised by our seamen. The above marks are quite as large as the originals; they were on theinner part of the fore arm, close up to the elbow joint. Some weremarked on both arms, others only on the right, but we did not observeany who had them only on the left arm. NAMES OF THE HOURS. One hour, or one o'clock It´chee twit´chee } Two hours, or two Nee twit´chee } Three Sang twit´chee } The day Four Shee twit´chee } Five Goo twit´chee } Six Roócoo twit´chee } Seven Sit´chee twit´chee } Eight Fat´chee twit´chee } Nine Coo twit´chee } The night. Ten Joo twit´chee } Eleven Joo it´chee twit´chee} Twelve Joo nee twit´chee } The day at Loo-Choo, i. E. Between sunrise and sunset, is divided intosix hours, as is also the night. COMPARISON BETWEEN THE JAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES. NOTE. The following comparisons are given, with the view of pointing out asnearly as circumstances will permit what resemblance there is betweenthe languages of the islands of Loo-Choo, Niphon, or Japan, and Insu, lying in the Japan Sea, and which by some voyagers have been consideredthe same language. In the first comparison, viz. That between the languages of Loo-Choo andJapan, the Japanese words are extracted from the translation ofThunberg's Voyage to Japan, printed in London 1795, 2d edit. Vol. Iii. In the second, viz. That between Loo-Choo and Insu, the Insu words aretaken from Broughton's Voyage. A third comparison is given between the languages of Loo-Choo, Niphon, and Insu, together with the two sets of Numerals in use at Loo-Choo, theJapanese from Thunberg, and the Insu from Broughton. It ought to be recollected that as Mr. Thunberg was a foreigner, andwrote in a different language from that in which the Loo-Choo words havebeen recorded, a difference of sound may be suspected between them whenno material difference really exists between the two languages. The letter _u_ has been substituted in the spelling of the Japanesewords for the _v_ used by Thunberg. COMPARISON BETWEEN THE JAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES. _English. _ _Japanese[129]. _ _Loo-Choo. _ All Mei Innea. Anchor Ikari Eki. Angry Fandatsuru Neetsa. Answer, to Fento suru Aree ga aanyoong. Arm Ude Teenoo. Arrow Ja Eea. Attendant Sairio Eeree. Bad Warikakuse Neesha, or Wasa. Bake, to Jaku Irree-chang. Bare (naked) Haguru Harraka. Bed Nedokuri Coocha. Belly Stabara Watta. Bend, to Oru Tammeeoong. Bird Tori Hotoo. Birdcage Tori no su Hotoo coo. Bitter Nigaka Injassa. Blood Tji, or Kjets Chee. Blow, up the fire, to Fuku Footchoong. Boat Temma Timma. Boil, to Tagiru Tajeeing. Bone Fone Cootsee. Book Somots Sheemootsee. Bow Jumi Yoomee. Branch of a tree Jeda Kee. Brass Sintju Cheejackkoo. Breadth Jakohaba Habba. Breast Mone Moonee. Breathe, to Ikitsuku Itchooshoong. Bridge Fae, hae Hashee. Brother Kiodai Weekee. Bucket Tango Tagoo. Button Botan Kogannee. Calf of the leg Stosone Koonda. Candle Rosoku Daw. Candlestick Rosoks tatti Soo-coo. Cannon Issibia Isheebeea. Carry away, to Mootsu Mootchee eechoong. Cat Mio Mia. Charcoal Sumi Chacheejing. Cheeks Hogeta, fo Hoo. Child Kodoma Warrabee. Circle Maru Maroodair. Castle, or tower Siro, so Eegooscoo. Climb, to Nagoru Noobooyoong. Cloth So king Ching. Cock Otori Woo tooee. Cold Samka kang Feesa. Compass Fobari Karahigh. Colour Iro Eeroo ceeroo. Come, to Kuru Choong. Cool Sususi Seedasha. Copper Akaganni Acoogannee. Count, to Kansju Oohawkoo-oong. Cow Us Mee ooshee. Creep, to Fau Hawyoong. Cup, tea Tiawang Chawung. Dark Mime Coorasing. Daughter Musme, gogo Innago oongua. Deep Fukai Fookassa. Dig, to Foli Ooehoong. Die Sinnoru sinu Nintoong. Dice Saii Sheego roocoo. Door To Hashirree. Dog Inu Ing. Drink Nomimono Noomoo. Drink, to Nomu Noomoong. Drunk, to be Namoji jeikfsari Weeoong. Duck, tame Afiru Afeeroo. Dry, to Karruru Karachoong. Earth, the Tji dsi Jee. Ear Mimi Mimmee. East Figasi Fingassee. Egg Tamago Cooga. Elbow Ude, fisi Tenoo feejee. Empty, to Akwuru Karashoong. Exchange, to Kajuru Kayra (fans); to exchange fans at Loo-Choo. Face Tsera Steera. Fall, to Tawareta Tawshoong. Fan Oge Ojee. Farewell Kingo, nigoserru Wockkatee. Father Tete, toto Shoo. Fat Kojuru Quaitee. Feather Tori no fa Tooee noo hannee. Fin, a fin Jokofiri fire Hannay. Finger Jubi Eebee. Find, to Midassu Toomatung. Fire Fi, finoko Fee. Fish Iwo, sakkana Eeo. Fish Iwo tsuru Eeo kakeeoong. Fishing net Ami Sheebee. Flag, a Hato Hata. Flower Fanna Fanna. Fly, a Hai Hayeh. Fly, to Toobu Toobeeoong. Friend Ftoobai Eedooshee. Foot Assi Shanna. Firewood Takigi Tamoong. Full Mits Meetchetee. Girl Komusime Tackkee. Girdle Skimmawas sansakagi Obee. Give, to Fureru, jaru Queeoong. Go down to Ururu, iru Ooritteo coo. Go up to Aguru Noobooyoong. Goat, he Jagi Woo feeja. Gold Sin Ching. Good Jukka Choorasa. Good man Jukka fito Yookachoo. Good for nothing Jonaka Maconarang. Hair Kami Kurrazzee. Hammer Kanatsutji Gooshung. Hand Tee Kee. Handkerchief Te no goi Teesadgee. Hat Kasa Kassa. Head Kubi Boosee. Head-ache Attamanna, itama, Seebooroo yadong. Dutso Heart Kokurro, sing Nacoo. Singnoso Hear, to Kikf Sitchoong, or skitchoong. Heavens Ten Ting. Heavy Omoka, omotaka Boosa. Hen, a Mendori, metori Meetooee. Hide, to Kaksu Meerang. Hip Momo Gammacoo. Hole, or cavity Anna Anna. Horn Tsunno, kaku Stinnoo. Horse Aki uma Ma. Hot Atska Atteesa. House Je Ya, or katchee. Ink Sum, sumi Simmee. Inkstand Susumi hake Simmee shee. Iron Tets, furoganni Titzee. Key Kagi Quaw. Kill, to Korossu Sheenoung, or Koorashoong. Kiss Umakutji, or Sheemirree. Kwutjisu Kiss, to Umakutji suru Coochee spootee. Knife Haka Seego. Knee Fisa, fisa no sarra Stinsee. Kneel, to Fisatatsuru Shumma gitcheeoong. Knot, a Fimmo Coonja cootchee. Laugh, to Warau Worrayoong. Learning, or studying Narau, Kicku Cootooba. Letter, or character Moisi, tsi mousi Jee. Lift to, a thing Motjiagaru Moochoong. Light to, a pipe Fitobusu, fitomusu Sheeoong. Lip Tsuba Seeba. Liquor Sakki Sackkeedia, or Samtchoo (Chinese). Look to, or see Miru Meeoong, or meeing. Looking-glass Kagami Kagung. Long, or length Nagai Nagása. Lose, to Song suru, makuru Ootoochung. Live, to Inotji Simmatong. Lacker, to Makie saru Nooyoong. Man (homo) Momo Choo. Man (vir) Otoko Ickkeega. Mast Hobasi Hasseeda. Mat Tattami Mooshooroo, or Hatung. Match (fire-stick) Skedakki, skegi Kaw. Measure, to Siakf, monosasa Gaujee hackkiyoong. Mew, to (like a cat) Neko, naku Nachoong deeoong. Milk Tji tji tji Chee. Monkey Saru, salu Saroo. Moon Tsuki Stchay. ----, full Mangets Oostitchee, or maroo. Mother Fasa kasa Umma. Mud Noro Dooroo. Nail, finger Tsume, jassuru Thimmee. Naked Hadaka Harraka. Name Na Na. Navel Fosso, feso Whoosoo. Neck Kwabi, nodor Coobee. Needle Fari Hayee skittee. Night Josari, joru Yooroo. Nipples Tjibusa Chee. Nod, to Gatting suru Najeechoong. North Kitta Cheeta. Nose Fanna Honna. Nostrils Fanna nosu Honnakee. Offer, to Okuru, agurujasiagu- Ozagadee. Ru, nedoaskuru Old Tassijori, furuje Teeshooee. Furuke Open, to Akuru Akeeoong. Overturn, to Tawaruru Kooroobashoong. Paper Kami Kabee. Pencil Fuda Hoodee. Physician Isa Ishsha. Pinch, to Nesumu Katcheemeeoong. Pipe (tobacco) Kiseru Shirree. Play to, with dice Sugoroko utsu Sheegoroocoo ochoong. Plough Seri, seribetta, Sitchee. Tsuku tauts Plough, to Togajassu Sitchoong. Pour in, to Tsugu Irreeing. Powder (gun) Jenso Eenshoo. Pregnant Mimotji, farami Kassee jeetaung. Press, to Siburu Sheetskeeoong. Priest Boos Bodzee. Push, to Sukikakaru Kooroobashoong. Quarrel, to Ijou Titskoong. Quick Faijo, faijaki Hayee. Rain Ame Amee. Rain, to Ame no fiuru Amee fooyoong. Rainbow Nisi Noo, oojee. Rat Nisumi Ack a-sa. Read, to Jomu Yoomoong. Rice Kome Coomee. Rice, boiled Mes Umbang. Ride, to, a horse Noru Manayoong. Ring (finger) Ibiganni Eebee gannee. Root Ne Wee-ee. Rope Tsuna no na Chinna. Round Mami Marroosa. Row, to, in a boat Roosu Coojee. Run, to Ajiubu Hayay sitchoong. Sail Hoo Foo. Salt Siwo Mashoo. Salt water Siwo mis usiwo Spookarasa meezee. Salute, to Resuru Kameeoong. Sand Tsunna Sinna. Scrape, to Kusagu Sajoong. Screw Nesi Jirree. Sea Ume Ooshoo. Seal Fang hang ingjo Ing, or fang. See, to Miru Meeoong. Seed Tanna Ni. Separate, to Saru Wockkayoong. Serpent Kutjinawa hebi Haboo. Sew, to No, noi Nawyoong, or noayoong. Shallow Assai assaka Assassa. Shave, to Soru Sooyoong. Shell Kai Oosheemaw. Ship Fune Hoonee. Shoe Kwutsu Sabock. Shoulders Kata Kutta. Sick Itami mono, bioki Yadong. Mono, jamai mono Silk Kinno Eechoo. Silver Gin Jing. Sing, to Utau Ootashoong, or ootayoong. Sister (eldest) Musme are Oui. Sleep Nur Nintee. Sleep, to Nuru Ninjoong. Slow Sisukamai, jojajora Yoona, yawna. Small Ko, komaka Coosa. Smell Nivi, niwoi Kabbasha. Smell, to Kusamu Kannoung, kashashoong. Smoke Honoo Kinsee. Smoke, to Kemoli Footchoong. Smoke tobacco, to Tabaco, nomu Tobacco, footchoong. Sneeze, to Aksingu Honna feeoong. Snore, to Ibikikaku Nintoong. Snuff Fanna, tabak, kagi Spachee, honna, tob* Sour Suika Seesa. South Minami Whfa, or fa. Speak, to Monoju, musmasu, Moonooyoong. Ju, moosuru Spectacles Meganni, fanna, Meekagung. Meganni Spider Kwumo Cooba. Spittle Subakki Simpaee. Spit, to Subakki, hawk Simpayoong. Spoon Saisi Kaa. Square Sikaku Kackkoo. Stand up, to Okiru Tatteeoong. Stars Fosi Fooshee. Stone Isi iwa Ishee. Strike, to Wutsu, utsu, tataku Rejeecoong. Sugar Satto Sata. Sun Fi, nitji Teeda. Sunset Fi no iri Teeda sagayoong. Sunrise Fino, de, fino, Teeda agayoong. Agaru Swallow, to Nomikomu Noonootoosha. Sweet Amaka, amai Amasa. Swim, to Ojugu Weejoong. Thigh Momo, solomomo Moomoo. Thread Ito Eechoo. Throw, to Naguru Naging. Thumb Ojajubi, ojubi Hooee eebee. Tiger Tora Toora. Tin Susu Sheedookannee. Tongue Sta, sita Stcha. Tooth Jea Ha. Touch, to Kamau, kakaru, Sayoong, or Sitchoong. Ateru Tower To Eegooscoo. Town Matji, sotomatji Mecatto, metto. Tremble Fururu Koorooyoong. Ugly Kisannai Ootooroosa. Umbrella Fisasi Shassee kassa. Vein Susi Kajee. Wake, to Okiteoru Ooking. Waken, to Okusu Oocatee. Walk, to Ita Atchoong. Warm Nakka, atska Attesa. Wash Arau Arayoong. Watch Tokei Karahigh. Water Mis Meezee. Water tub Furo Meezofwokee. Weather, fine Jukka, fiuri, jui Yeetinchee, or tinsee. Teng Weather, foul Warri fiuri Yannatinchee, or tinsee. Well, a Jgawa Meezee ka. West Nis Neeshee. Wet Naroru Inneetee. Wet, to Narassu Indeetaoong. Wheel Kuruma Coorooma. Wick of a candle Suku, saku Skee cootshee. Wind Kase Kassee. Wind up, to Sutsumu Feenoyoong. Wing Toobu fanne Hannay. Wink, to Manaku Meeoochee. Wood Tagi Tamoong. Write Kaku Katchoong. Writing desk Fikidassi Sheekoo. Year Fosi Ning. Young Wakai Wockka. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 129: From Thunberg's Voyage. ] NUMERALS. _Japan_. _Insu[130]. _ _Loo-Choo. _ 1 Stozee Sheeneap Stitz Itchee Teetsee, tee. 2 Statze Too Statz Nee Tatsee, ta. 3 Mitzee Liep Mitz Sang Meetsee, mee. 4 Yeatze Eenep Yeatze Shee Eotsee, yoo. 5 Idotzee Asheak Itseitzy Goo Ittitsee. 6 Nitzee Ewan Nitz Roocoo Mootsee. 7 Nanatzee Arrawan Nanatzy Stehee Nannatsee. 8 Iosee Toopish Yeatz Fatchee Eyatsee. 9 Kikonitz Lepish Kokonitz Coo Koonnitsee. 10 Yoo Wanna Too Joo Too. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 130: From Broughton's Voyage. ] COMPARISON BETWEEN THE LANGUAGES OF LOO-CHOO AND INSU. AN ISLAND IN THEJAPAN SEA. _English. _ _Insu[131]. _ _Loo-Choo. _ Come here Arkee Cung coo. To walk Appeass Atchoong. To enquire the name of Tambene Noondeega. Any thing A ship Penzy, or Foonil. Hoonee. A bow Koo Yoomee. An arrow Ay Eea. The beard Creak Feejee. The teeth Meemack Ha. A man Oikyo Ickkeega. A woman Meanako Innago. Fish net Ya Sheebee. Tobacco pipe Tsheeree Shirree. Water Wakha Meezee. To drink Horopsee Noomoong. A book Shoomootza Sheemootsee. The finger Yewbee Eebee. The thumb O yewbee Hoee eebee. The thigh Momo Moomoo. The arm Oondee Teenoo. The middle finger Nagayewbee Nackkaeebee. Paper Kame Kabee. A dog Enoo Ing. A cat Necko Mia. A child Vasasso Warrabee. The foot Assee Shanna. The chin Olongyse Ootooga. The ear Meemee Mimmee. Yes O Oo. No Ny Oongba. Hair Kamu Kurrazzee. A boat Timma Timma. Tea Tcha Cha. Sugar Sado Sata. Tobacco Tabacco Tobacco. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 131: From Broughton's Voyage. ] COMPARISON BETWEEN THE LANGUAGES OF LOO-CHOO, JAPAN, AND INSU. _English. _ _Japanese[132]. _ _Loo-Choo. _ _Insu[133]. _ To walk Ita Atchoong Appeass. A ship Fune Hoonee Penzy, or foonil. A bow Jumi Yoomee Koo. An arrow Ja Eea Ay. The finger Jubi Eebee Askippi, yewbee. The teeth Ha Ha Meemack. A man Otoko Ickkeega Oikyo. A fish net Ami Sheebee Ya. A knife Haka Seego Magiddee. An oar Ro Wayacoo Kanzee. Water Mis Meezee Wakha. To drink Nomu Noomoong Horopsee. A book Somots Sheemootsee Shomotza. The thumb Ojajubi, ojubi Hooee eebee O yewbee. The thigh Momo, soto momo Moomoo Momo. The arm Ude Teenoo Oondee. Paper Kami Kabee Kame. A dog Inu Ing Enoo. A cat Mio, neko Mia Necko. A child Kodoma Warrabee Vassasso. The lips Tsuba Seeba Koodge. The foot Assi Shanna Assee. The ear Mimi Mimmee Meemee. The hair Kami Kurrazzee Karnu. A boat Temma Timma Timma. Tea Tsjaa Cha Tcha. Sugar Satto Sata Sado. Tobacco Tabako Tobacco Tabacco. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 132: From Thunberg's Voyage. ] [Footnote 133: From Broughton's Voyage. ] WORDS OBTAINED FROM THE INHABITANTS OF THE WEST COAST OF COREA. _English. _ _Corean. _ No Poodong. Water Bool. A pipe Dewton. Hair Bodee. Eyes Doon. Mouth Jeep. Nose Ko. Hand So-an. Beard Shee-om. Tongue Chay. Ear Quee. Teeth Jee. Tree[134] Phang na moo. Grass[134] Phee. Good[134] Hota. Earth[134] K, hool. Knife[134] Khul. Jacket Chouksa. Trowsers Choongay. Shoe Po schien. Stockings, or boots Hung inn. Tobacco pouch Samb-jee. Rice (food) Pa-ap. Fan Pootsa. Stove Tok. White hat Pan-a-ee. Black hat Kat. A cock Tac. FOOTNOTES: [Footnote 134: These five words have the _h_ so strongly aspirated thatit was rarely we could pronounce them to the satisfaction of thenatives. Their language, upon the whole, is not unpleasing, and it has none ofthe harsh Chinese sounds. The natives have a remarkable facility inimitating our sounds, and they in general speak in a very loud tone ofvoice. ] THE END. * * * * * T. DAVISON, Lombard-street, Whitefriars, London.